JP2021112294A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably performing a game.SOLUTION: When a jackpot result is selected in winning/losing determination processing, an opening/closing execution mode occurs after completion of a game round in which the winning/losing determination processing is executed. When a time-shortening result is selected in winning/losing determination processing, a time-shortening state occurs without shifting to an opening/closing execution mode after completion of a game round in which the winning/losing determination processing is executed. When the ceiling game round is consumed, a time-shortening state occurs without shifting to an opening/closing execution mode. In a time-shortening state, it becomes easy to cause entry into a second operation hole or a special winning device and at the same time a short period tends to be selected as a variation display period of a game round. In this case, if information abnormality occurs in a main-side RAM 84 when starting supplying operating power, information on a fixed ceiling frequency is set to a ceiling counter 131.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area and a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery to shift to a special game state, or a predetermined entry ball It is known that a game ball enters the club to shift to a special game state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device (for example). See Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-005447

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary that the gaming is preferably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preferably performing a game.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes a game rotation control means for controlling the game rotation execution means so that the game rotation operation is executed in the game rotation.
A predetermined measuring means for measuring the number of times the game is executed, and
When the game times are executed, the number of times updating means for updating the number of times the game times are executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means, and
A predetermined privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege when the number of executions of the game times measured by the predetermined measuring means reaches a predetermined trigger number.
When it is identified that an information error has occurred in the predetermined storage means when the supply of operating power is started, the abnormality response means for executing the abnormality response process and the error response means for executing the error response process.
A predetermined setting means for executing a predetermined setting process for making the information of the predetermined measurement means a predetermined initial value based on the occurrence of the information abnormality, and a predetermined setting means.
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to make the game suitable.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine by disassembling. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display device at the time of executing a game round. (A) to (j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the main symbol and the sub symbol which are variable-displayed in each symbol string. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters and various storage areas. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the support mode. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining (a) a first hit / fail table at a low probability, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a second hit / miss table at a low probability, and (c) a hit / miss at a high probability. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the jackpot distribution table for 1st special drawing, (b) it is explanatory drawing for explaining the jackpot distribution table for 2nd special drawing, and (c) first. It is explanatory drawing for explaining 1 time saving distribution table for special drawing, and (d) is explanatory drawing for explaining the time saving distribution table for 2nd special drawing. (A) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of each jackpot result, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of each time saving result and ceiling time saving. (A) to (e) It is a time chart which shows how the time saving state is set by the time saving result or the ceiling time saving. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the general control process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure fluctuation start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during the determination of a general drawing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the variation display period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special drawing determination in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric termination processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of the high probability state counter in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the time saving result in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stop result of the special figure display part and the stop result of a symbol display device. (A) The stop result of the first special figure display unit and the symbol display device when the first game time is obtained in the game time triggered by the first hold information in the final game time in the normal game state or the time reduction state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating, (b) the game time other than the last game time of a high probability state or a time saving state, and the 1st time saving result in the game time triggered by the 1st hold information. 1 This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop result of the special figure display unit and the symbol display device. (C) The first special figure display unit and the first special figure display unit and the case where the result is missed in the game round triggered by the first hold information. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stop result of the symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process of the fluctuation pattern in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of the ceiling counter in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of the time saving state counter in the main MPU. (A) to (e) It is a time chart for explaining the execution order of the process in the process during special figure determination. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of the fluctuation selection state counter in the main MPU. (A) to (f) It is a time chart for explaining the relationship of the execution timing between the reach high frequency state and the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing executed by the main MPU in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special drawing determination in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the time saving result in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of the ceiling counter in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters and various storage areas in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special drawing determination in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the special winning device in the non-guided state, and (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the special winning device in the guided state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view for demonstrating the internal structure of the distribution winning apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters and various storage areas. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining (a) the first winning / failing table, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the second winning / failing table, and (c) an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot distribution table. , (D) An explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving distribution table, (e) an explanatory diagram for explaining the small hit distribution table, and (f) for explaining the contents of each small hit result. It is explanatory drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special drawing determination in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric termination processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure monitoring process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process executed by the main MPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the variation display period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of the time saving state counter executed by the main MPU in 8th Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a setting process for a time saving result executed by the main MPU in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of the ceiling counter in the main MPU. (A) to (g) It is a time chart for demonstrating the game state after the time saving result or the ceiling time saving occurs in the time saving state. It is a front view of the game board in tenth embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters and various storage areas. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special figure special electric control processing in a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special figure special electric control processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the variation display period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special drawing determination in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the end determination process of the time saving state in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the time saving result in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of the ceiling counter in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the left-handed notification processing in a sound light side MPU. (A) to (f) are time charts showing how the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state are executed with the first hold information as the execution target. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the variation display period executed by the main MPU in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the variation display period executed by the main MPU in the twelfth embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the game area is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration in the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

The configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. The guide rail is configured as. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

Incidentally, the game ball launch mechanism 27 has a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying the game ball stored in the upper plate 66a described later onto the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. It is provided with a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by the rotation operation of the launch operation device (or launch handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game ball is launched.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a normal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when the number of prize balls is entered into the first operating port 33 or when the balls are entered into the second operating port 34, three prize balls are paid out. When a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the special electric winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. ..

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 may be smaller than that in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33. Further, the configuration is limited to a configuration in which both the number of prize balls when the ball enters the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls when the ball enters the second operating port 34 are a plurality. Instead, the number of prize balls when the ball enters the first operating port 33 may be one, and the number of prize balls when the ball enters the second operating port 34 is one. It may be a certain configuration, or both may have a configuration in which the number of prize balls is one.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that does not enter various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through the predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the flow of the game area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into the game is also referred to as a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are opened upward. Further, both operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 33 faces upward.

The lower frame portion 36a, which is a lower portion of the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 36, is provided with a stage portion 36b so as to extend laterally above the first operating port 33, and is capable of variable display. The left frame portion 36c, which is the left portion of the symbol display device 41 in the unit 36, is an entrance of a warp passage that enables a game ball flowing down the left region of the variable display unit 36 to be guided to the stage portion 36b. Part 36d is formed. The lateral central portion of the stage portion 36b exists vertically above the first operating port 33, and the lead-out portion 36e for deriving the game ball below the stage portion 36b by its own weight is present in the central portion. Is formed. In this case, the game ball led out to the stage portion 36b and led out from a region other than the lead-out portion 36e to the lower side of the stage portion 36b is difficult to enter the first operating port 33, but the lead-out portion 36e The game ball led out from the lower side of the stage portion 36b enters the first operating port 33 with a high probability.

The first operating port 33 is opened upward, and is not provided with a member such as an opening / closing member for preventing the game ball from entering the first operating port 33. Then, in the situation where the game ball is launched in the same mode, the winning probability to the first operating port 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operating port 33 is always capable of entering a game ball that flows down the game area PA toward the first operating port 33.

The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the general electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win a prize in the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it becomes possible to win a prize in the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning the prize. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the winning of the through gate 35 is used as a trigger to perform the normal drawing pass / fail determination process, and the normal drawing unit 38 provided in the lower right corner of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass. A variable display of the pattern is performed on the normal drawing display unit 38a. Then, when the result of the normal map pass / fail determination process is the electric service open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the normal electric open state. In the general electric power open state, the general electric power accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

The cathode ray display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal drawing unit 38, a normal drawing holding display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal drawing display unit 38a. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the through gate 35 is held up to four, and the number of held balls is displayed by lighting the general drawing hold display unit 38b.

The winning / failing determination process is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the result of the hit / fail determination process is clarified through the display effect in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

The special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display unit 37a and a second special figure display unit 37b. In the first special figure display unit 37a, the winning / failing determination process is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 as a trigger, so that the pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Then, the stop result corresponding to the result of the hit / fail determination process is displayed. In this case, as a result of the hit / fail determination process, there are a jackpot result, a time saving result, and a missed result, which will be described later. It's different. The display of the stop result on the first special figure display unit 37a is maintained until the next game round is started and a new pattern variation display is started on the first special figure display unit 37a. Further, in the second special figure display unit 37b, the winning / failing determination process is performed with the winning of the second operating port 34 as a trigger, so that the pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Then, the stop result corresponding to the result of the hit / fail determination process is displayed. In this case, as a result of the hit / fail determination process, there are a jackpot result, a time saving result, and a missed result, which will be described later. It's different. The display of the stop result on the second special figure display unit 37b is maintained until the next game round is started and the new pattern variation display is started on the second special figure display unit 37b.

The first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b are composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. The patterns displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b include a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, and a plurality of types of characters. Is conceivable, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed is conceivable.

In the special figure unit 37, the first special figure reservation display unit 37c and the second special figure reservation display unit 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. .. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the first operating port 33 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display unit 37c. Further, the maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the second operating port 34 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the second special figure reservation display unit 37d.

Regarding the symbol display device 41 In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. You may.

In the symbol display device 41, when the first special symbol display unit 37a performs the variable display of the symbol based on the winning of the first operating port 33, the variable display of the symbol is performed accordingly, and the second operating port is displayed. When the second special figure display unit 37b displays the variation of the pattern based on the winning of the prize 34, the variation of the pattern is displayed accordingly. In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by winning a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also the display effect in the opening / closing execution mode described later, which shifts after the big hit result is obtained, etc. Is done.

Based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the display is started on any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 41, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the hit / fail determination process is displayed. The period from the end of the game to the completion of the process during the determination of the special figure in the main control device 71, which will be described later, corresponds to one game.

In the pachinko machine 10, the hit / fail determination process is executed based on the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34, and the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes a big hit result, so that the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. In the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 is executed, and the game ball is paid out when the special electric winning device 32 in the open state is won a prize. Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, a predetermined number of round games are executed. A round game is a game that continues until either a predetermined opening duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins a special electric winning device 32. That is. In this case, in the situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In, the open duration is set to 29 seconds and the upper limit is set to 10. Therefore, since the open duration of the round game is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game, the upper limit is set to the special electric winning device 32 in each round game. It can be expected that more than the number of game balls will win. In addition, the maximum number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition.

As the winning / failing lottery mode of the winning / failing determination process, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode so that the probability of a jackpot result in which the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs is relatively high or low. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes in which the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, the frequency with which the general public accessory 34a is opened per unit time when compared in the situation where the game ball is continuously launched to the game area PA in the same manner. The high-frequency support mode (first high-frequency support mode and second high-frequency support mode, which will be described later) and the low-frequency support mode are set so that Depending on the type of combination of the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode, the game state in the situation other than the open / close execution mode will be different. The gaming states include a normal gaming state which is a low-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode, a high-probability state which is a high-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, and a low-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode. The time saving state is set. In the high-probability state and the time-saving state, the average period of time required for one game to be digested is shorter than that in the normal game state.

Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in the lower area PAU, which is the area below the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. Further, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device in a state where the first operating port 33 is arranged upward and the second operating port 34 is arranged downward in the vertical direction. Has been done. Further, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 can be controlled to be in the open state when the through gate 35 is won, but the through gate 35 is in the area to the left of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. It is located in a left area PAL. Then, the game ball flowing down the left side region PAL is guided to the lower region PAU, and the game ball guided to the lower region PAU is guided to the region provided with the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. Can be done. Therefore, when the firing operation is performed aiming at winning the first operating port 33, not only the winning of the first operating port 33 but also the winning of the second operating port 34 can occur. When the firing operation is performed aiming at winning the second operating port 34, not only the winning of the second operating port 34 may occur, but also the winning of the first operating port 33 may occur.

When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode as described above, so that it is difficult for the second operating port 34 to win a prize, and the first operating port is more difficult than the second operating port 34. Winning of 33 is likely to occur. Therefore, in the normal game state, the execution target of the game is basically the first special figure display unit 37a, and when a prize is accidentally generated in the second operating port 34, the second special figure display unit 37b is used. It becomes the execution target of the game times.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is a high probability state or a time saving state, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode as described above, so that the second operating port 34 is likely to win a prize. In this case, the second operating port 34 is more likely to win a prize than the first operating port 33. However, as described above, when the firing operation is performed with the aim of winning the second operating port 34, the first operating port 33 may be won and the lead unit 36e of the stage portion 36b is guided. Since the game ball will win the first operating port 33 with a high probability, the first operating port 33 will be won with the same frequency as the low frequency support mode even in the high frequency support mode. ..

The effect for the game round is executed by the symbol display device 41 in a mode corresponding to the patterns of the special figure display units 37a and 37b that are the targets of the game round. The display contents of the symbol display device 41 when the effect for game rounds is executed will be described.

4 (a) and 4 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 when the game round is executed.

As shown in FIG. 4A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas on the display surface of the symbol display device 41. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. That is, when the game round is executed, the variable display of the symbol is performed by using most of the display surface of the symbol display device 41.

5 (a) to 5 (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the main symbol and the sub symbol which are variablely displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. As shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (j), there are nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" and shell-shaped symbols, which are a kind of symbols. It is composed of a sub-design consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 4 (b), in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is placed between each main symbol. They are arranged one by one. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. In the symbol display device 41, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 4A, the symbol display device 41 is set with five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5. There is.

When the symbol display device 41 performs variable display of symbols based on winning a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the symbols in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display is started so as to be performed. Then, basically, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It ends with.

When the variation display of the symbols is completed, if the result of the hit / fail determination process in the main control device 71 described later is the jackpot result described later, the same combination of symbols is formed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. NS. In addition, if the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time saving result described later and the time saving state is set triggered by the time saving result, one of the effective lines is performed when the variation display of the symbol ends. Predetermined symbol combinations (for example, "1 ・ 2 ・ 3" and "3.4.1") that are neither the same symbol combination nor the reach symbol combination are formed on L1 to L5. In this case, since there are a plurality of types of time saving results as described later, the content of the combination of predetermined symbols also differs depending on the type of time saving results. On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time saving result described later and the time saving state is not set triggered by the time saving result, the reach symbol is displayed when the variation display of the symbol ends. A non-reach out-of-reach stop symbol that does not form a combination is displayed. That is, if the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time saving result described later and the time saving state is not set triggered by the time saving result, the stop result in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is the hit / fail judgment process. Can result in the same stop result as if the result of was out of order.

As described above, in the configuration in which the fluctuation display of the symbols is performed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the expected effect is set as the display effect of the symbol display device 41 when the game round is executed. The expected effect is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state in which a jackpot result is likely to occur at a stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is started. say. Two types of expected effects are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the occurrence of the jackpot result in the stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, the combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying the same type of symbols for the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the remaining middle symbols are displayed in that state. A display state in which a variable display of a symbol is performed in column Z2 is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a reach effect. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface to perform a reach effect. If it is a game time that results in a big hit, a symbol of the same type as the symbol forming the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2, and if it is a game time that does not result in a big hit, the reach symbol A symbol of a type different from the symbol forming the combination of is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2.

In the notice display, after the variable display of the symbols is started in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols are variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or some of the symbol rows Z1 to Z1. In the situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in Z3, the mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. In addition, the background screen has a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur in any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but it is higher when the reach display is performed than when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

As shown in FIG. 4B, a hold display area 42 and a state suggestion area 43 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 in addition to the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The hold display area 42 is set at the lower part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. In the hold display area 42, an image for notifying the player of the number of hold information acquired by the main control device 71, which will be described later, based on the winning of the first operation port 33 is displayed in the hold display area 42. It has a 42a and a second hold display area 42b on which an image for notifying the player of the number of hold information acquired by the main control device 71, which will be described later based on the winning of the second operation port 34, is displayed. .. The hold information is information that triggers the execution of the hit / miss determination process in the main control device 71, and is information that triggers the execution of the game round. The hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as the first hold information) acquired by winning the prize in the first operation port 33 triggers the execution of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a, and the second operation port 34 wins a prize. The hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as the second hold information) acquired as a trigger for the execution of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b. A maximum of 4 pieces of the first hold information are held and stored, and a maximum of 4 pieces of the second hold information are also held and stored.

In the first hold display area 42a, a number of first hold images G1 corresponding to the number of first hold information is displayed. That is, if the number of the first reserved information stored on hold is 0, the first reserved image G1 is not displayed in the first reserved display area 42a. If the number of first reserved information stored on hold is one, one first reserved image G1 is displayed, and if the number of first reserved information stored on hold is two, the first reserved image G1 is displayed. If two images G1 are displayed and the number of first reserved information stored on hold is three, three first reserved images G1 are displayed and the number of first reserved information stored on hold is four. If so, four first reserved images G1 are displayed. When a plurality of first reserved images G1 are displayed, the plurality of first reserved images G1 are displayed side by side at regular intervals. Further, when the number of the first reserved information stored on hold increases, the first reserved image G1 is displayed so as to increase toward the right, and the first reserved information serves as a trigger for the start of the game round and is stored on hold. When the number of the first reserved information being held decreases, the first reserved image G1 is displayed so as to decrease toward the left.

In the second hold display area 42b, a number of second hold images G2 corresponding to the number of second hold information is displayed. That is, if the number of the second hold information stored on hold is 0, the second hold image G2 is not displayed in the second hold display area 42b. If the number of second reserved information stored on hold is one, one second reserved image G2 is displayed, and if the number of second reserved information stored on hold is two, the second reserved image G2 is displayed. If two images G2 are displayed and the number of second reserved information stored on hold is three, three second reserved images G2 are displayed and the number of second reserved information stored on hold is four. If so, four second reserved images G2 are displayed. When a plurality of second reserved images G2 are displayed, the plurality of second reserved images G2 are displayed side by side at regular intervals. Further, when the number of the second reserved information stored on hold increases, the second reserved image G2 is displayed so as to increase toward the right, and the second reserved information serves as a trigger for the start of the game round and is stored on hold. When the number of the second reserved information being held decreases, the second reserved image G2 is displayed so as to decrease toward the left.

In addition, in FIG. 4B, since the number of the first reserved information stored on hold is four and the number of the second reserved information is four, the first reserved information is first reserved in the first reserved display area 42a. Four images G1 are displayed, and four second reserved images G2 are displayed in the second reserved display area 42b.

The state suggestion area 43 is set in the upper part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. The state suggestion area 43 has a display area narrower than the display area of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In the state suggestion area 43, the symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 displays the variation of the symbol for the game round, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the hit / miss determination process of the game round is not stopped and displayed. In some situations, color switching is displayed. Specifically, a predetermined display color pattern is repeated in the order of red → blue → green → red → blue → green → red. Then, at the timing when the stop result corresponding to the result of the hit / fail judgment process is displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and the confirmation display (stationary display) is started, the stop corresponding to the game status at that time and the result of the hit / miss judgment process is stopped. The result is displayed. In this case, if the result of the hit / fail determination process is a jackpot result or a miss result, the red color is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43. In addition, when the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time saving result described later, if the time saving state is set triggered by the time saving result, red is stopped and displayed regardless of the type of the time saving result, and the time saving is displayed. If the time saving state is not set triggered by the result, blue or green is stopped and displayed depending on the type of the time saving result. As described above, when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is the time saving result described later and the time saving state is not set triggered by the time saving result, the stop result in the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 is the hit / fail judgment process. In a configuration in which the result of the above can be the same as the stop result, the time reduction state is not set when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is the time reduction result described later. By making the display content of the state suggestion area 43 different between the case and the case where the result of the hit / fail judgment process is out of order, the result of the hit / miss judgment process is the time saving result described later, and the time saving result is concerned. It is possible to display different display contents as a whole of the symbol display device 41 depending on whether the time saving state is not set with the above as an opportunity and the result of the hit / fail determination process is different. ..

Returning to the explanation of the game board 24 (see FIG. 3), when the result of the hit / fail determination process is a big hit result, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode as described above. In the open / close execution mode, the open / close control of the special electric winning device 32 is executed. The special electric winning device 32 includes a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and also includes an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in either the closed state or the open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and when a jackpot result is selected in the winning / failing determination process, the opening / closing door 32a can be switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize. ing. It should be noted that, although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which winning is less likely to occur than in the open state. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the display effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode is executed by the symbol display device 41.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 formed by attaching the game board 24 having the above configuration to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire area of the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the gaming area PA is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62. It may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting unit 64 is provided above the window unit 61. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 65 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 61, an upper bulging portion 66 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 67 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 66a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 66, and a lower plate 67a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 67. The upper plate 66a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 67a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 66a.

Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 71 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 71 has a main control board housed in a board box. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably bonded to each other, and a predetermined portion must be destroyed at the time of separation. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of what has been done is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can be considered.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 71. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism unit 73 and a control device collecting unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game ball paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 66a or the lower plate 67a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with, for example, a back pack board having a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying a main power supply of 24 volts AC.

The control device collective unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by the operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. It is equipped with a power supply / launch control device 78 that controls the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 71 includes a main control board 81 that controls the main control of the game. The MPU 82 is mounted on the main control board 81. The MPU 82 is a ROM 83 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 82, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed. A certain RAM 84, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 82, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of the control device other than the main control device 71.

The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 85 provided in the main control device 71 is connected to the input side of the MPU 82, and a payout control device 77 is also connected to the input side. A power supply / emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 85, and power is supplied to the MPU 82 via the power failure monitoring board 85.

Various sensors such as various prize detection sensors 86a to 86e are connected to the input side of the MPU 82. The various winning detection sensors 86a to 86e include a detection sensor 86a provided in the general winning opening 31, a detection sensor 86b provided in the special electric winning device 32, a detection sensor 86c provided in the first operating port 33, and a second operation. The detection sensor 86d provided in the mouth 34 and the detection sensor 86e provided in the through gate 35 are included. Based on the detection results of the various winning detection sensors 86a to 86e, the MPU 82 determines the winning of each winning ball. Further, in the MPU 82, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

A power failure monitoring board 85, a payout control device 77, and a voice emission control device 91 are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77, for example, based on the winning determination result for the winning ball unit corresponding to the winning. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the voice emission control device 91.

On the output side of the MPU 82, there is a drive unit 32b for special electric power that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32a of the special electric winning device 32, and a drive unit 34b for general electric power that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. The drawing unit 37 and the drawing unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display unit 37a, a second special figure display unit 37b, a first special figure hold display unit 37c, and a second special figure hold display unit 37d. Are all connected to the output side of the MPU 82. Similarly, the normal drawing unit 38 is provided with a normal drawing display unit 38a and a normal drawing holding display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 81, and the MPU 82 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b is executed in the MPU 82 so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed. Further, the drive control of the drive unit 34b for the utility is executed in the MPU 82 so that the utility accessory 34a is opened and closed when the utility opening of the utility object 34a is won. Further, at each game round, the display control of the special figure unit 37 is executed in the MPU 82. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state is clearly shown, the display control of the general figure unit 38 is executed in the MPU 82.

The power failure monitoring board 85 relays between the main control board 81 and the power supply / emission control device 78, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the MPU 82 of the main control device 71.

The power supply / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the main control device 71, the payout control device 77, and the like are generated with the required operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied.

Specifically, the power supply / emission control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit 78a during power-on and a power supply unit 78b during power-off. The power supply unit 78a during power-on is connected to a commercial power source in a game hall or the like, and generates operating power in a situation where external power is supplied from the commercial power source, and supplies the generated operating power. Has a function. The power supply unit 78b during power interruption is composed of a capacitor, and the power supplied from the power supply unit 78a during power supply when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from an external power supply). Is charged by. Further, in a power cut state (when the power supply from the external power supply is cut off) such as when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply, the power is discharged from the power supply unit 78b during power failure. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 84 of the control device 71 and the RAM (not shown) of the payout control device 77. Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 and the RAM of the payout control device 77 is not erased while the backup power is being supplied from the power supply unit 78b during power failure. Memory is retained.

Here, the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 temporarily stores information on the current game state and the progress of the game, and the RAM of the payout control device 77 temporarily stores information on the number of unpaid prize balls. Will be done. In this case, by supplying backup power to these RAMs from the power supply unit 78b during power interruption as described above, even if there is no power supply from the power supply unit 78a during power supply, the current game It is possible to store the state, the progress of the game, and the unpaid prize ball information for a predetermined period of time. On the other hand, backup power is not supplied to the voice emission control device 91 and the display control device 101 from the power supply unit 78b during power failure. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 95 of the voice emission control device 91 and the RAM 105 of the display control device 101 is not backed up, and is destroyed or destroyed when the power supply from the power supply unit 78a during power supply is stopped. It will be erased.

The capacity of the power supply unit 78b during power failure is secured relatively large, and the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main controller 71 before the power is cut off is retained within a predetermined period (for example, one or two days). NS. The power supply unit 78b during power failure is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like.

The power supply / emission control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure (not shown), which is different from the power supply unit 78b for power failure. In the power supply / emission control device 78, even after the DC stable 24 volt power supply becomes less than 22 volt, the power supply unit for power failure discharges the power for a sufficient period of time to execute the power failure process described later. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive power supply for the control system, at a normal value. As a result, the main control device 71 and the like can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The power supply / launch control device 78 is provided with a launch control unit 78c in addition to the various power supply units 78a and 78b. A touch sensor 28a, a push sensor 28b, and a variable resistor 28c built in the launch operation device 28 are electrically connected to the launch control unit 78c.

The touch sensor 28a has a built-in capacitor, and when the player's hand comes into contact with the outer surface of the operation handle and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, a predetermined electric signal corresponding to the handle operation detection is emitted. Output to. Upon receiving the predetermined electric signal, the launch control unit 78c recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operation handle. Further, the launch control unit 78c grasps whether or not the launch stop switch of the launch operation device 28 is operated according to the electric signal received from the push sensor 28b, and also operates the operation handle according to the electric signal received through the variable resistor 28c. Grasp the amount of rotation operation of.

The launch control unit 78c transmits a condition satisfaction signal of a predetermined signal form to the MPU 82 of the main control device 71 when a predetermined launch condition of the game ball is satisfied. Specifically, the launch control unit 78c receives a signal from the touch sensor 28a indicating that the operation handle is being touched by the player, and a signal indicating that the launch stop switch is not manually operated by the player. Is continuously transmitted from the push sensor 28b to the MPU 82 as a HI level condition satisfaction signal (signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction). If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition satisfaction signal (a signal that does not correspond to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the MPU 82. However, the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. Further, in addition to the above conditions, a condition that the ball lending device is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added as a condition for transmitting a condition satisfying signal corresponding to the condition satisfying.

In the MPU 82, if the HI level condition satisfying signal is received and the launch of the game ball can be permitted, the launch control unit 78c is notified of the HI level launch permission signal (signal corresponding to the launch permission). Continue to send. When the MPU 82 does not receive the HI level condition satisfaction signal from the launch control unit 78c, the MPU 82 transmits a LOW level launch permission signal (a signal that does not correspond to the launch permission), but the launch permission signal LOW. The relationship between the level and the HI level may be reversed.

The launch control unit 78c periodically drives and controls the game ball launch mechanism 27 when the game ball launch mechanism 27 is electrically connected and receives a HI level launch permission signal from the MPU 82. In this case, if the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball launch mechanism 27, one game ball is launched into the game area PA in a specific firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). NS. Further, at the time of this firing, since the firing intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c, the game ball is launched with the intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle.

The voice emission control device 91 includes a voice emission control board 92 on which the MPU 93 is mounted. The MPU 93 is a ROM 94 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 93, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 94 is executed. A certain RAM 95, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in. The MPU 93 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 based on the command received from the main control device 71, and transmits the command to the display control device 101.

The display control device 101 includes a display control board 102 on which the MPU 103 is mounted. The MPU 103 is a ROM 104 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 103, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 104 is executed. A RAM 105, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in. The MPU 103 controls the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the voice emission control device 91.

Although not shown, the display control board 102 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like in addition to the MPU 103. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data in the video RAM, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 82, ROM 83 and RAM 84 of the main control device 71 are referred to as the main MPU 82, the main ROM 83 and the main RAM 84, and the MPU 93, ROM 94 and RAM 95 of the voice emission control device 91 are on the sound light side. The MPU 93, the sound light side ROM 94, and the sound light side RAM 95 are referred to, and the MPU 103, ROM 104, and RAM 105 of the display control device 101 are referred to as a display side MPU 103, a display side ROM 104, and a display side RAM 105.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 82>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 82 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

The main MPU 82 uses various counter information during the game to perform a winning lottery, setting the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b, setting the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting the display of the normal figure display unit 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, a hit random number counter C1 used for a lottery for hit occurrence, a type random number counter C2 used for determining a jackpot result type and a time saving result type, and the like. Reach generation when the symbol display device 41 deviates and fluctuates The reach random number counter C3 used for lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, the special symbol display units 37a, 37b, and the symbol display. A fluctuation type counter CS that determines the fluctuation display period in the device 41 is used. Further, the general electric random number counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is set to the general electric open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 84b of the main RAM 84.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is reserved for special figures provided in the main RAM 84 when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. It is stored in the area 84a. The special figure holding area 84a includes a first special figure holding area 111, a second special figure holding area 112, and an execution area 113 for special drawing.

The first special figure holding area 111 includes a first area 111a, a second area 111b, a third area 111c, and a fourth area 111d. It is stored in any of the areas 111a to 111d as the first hold information of each numerical value of the type random number counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3. In this case, in the first area 111a to the fourth area 111d, when the winning of the first operating port 33 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 111a → the second area 111b → the third area 111c → the third area 111c. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the four areas 111d. By providing the four areas 111a to 111d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the first operating port 33 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored and stored in the first special figure holding area 111 is not limited to four, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular.

The second special figure holding area 112 includes a first area 112a, a second area 112b, a third area 112c, and a fourth area 112d, and the winning random number counter C1 is provided according to the winning history of the second operating port 34. Each numerical information of the type random number counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 112a to 112d as the second hold information. In this case, in the first area 112a to the fourth area 112d, when the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 112a → the second area 112b → the third area 112c → the third area 112c. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the four areas 112d. By providing the four areas 112a to 112d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the second operating port 34 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored in the second special figure holding area 112 is not limited to four, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular.

The execution area 113 for the special figure is an area in which the hold information to be subjected to the hit / fail determination, the distribution determination, or the like is stored when the variable display is started on any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 111a of the first special figure hold area 111 is moved to the execution area 113 for special figure. NS. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display unit 37b is started, the hold information stored in the first area 112a of the second special figure hold area 112 is moved to the execution area 113 for the special figure.

The information corresponding to the Fuden random number counter C4 is stored in the Fuzu holding area 84c when a prize is won in the through gate 35. The normal figure holding area 84c includes a first area 114a, a second area 114b, a third area 114c, and a fourth area 114d, and numerical information of the normal electric random number counter C4 according to the winning history to the through gate 35. Is stored in any of the areas 114a to 114d as the reserved information on the normal drawing side. In this case, in the first area 114a to the fourth area 114d, when the through gate 35 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area 114a → the second area 114b → the third area 114c → the fourth area. Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 114d. By providing the four areas 114a to 114d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the through gate 35 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored in the holding area 84c is not limited to 4, but may be any number of items, such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, and may be a single number. It may be. An execution area 115 for a normal map is provided in the normal map reservation area 84c. The execution area 115 for the normal map is an area in which the hold information of the target to be processed for determining whether the normal map is correct or not is stored when the variable display is started on the normal map display unit 38a. Specifically, when the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 114a of the normal map hold area 84c is moved to the execution area 115 for the normal map.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the Fuden random number counter C4 will be described. The normal electric random number counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The Fuden random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the Fuzu holding area 84c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a normal figure hit / miss determination process is performed to determine whether or not to control the general electric accessory 34a to the open state by the value of the stored general electric random number counter C4.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 34a are different from each other. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the support mode.

In the support mode, the frequency with which the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened per unit time when compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched in the same manner with respect to the game area. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that is relatively high and low. Further, as the high frequency support mode, a first high frequency support mode and a second high frequency support mode are set.

The probability of winning the electric service is relative as the judgment mode when the normal figure winning / failing determination process for determining whether or not the utility object 34a is in the open state by lottery is executed. There is a high-probability mode on the normal map side and a low-probability mode on the normal map side so as to be high and low. In the low-probability mode on the normal map side, the probability of winning the electric service is halved in one normal-figure winning / failing judgment process, whereas in the high-probability mode on the normal-figure side, one normal-figure winning / failing judgment is made. The probability of winning the electric service opening in the process is 4/5.

When the normal figure hit / miss determination process is executed, the variable display of the pattern is started on the normal figure display unit 38a. In this case, as the fluctuation period of the normal map, which is the duration of the variable display times in which the variable display of the pattern is executed on the normal map display unit 38a, a long period and a short period are set so that the period is relatively long and short. Exists. The long term is 10 seconds, while the short term is 1 second.

When the variation display times of the normal map display unit 38a are completed, the stop result corresponding to the judgment result of the normal map correctness determination process that triggered the execution of the fluctuation display times is displayed on the normal map display unit 38a. .. In this case, if the determination result of the normal map pass / fail determination process is a deviation result, the stop result corresponding to the deviation result is displayed on the normal map display unit 38a, and the transition to the normal power open state does not occur. When the holding information on the normal drawing side is stored in the normal drawing holding area 84c, a new normal drawing pass / fail determination process is executed for the holding information on the normal drawing side, and the normal drawing display unit 38a newly executes the holding information. Fluctuation display times are started. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the normal figure winning / failing determination process is the result corresponding to the electric service open winning, the stop result corresponding to the winning result is displayed on the general drawing display unit 38a, and the transition to the normal electric opening state is made. appear.

As the execution mode in the open state of the general electric power, there are a high expectation mode and a low expectation mode so that the expected degree of entry of the game ball into the general electric accessory 34a is relatively high and low. In the low expectation mode, the short opening of the general electric accessory 34a occurs once. The duration of the short opening is 0.7 seconds. As already explained, the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, so if the short opening of the general electric accessory 34a occurs once, the game ball basically enters the second operating port 34. Even if it does not occur, the number of balls entered is about one. The open state of the normal power is also terminated when the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit of 10 on the normal power side, but when the short opening occurs once. As described above, even if the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 is about one, the upper limit number of game balls on the normal electric side does not enter the second operating port 34.

In the high expectation mode, the long opening of the general electric accessory 34a occurs three times. The duration of the long opening is 2 seconds. As already explained, the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, so if the long opening of the general electric accessory 34a occurs once, about three game balls will enter the second operating port 34. obtain. Then, in the high expectation mode, the long opening occurs three times with an interval period (specifically, 1 second) on the normal power side in which the second operating port 34 is closed. Therefore, when the normal power open state in the high expectation mode occurs, about nine game balls can enter. As described above, the open state of the normal power is terminated when the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit of 10 on the normal power side, so that the normal power in the high expectation mode is used. When the open state occurs, an event may occur in which the open state of the normal power is terminated by the upper limit number of game balls on the normal power side entering the second operating port 34.

In the configuration in which the judgment mode of the normal figure hit / fail judgment process, the fluctuation period of the normal figure in the normal figure display unit 38a, and the execution mode of the normal power open state are set as described above, the normal figure hit / miss judgment process is performed in the low frequency support mode. The judgment mode is the low probability mode on the normal map side, the fluctuation period of the normal map is long, and the execution mode in the normal power open state is the low expectation mode in which one short opening occurs. In addition, in the first high-frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the normal-figure hit / fail judgment process is the high-probability mode on the normal-figure side, the fluctuation period of the normal-figure is short, and the execution mode in the normal-power open state is three long open times. It becomes a high expectation mode that occurs. In addition, in the second high-frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the normal-figure hit / fail judgment process is the low-probability mode on the normal-figure side, the fluctuation period of the normal-figure is short, and the execution mode in the normal-power open state is three long open times. It becomes a high probability mode that occurs. Therefore, when the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner so as to generate a prize for the through gate 35, the ratio of the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 being open per unit time. The first high-frequency support mode has the highest expectation, the second high-frequency support mode has the next highest degree, and the low-frequency support mode has the lowest degree of expectation. Further, in the low frequency support mode, the execution mode in the open state of the normal power is the low expectation mode, so that in the low frequency support mode, the game ball hardly enters the second operating port 34. On the other hand, in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the execution mode in the open state is the high-expectation mode. It can be expected that the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of the second hold information in the second special figure hold area 112.

In addition, the configuration for making the expected degree of the ratio that the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the open state differs between the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode per unit time is provided. It is not limited to the above, for example, a short period is selected in the first high frequency support mode as a fluctuation period of the general figure, whereas a short period and a long period are selected in the second high frequency support mode. In the configuration in which the medium period is selected, the long release occurs three times in the first high frequency support mode as the execution mode in the normal power open state, whereas the long release occurs in the second high frequency support mode. It may be configured to occur multiple times. Further, although the judgment mode of the normal figure hit / miss judgment process is the same in the high probability mode on the normal figure side in the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode, the fluctuation period of the normal figure or the execution of the normal power open state is executed. Depending on the content of the mode, the first high-frequency support mode is more expected than the second high-frequency support mode in that the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the open state per unit time. It may be configured.

Next, the hit random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 9999 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 9999). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, stored in the first special figure holding area 111 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, and the second at the timing when the game ball wins the second operating port 34. It is stored in the special figure holding area 112. Then, the hit / fail determination process is performed using the numerical information of the stored hit random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that is won in the winning / failing determination process is stored in the main ROM 83 as a winning / failing table. In the pachinko machine 10, there are a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode in which the probability of a big hit result is relatively high or low as a winning / losing lottery mode of the winning / failing determination process. As the pass / fail table referred to in the pass / fail determination process in the low probability mode, the first pass / fail table 121 at the time of low probability referred to when the pass / fail determination process is executed for the first hold information, and the second hold information. A second pass / fail table 122 at the time of low probability is provided, which is referred to when the pass / fail determination process is executed. Further, a hit / miss table 123 at the time of high probability is provided as a hit / miss table referred to in the hit / miss determination process in the high probability mode.

FIG. 9A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first pass / fail table 121 at the time of low probability, and FIG. 9B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second pass / fail table 122 at the time of low probability. FIG. 9C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pass / fail table 123 at the time of high probability.

As shown in FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (c), there are a jackpot result, a time saving result, and a missed result as a result of the hit / fail determination process. The jackpot result is a winning / failing result that can be a trigger for shifting to the open / close execution mode in which a plurality of round games are executed, and also can be a trigger for shifting to the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode. The time saving result is a result of success or failure that does not trigger a transition to the open / close execution mode and does not trigger a transition to the winning / failing lottery mode, but can trigger a transition to the support mode. The deviation result is a winning / failing result that does not trigger a transition to the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode.

The pachinko machine 10 has a set value that determines the advantage per unit time. As for the set value, the larger n of "setting n" (n is an integer of "1" to "6") (that is, the higher the set value), the higher the advantage. There are "setting 1" to "setting 6" as setting values. As shown in FIG. 9A, in the first hit / fail table 121 at the time of low probability, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the set value, the lower the probability of a deviation result. .. On the other hand, the probability of achieving a time saving result is set to be the same regardless of any of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

Specifically, 50 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is the jackpot result in the lowest setting value "setting 1", and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is the time saving result is set. 100 pieces are set as the number of, and 9850 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in "Setting 2", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 1", 52 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is the jackpot result, and the hit random number counter which is the time saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9848 is set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in "Setting 3", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 2", 54 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and a hit random number counter which is a time saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9846 is set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in "Setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 3", 56 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and a hit random number counter which is a time saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9844 is set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in "Setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 4", 58 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and a hit random number counter which is a time saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9842 is set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in the highest setting value "setting 6", 60 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a time saving result. 100 pieces are set, and 9840 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 that results in a deviation. As described above, the probability of a time saving result is higher than the probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 9B, in the second hit / fail table 122 at the time of low probability, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the set value, the lower the probability of a deviation result. .. On the other hand, the probability of achieving a time saving result is set to be the same regardless of any of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

Specifically, 50 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is the jackpot result in the lowest setting value "setting 1", and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is the time saving result is set. 120 pieces are set as the number of, and 9830 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in "Setting 2", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 1", 52 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is the jackpot result, and the hit random number counter which is the time saving result. 120 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9828 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in "Setting 3", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 2", 54 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and a hit random number counter which is a time saving result. 120 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9826 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in "Setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 3", 56 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and a hit random number counter which is a time saving result. 120 are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9824 are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in "Setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 4", 58 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and a hit random number counter which is a time saving result. 120 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9822 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in the highest setting value "setting 6", 60 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a time saving result. 120 pieces are set, and 9820 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 that results in a deviation.

That is, the probability of the jackpot result of each set value is the same in the first hit / fail table 121 at the time of low probability and the second hit / fail table 122 at the time of low probability. On the other hand, the probability that the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process is higher in the second hit / miss table 122 at the time of low probability than in the first hit / miss table 121 with low probability. Therefore, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the case where the winning / failing determination process is executed for the second reserved information is more than the case where the winning / failing determination process is executed for the first reserved information. , The probability that a time-saving result will be selected increases.

It should be noted that the probability of selecting the time saving result in the hit / fail determination process is the same or substantially the same in the first hit / miss table 121 at the time of low probability and the second hit / miss table 122 at the time of low probability. The configuration may be such that the first pass / fail table 121 at the time of low probability is higher than the second pass / fail table 122 at the time of low probability. Further, the first hit / fail table 121 at the time of low probability is not limited to the configuration in which the probability of the time saving result is the same for each set value, and may be configured to fluctuate according to the set value. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of the time saving result, or the higher the set value, the lower the probability of the time saving result. Further, the second hit / fail table 122 at the time of low probability is not limited to the configuration in which the probability of the time saving result is the same for each set value, and may be configured to fluctuate according to the set value. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of the time saving result, or the higher the set value, the lower the probability of the time saving result.

As shown in FIG. 9C, in the hit / fail table 123 at the time of high probability, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the set value, the lower the probability of a deviation result. On the other hand, the probability of achieving a time saving result is set to be the same regardless of any of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

Specifically, 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is the jackpot result in the lowest setting value "setting 1", and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is the time saving result is set. As the number of, 100 is set, and as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is the result of deviation, 9400 is set. Further, in "Setting 2", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 1", 520 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and a hit random number counter which is a time saving result is set. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9380 is set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in "Setting 3", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 2", 540 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and a hit random number counter which is a time saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9360 is set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in "Setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 3", 560 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and a hit random number counter which is a time saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9340 is set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in "Setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 4", 580 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and a hit random number counter which is a time saving result is set. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9320 is set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in the highest setting value "setting 6", 600 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a time saving result. 100 pieces are set, and 9300 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 that results in a deviation.

When the hit / fail table 123 at the time of high probability is in the high probability mode, the hit / fail determination process is executed for the first hold information or the hit / fail judgment process is executed for the second hold information. Even if there is, it is referred to. As a result, the hit / fail table corresponds to the case where the hit / fail judgment process is executed for the first hold information in the high probability mode and the case where the hit / fail judgment process is executed for the second hold information in the high probability mode. It is possible to suppress the storage capacity of the main ROM 83 required for storing the pass / fail table, as compared with the configuration provided with the above.

In "Setting 1", the probability of a jackpot result is 1/200 in the low probability mode and 1/20 of 10 times that in the high probability mode. In "Setting 2", the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/192 in the low probability mode and about 1/19.2, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In "Setting 3", the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/185 in the low probability mode and about 1/18.5, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In "Setting 4", the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/179 in the low probability mode and about 1 / 17.9, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In "Setting 5", the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/172 in the low probability mode and about 1 / 17.2, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In "setting 6", the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/167 in the low probability mode and about 1 / 16.7, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. That is, in any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", the probability of a jackpot result is 10 times higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

On the other hand, the probability of achieving a time saving result is 1/100 in any of the "setting 1" to "setting 6" in the first hit / fail table 121 at the time of low probability and the hit / miss table 123 at the time of high probability, which is a low probability. In the second pass / fail table 122 of the time, any of "setting 1" to "setting 6" is about 1/83. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the hit / fail table 123 at the time of high probability, the probability of a time saving result is higher than that of the first hit / miss table 121 at the time of low probability and from the second hit / miss table 122 at the time of low probability. May be set to be lower than that of the second pass / fail table 122 at the time of low probability.

In addition, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is the big hit result may be aggregated and set so as to be a serial number, and at least a part or all of the numerical information may be distributed and set so as not to be a serial number. It may be configured as such. Further, the numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is the result of shortening the time may be aggregated and set so as to be a serial number, and at least a part or all of the numerical information may be distributed and set so as not to be a serial number. It may be configured as such.

As described above, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, regardless of whether the first hold information is the trigger or the second hold information is the trigger. The value is more advantageous for the player. In addition, the open / close execution mode is the period in which the amount of increase in the number of balls held by the player per unit time is the largest, and the probability of the jackpot result that triggers the transition of the open / close execution mode fluctuates according to the set value. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the set value.

In a configuration in which the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is low probability mode regardless of any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". In, the probability is a certain number of times (specifically, 10 times) higher than the probability of a jackpot result, which is a number larger than "1". As a result, it is possible to keep the fluctuation rate of the probability of a jackpot result between the low probability mode and the high probability mode constant regardless of the setting state.

The probability of a jackpot result when comparing combinations with the same set value and winning / failing lottery mode is the same when the first hold information is used as a trigger and when the second hold information is used as a trigger. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a difference in the probability of occurrence of the jackpot result between the case where the first hold information is used as the trigger and the case where the second hold information is used as a trigger.

The probability of a time saving result when the first hold information is used as an opportunity is the same regardless of any of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In addition, the probability that the time saving result will be obtained when the second hold information is used as an opportunity is the same regardless of any of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, it becomes possible for the player to limit the target to be paid attention to in order to estimate the set value to the jackpot result, and it becomes possible to make it difficult to estimate the set value. On the other hand, the probability of a time saving result is higher when the second hold information is used as an opportunity than when the first hold information is used as a trigger. As a result, it is possible to make the frequency of occurrence of the time saving result different between the case where the game round triggered by the first hold information is executed and the case where the game round triggered by the second hold information is executed.

The type random number counter C2 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The type random number counter C2 is periodically updated, stored in the first special figure holding area 111 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, and the second at the timing when the game ball wins the second operating port 34. It is stored in the special figure holding area 112.

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results can be obtained by providing differences in three conditions: the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode, the winning / failing lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. It is set. A jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure is provided as a jackpot distribution table to be referred to in the jackpot distribution determination process when the jackpot result is selected in the hit / fail determination process for the first reserved information. There is. Further, a jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure is provided as a jackpot distribution table to be referred to in the jackpot distribution determination process when the jackpot result is selected in the hit / fail determination process for the second hold information. Has been done.

FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special drawing, and FIG. 10B is an explanation for explaining the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special drawing. It is a figure. As shown in FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b), the jackpot distribution tables 125 and 126 include 5R low probability results, 5R high accuracy results, and 10R high accuracy results as the types of jackpot results. It is set. FIG. 11A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of each jackpot result.

The 5R low probability result is generated when a jackpot result is obtained in the hit / fail judgment process and is selected in the jackpot distribution determination process as described above. As for the 5R low probability result, the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode is 5, the win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the first high frequency. It is a big hit result that becomes the support mode. The low-probability mode in this case continues at least until the next open / close execution mode occurs. In addition, the first high-frequency support mode ends when 100 game times have been completed without a new opening / closing execution mode. When 100 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

As already explained, the 5R high accuracy result is generated by becoming a big hit result in the hit / fail judgment process and being selected in the big hit distribution judgment process. As for the 5R high probability result, the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode is 5, the winning / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the first high frequency. It is a big hit result that becomes the support mode. In this case, the high-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode are terminated when 100 game times are completed without a new opening / closing execution mode. When 100 game times are exhausted, the winning / losing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

The 10R high-accuracy result is generated when a jackpot result is obtained in the hit / fail determination process and is selected in the jackpot distribution determination process as described above. As for the 10R high probability result, the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode is 10, the win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the first high frequency. It is a big hit result that becomes the support mode. In this case, the high-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode are terminated when 100 game times are completed without a new opening / closing execution mode. When 100 game times are exhausted, the winning / losing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 10A, the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure has 5R low accuracy result, 5R high accuracy result, and 10R high accuracy result set as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. ing. In the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 14" corresponds to the 5R low accuracy result, and the type random number counter C2 of "15 to 22" corresponds to the 5R high accuracy result. Corresponding, the type random number counter C2 of "23-29" corresponds to the 10R high accuracy result. On the other hand, in the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure, as shown in FIG. 10B, 5R low probability result and 10R high probability result are set as the types of jackpot results to be sorted. In the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 14" corresponds to the 5R low accuracy result, and the type random number counter C2 of "15 to 29" corresponds to the 10R high accuracy result. It corresponds.

The jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure and the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure have the same probability of becoming the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode when the jackpot is won. On the other hand, the average number of times the round game is executed is larger in the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure than in the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure. Therefore, as the type of jackpot result that can be selected when the jackpot is won, the prize in the second operating port 34 is higher than that in the case where the winning / failing determination process is performed when the winning in the first operating port 33 occurs. It is more advantageous for the player when it occurs and the winning / failing determination process is performed.

Not only are multiple types of jackpot results set, but multiple types of time-saving results are also set. Then, when the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process, the type of the time saving result is determined by the lottery using the type random number counter C2 used for determining the type of the jackpot result by the lottery. That is, not only the hit random number counter C1 used for selecting the jackpot result is used as the random number for selecting the time saving result in the hit / fail judgment process, but also the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail judgment process. In this case, as the random number for selecting the type of the time saving result, the type random number counter C2 used for selecting the type of the jackpot result is used. As a result, the number of counters for lottery can be suppressed, and the storage capacity of the main RAM 84 required for performing the lottery can be suppressed.

The time-saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure is provided as the time-saving distribution table referred to in the time-saving distribution determination process when the time-saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process for the first reserved information. There is. Further, a time saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure is provided as a time saving distribution table to be referred to in the time saving distribution determination process when the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process for the second hold information. Has been done.

FIG. 10 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special drawing, and FIG. 10 (d) is an explanation for explaining the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special drawing. It is a figure. As shown in FIGS. 10 (c) and 10 (d), the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result are set as the types of the time-saving results in the time-saving distribution tables 127 and 128. FIG. 11B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each time saving opportunity.

As described above, the first time saving result is generated by the time saving result in the hit / fail judgment process and being selected in the time saving distribution judgment process. The first time saving result is a time saving result in which the support mode is set to the second high frequency support mode without triggering the transition of the open / close execution mode and further not the transition trigger of the winning / failing lottery mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 100 game times have been completed without a new opening / closing execution mode. When 100 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

As described above, the second time saving result is generated by the time saving result in the hit / fail judgment process and being selected in the time saving distribution judgment process. The second time saving result is a time saving result in which the support mode is set to the second high frequency support mode without triggering the transition of the open / close execution mode and further not the transition trigger of the winning / failing lottery mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 150 game times are completed without a new opening / closing execution mode. When 150 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. That is, the second time-saving result has a larger number of executions of the game times in which the second high-frequency support mode continues than the first time-saving result. Therefore, the second time saving result is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving result.

As shown in FIG. 10 (c), in the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure, the first time saving result and the second time saving result are set as the types of the time saving results to be sorted. In the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 19" corresponds to the first time saving result, and the type random number counter C2 of "20 to 29" corresponds to the second time saving result. It corresponds. On the other hand, in the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special drawing, as shown in FIG. 10D, the first time saving result and the second time saving result are set as the types of the time saving results to be sorted. .. In the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 9" corresponds to the first time saving result, and the type random number counter C2 of "10 to 29" corresponds to the second time saving result. It corresponds.

In the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure, the selection probability of the first time saving result, which is relatively disadvantageous, is higher than the selection probability of the second time saving result, which is relatively advantageous. In the time saving distribution table 128 for 2 special figures, the selection probability of the second time saving result, which is relatively advantageous, is higher than the selection probability of the first time saving result, which is relatively disadvantageous. Furthermore, the selection probability of the second time saving result, which is relatively advantageous, is higher in the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure than in the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure. Therefore, as the type of the time saving result that can be selected when the time saving result is obtained in the hit / fail judgment process, the second operation is performed as compared with the case where the first operation port 33 is won and the hit / fail judgment process is performed. It is more advantageous for the player when the winning of the mouth 34 is generated and the winning / failing determination process is performed.

Here, the selection of the time saving result in the winning / failing determination process may occur regardless of whether the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode or the high probability mode, but even if the time saving result is selected in the high probability mode. The support mode is not set based on the time saving result. In addition, the selection of the time saving result in the hit / fail judgment process may occur regardless of whether the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the first high frequency support mode, or the second high frequency support mode, but the first high school Even if the time saving result is selected in the frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the support mode triggered by the time saving result is not set. That is, the setting of the support mode triggered by the time saving result when the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process occurs only in the situation of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In addition, in the situation of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the last of the high frequency support mode in the situation of the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode. It also includes the situation after the process for terminating the high-frequency support mode and shifting to the low-frequency support mode is executed in the game round.

Since the transition to the second high-frequency support mode due to the time-saving result occurs only in the low-probability mode, when the time-saving result occurs and the transition to the second high-frequency support mode occurs, the low-probability mode is used. There is a second high frequency support mode. That is, the time saving result is the result of shifting the gaming state to the above time saving state without intervening the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, the support mode set after the open / close execution mode triggered by the big hit result is the first high frequency support mode, while the support mode set triggered by the time saving result is the first. 2 High frequency support mode. In other words, the support mode triggered by the jackpot result is more advantageous than the support mode triggered by the time saving result.

In the pachinko machine 10, as an event of shifting the support mode to the second high-frequency support mode without generating the open / close execution mode, there is a ceiling time reduction in addition to the time reduction result as described above. As shown in FIG. 11B, the ceiling time reduction occurs when the game times of the number of ceilings are exhausted without resulting in a big hit result. The number of ceilings is set when a jackpot result occurs and also when the supply of operating power is started. This will be described in detail later. The ceiling time reduction does not trigger the transition of the opening / closing execution mode, and does not trigger the transition of the winning / failing lottery mode, and is the result of setting the support mode as the second high-frequency support mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 100 game times have been completed without a new opening / closing execution mode. When 100 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

The number of continuations of the second high-frequency support mode generated by shortening the ceiling time is the same as the number of continuations of the second high-frequency support mode generated by the result of the first time reduction, and the result is the second time reduction. It is less than the number of continuations of the second high frequency support mode caused by. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to select the time saving result in the hit / fail determination process than to shorten the ceiling time.

The digestion of the number of game times on the ceiling does not occur in the high probability mode. Therefore, even if the number of ceilings is newly set due to the 5R high probability result or the 10R high probability result, the remaining number of ceilings is not subtracted until the subsequent high probability mode ends. On the other hand, the digestion of the game times of the number of ceilings occurs in the low probability mode regardless of the support mode. However, even if the digestion of the game times of the ceiling number is completed in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the support mode is not set triggered by the digestion of the game times of the ceiling number. That is, the setting of the support mode triggered by the shortening of the ceiling time for the completion of the digestion of the game times of the number of ceilings occurs only in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In addition, in the situation of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the last of the high frequency support mode in the situation of the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode. It also includes the situation after the process for terminating the high-frequency support mode and shifting to the low-frequency support mode is executed in the game round.

Since the transition to the second high-frequency support mode due to the ceiling time reduction occurs only in the low-probability mode, if the ceiling time reduction occurs and the transition to the second high-frequency support mode occurs, the low-probability mode is used. There is a second high frequency support mode. That is, the ceiling time reduction is a result of shifting the game state to the above time reduction state without interposing the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, the support mode set after the open / close execution mode triggered by the big hit result is the first high frequency support mode, while the support mode set triggered by the shortened ceiling time is the first. 2 High frequency support mode. In other words, the support mode triggered by the jackpot result is more advantageous than the support mode triggered by the shortened ceiling time.

FIG. 12 is a time chart showing how the time saving state is set according to the time saving result or the ceiling time saving. FIG. 12A shows a period in which the opening / closing execution mode is performed, FIG. 12B shows a state of the ceiling counter 131 provided in the main RAM 84, and FIG. 12C shows a period in which the probability is high. 12 (d) shows the timing at which the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process, and FIG. 12 (e) shows the period during which the time saving state is selected.

First, a case will be described in which an event that causes a time saving state as a result of a time saving result and an event that causes a time saving state that occurs as a result of a ceiling time saving occur discontinuously.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes a 5R high accuracy result or a 10R high accuracy result, the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 12A. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12B, the ceiling counter 131 provided in the main RAM 84 is set to 500 times, which is a fixed number of ceilings, triggered by the start of the opening / closing execution mode. The ceiling counter 131 is a counter for specifying the remaining number of ceilings by the main MPU 82.

After that, when the open / close execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 12 (a) at the timing of t2, the high probability state is reached as shown in FIG. 12 (c). The high-probability state is a high-probability mode, which is a gaming state that is the first high-probability support mode. The high-probability state ends at the timing of t4 when 100 game times are digested. In the open / close execution mode, the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted because the game times are not executed, and in the high probability mode, the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted even if the game times are executed. Therefore, at the timing of t4 when the high probability state ends, the value of the ceiling counter 131 does not change from the timing of t1 when the fixed number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131. Further, as shown in FIG. 12D, the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process at the timing of t3, which is the timing in the middle of the high probability state, but the time saving result is invalidated because it is in the high probability mode. Will be done.

When the high probability state ends as shown in FIG. 12 (c) at the timing of t4, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state. In the normal gaming state, FIG. 12B shows both the case where the game number triggered by the first hold information is executed and the case where the game number triggered by the second hold information is executed. As described above, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted.

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 12 (d), the time saving result is selected by the hit / fail determination process. Since the gaming state at the timing of t5 is the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 12 (e), the time saving result shifts to the time saving state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12A, the opening / closing execution mode does not intervene, and the winning / failing lottery mode is maintained in the low probability mode. The time saving state is a gaming state which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. In the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 12B, regardless of whether the game round triggered by the first hold information is executed or the game round triggered by the second hold information is executed. The value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted. After that, the time saving state ends as shown in FIG. 12 (e) when the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state becomes 0 at the timing of t6 without the big hit result occurring in the time saving state. In this case, the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

After that, at the timing of t7, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes “0” as shown in FIG. 12 (b). That is, the digestion of the number of game times on the ceiling is completed. Since the gaming state at the timing of t7 is the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 12 (e), the gaming state shifts to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12A, the opening / closing execution mode does not intervene, and the winning / failing lottery mode is maintained in the low probability mode. The time saving state is a gaming state which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. After that, the remaining number of times of the time saving state becomes 0 at the timing of t8 without the big hit result occurring in the time saving state, and the time saving state ends as shown in FIG. 12 (e). In this case, the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

The value of the ceiling counter 131 is not set in either case of shifting to the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction or the end of the time reduction state. Further, the transition to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving is the value of the ceiling counter 131 as a result of the game times being digested and the value of the ceiling counter 131 being subtracted in the situation where the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more. Occurs when becomes "0". Therefore, the transition to the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs only once after the jackpot result occurs, and basically after the transition to the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs once. Unless the jackpot result occurs and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is set, the transition to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving does not occur.

Next, a case will be described in which an event in which the time is shortened as a result of the time reduction and an event in which the ceiling time is shortened occur continuously.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes a 5R high accuracy result or a 10R high accuracy result, the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 12A. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12B, the ceiling counter 131 is set to 500 times, which is a fixed number of ceilings, triggered by the start of the opening / closing execution mode.

After that, when the open / close execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 12 (a) at the timing of t10, the high probability state is reached as shown in FIG. 12 (c). The high-probability state ends at the timing of t11 when 100 game times are digested. In this case, since the game round is not executed in the open / close execution mode, the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted, and in the high probability mode, the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted even if the game round is executed. Therefore, at the timing of t11 when the high probability state ends, the value of the ceiling counter 131 does not change from the timing of t9 when the fixed number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131.

When the high probability state ends as shown in FIG. 12 (c) at the timing of t11, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state. In the normal gaming state, FIG. 12B shows both the case where the game number triggered by the first hold information is executed and the case where the game number triggered by the second hold information is executed. As described above, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted.

After that, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 12D, the time saving result is selected by the hit / fail determination process. Since the gaming state at the timing of t12 is the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 12 (e), the time saving result shifts to the time saving state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12A, the opening / closing execution mode does not intervene, and the winning / failing lottery mode is maintained in the low probability mode. The time saving state is a gaming state which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. In the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 12B, regardless of whether the game round triggered by the first hold information is executed or the game round triggered by the second hold information is executed. The value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted. After that, as shown in FIG. 12D, the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process at the timing of t13, which is the timing in the middle of the time saving state, but the time saving result is invalidated because it is in the time saving state. ..

After that, the remaining number of times of the time saving state becomes 0 at the timing of t14 without the big hit result occurring in the time saving state, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 12B. Become. In this case, the time is shortened at the timing when the last game round of the time shortened state is started, but the remaining number of continuations of the time shortened state is 0 in the process executed when the game round is completed. When it is specified, the support mode is changed from the second high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, and the gaming state changes from the time saving state to the normal gaming state. Further, when the game round is completed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 after the process is executed, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0". That is, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after the game state is set from the time saving state to the normal game state in the game times. Therefore, in the game round, the time saving state is set when the digestion of the game round of the ceiling number is completed. Therefore, the time saving state does not end at the timing of t14, and the time saving state continues. The time saving state is a gaming state which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. After that, the time saving state ends as shown in FIG. 12 (e) when the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state becomes 0 at the timing of t15 without the big hit result occurring in the time saving state. In this case, the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 of FIG. 7 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times when the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the game times corresponding to the time saving result, the reach display is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the deviation result, the reach display is executed when the reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 83.

Next, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used in the main MPU 82 to determine the variation display period in the special symbol display units 37a and 37b and the variation display period of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is repeatedly updated and acquired at the start of the variation display on the special symbol display units 37a and 37b and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41.

<About various processes executed by the main MPU 82>
Next, each process executed for advancing the game on the main MPU 82 will be described. The processing of the main MPU 82 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the power-on initial setting process is executed (step S101). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined time for weighting (specifically, 1 second) elapses after the main process is started. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. It also allows access to the main RAM 84.

After that, the internal function register setting process is executed (step S102). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), which is a process that is started by interrupting the main process periodically, is set to a predetermined cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds). The details of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) will be described later. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the interrupt cycle setting, the setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

After that, "1" is set in the start-up processing flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S103). The start-up processing flag is used to monitor power failure, update various counters, and monitor fraud among various processes set in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) even if the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is activated. Is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) should be terminated without executing the process for advancing the game while executing the process of.

The start-up process flag is set to "1" when the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126) is started in the main process (FIG. 13), and the process at the start of supply of operating power is set. "0" is cleared before (steps S101 to S126) are completed and the residual processing (steps S127 to S130) is started. In the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), when "1" is set in the start-up processing flag, the processing of steps S207 to S220 is not executed, so that the processing at the start of supply of operating power (the processing at the start of supply of operating power (FIG. 14). It is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the set value update process (step S117) described later in steps S101 to S126) is being executed. It becomes. On the other hand, as described above, in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), even when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S201 to S205 is executed to supply the operating power. Even in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the set value update process (step S117), which will be described later, is being executed among the processes at the start (steps S101 to S126), the power failure monitoring is executed and the power failure monitoring is executed. The hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is further executed.

In particular, even when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the power failure monitoring process (step S201) is executed, so that the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps S101 to SB126). Of these, even if a power failure occurs in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the setting value update process (step S117), which will be described later, is being executed, it is possible to execute the power failure processing for the power failure. In the power failure processing, "1" is set in the power failure flag provided in the main RAM 84, and the checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is saved in the main RAM 84, so that the supply of operating power is restarted. In this case, it is possible to prevent the main RAM 84 from being identified as an abnormal occurrence. As a result, if a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the setting value update process (step S117), which will be described later, the next operating power indicates that the power failure occurred during these setting-related processes. Can be specified at the start of supply. Incidentally, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the setting value update process (step S117), which will be described later, is being executed, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is not disabled and is interrupted at an arbitrary timing. It is possible.

After setting "1" to the start-up processing flag in step S103, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the power failure flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S104). When the power failure processing is executed in the power failure monitoring process (step S201) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the power failure flag is set to "1". The power failure flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the power failure processing was properly performed when the power was cut off last time.

When "1" is set in the power failure flag (step S104: YES), it is determined whether or not the checksum is normal (step S105). Specifically, first, the checksum is calculated for the main RAM 84. The checksum calculation method is arbitrary, but it is the same calculation method as the calculation method when the checksum is calculated in the power failure processing in the power failure monitoring process (step S201) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) described later. ing. After that, the checksum calculated in the power failure processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped and stored in the main RAM 84 is read, and the read checksum is used as the main checksum this time. Compare with the checksum calculated in the process. Then, it is determined whether or not those checksums match.

If the checksums match (step S105: YES), it is determined whether or not the set value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area of the main RAM 84 is within the normal range (step S106). The setting reference area is a storage area in which information for specifying the setting value set as the target for use in the current pachinko machine 10 by the main MPU 82 is stored. When the numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". When the numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". When the numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3". When the numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". When the numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". When the numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6". In step S106, it is determined whether or not the information of the set value stored in the setting reference area is any of "1" to "6".

When an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S104 to S106, it means that no information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84. In this case, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the setting updating flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S107). The setting updating flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the setting value updating process (step S117) described later is being executed, and when "1" is set in the setting updating flag. Is a display indicating that the set value is being updated and a display indicating the set value being updated on the notification display device 141 (see FIG. 6) mounted on the main control board 81 of the main control device 71. Is done. The notification display device 141 includes a plurality of segment display devices. These plurality of segment indicators are arranged side by side on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, and the display surface of each segment indicator can be visually recognized from the outside of the board box without opening the board box of the main control device 71. It has become.

Since the setting updating flag is a flag in which "1" is set when the setting value updating process (step S117) is started and "0" is cleared when the setting value updating process (step S117) is completed. , In the situation where the setting value update process (step S117) is not executed, basically, the setting update in progress flag is not set to "1". However, when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (step S117) is being executed, the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is started after that. In, the setting updating flag is set to "1". The state in which "1" is set in the setting updating flag is maintained until the process of clearing the setting updating flag "0" in the setting value updating process (step S117) is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S107 because "1" is not set in the setting updating flag, it is determined whether or not the reset button 142 (see FIG. 6) is being pressed (step S108). The reset button 142 is provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, and the pressing operation portion of the reset button 142 is not covered by the board box of the main control device 71. Therefore, it is possible to operate the reset button 142 without opening the board box. In step S108, it is determined whether or not the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the reset button 142 is being pressed to start supplying the operating power to the main MPU 82.

When the reset button 142 is not pressed (step S108: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S109). The game stop flag is a flag in which "1" is set when the power failure flag is not set, when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S201 to S205 are executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) described later, while the affirmative determination is made in step S206 to perform steps S207 to S207. The process of S220 is not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure processing was not performed properly at the time of the previous power failure, the storage state of the main RAM 84 changes from the previous power failure. If the checksums do not match due to the fact that the checksums do not match, or if the set values are abnormal, the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while the game progresses. Will not be executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S109, the processes of steps S124 and S125, which will be described later, are executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S109, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 143 (see FIG. 6) is turned on by using the setting key (step S110). The setting key insertion unit 143 is provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, and the keyhole portion for performing the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 143 using the setting key is the board box of the main control device 71. Not covered by. Therefore, it is possible to perform the ON operation by the setting key into the setting key insertion unit 143 without opening the board box. When the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on by using the setting key (step S110: YES), the setting confirmation process is executed (step S112). Further, even when the setting key insertion unit 143 is not turned on by using the setting key (step S110: NO), "1" is set in the setting checking flag provided in the main RAM 84. If so (step S111: YES), the setting confirmation process is executed (step S112).

The setting confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed, and is notified when "1" is set in the setting confirmation flag. On the display device 141, a display indicating that the set value is being confirmed and a display indicating the currently set set value are displayed. The setting confirmation flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting confirmation process (step S112) is started and cleared to "0" when the setting confirmation process (step S112) is completed. , In the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) is not executed, basically, the setting confirmation flag is not set to "1". However, when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed, the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is started after that. In, the setting confirmation flag is set to "1". When "1" is set in the setting confirmation flag, the RAM clear process (step S119) described later is executed, the setting value update process (step S117) described later is executed, or the setting is confirmed. It is maintained until the process of clearing the setting confirmation flag "0" in the process (step S112) is executed.

Not only when the reset button 142 is not pressed and the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on (that is, when the "setting confirmation operation" is performed) as described above, but also when the reset button 142 is pressed. Even when the setting confirmation flag is set to "1" even when the pressing operation is not performed, the setting confirmation process (step S112) is executed, so that the setting confirmation process (step S112) is executed. If the power failure process is executed in the above situation, the setting confirmation process (step S112) is executed even if the "setting confirmation operation" is not performed when the subsequent operation power supply is restarted. As a result, it is possible to continue to confirm the current set value of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, even if the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) is executed, if the reset button 142 is pressed when the subsequent operation power supply is restarted, the reset button 142 is pressed. Without executing the setting confirmation process (step S112), the process corresponding to the operation performed when the operating power supply is restarted among the RAM clear process (step S119) and the set value update process (step S117) is executed. NS. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the execution of the RAM clear process (step S119) or the set value update process (step S117) over the setting confirmation process (step S112).

Here, the setting confirmation process executed in step S112 will be described.

In the setting confirmation process, interrupt enable is first set. As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is interrupted at a predetermined cycle and started. In the pachinko machine 10, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is basically prohibited from being interrupted in the processing (steps S101 to S126) at the start of supplying the operating power, and the setting confirmation processing (step S112) and the setting Execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is permitted in the situation where the value update process (step S117) is being executed. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the set value update process (step S117) is being executed, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) because the start-up process flag is set to "1". Is activated, of the various processes of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the process for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring fraud is executed, while the process for advancing the game is executed. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is terminated without any notice. After that, "1" is set in the setting confirmation flag on the condition that "1" is not set in the setting confirmation flag of the main RAM 84. When "1" is set in the setting confirmation flag, the display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are the notification display devices. It is done at 141. After that, the confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. As a result, an image indicating that the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed and an image for making the operation content for terminating the setting confirmation process (step S112) recognizable are displayed on the symbol display device 41. The display side MPU 103 is displayed and controlled so as to be displayed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 143 uses the setting key to switch from the ON state to the OFF state. When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting checking flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, the state in which the notification display device 141 is displayed indicating that the current set value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the display indicating the current set value of the pachinko machine 10 is released is released. NS. After that, the interrupt is disabled. As a result, when the setting confirmation process (step S112) is terminated and the process returns to the process (steps S101 to S126) at the start of supply of the operating power in the main process (FIG. 13), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is performed. Interruption is prohibited. After that, the return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. As a result, an image indicating that the setting confirmation process (step S112) in the symbol display device 41 is being executed and an image for making the operation content for terminating the setting confirmation process (step S112) recognizable. The display ends.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 13), when the setting key insertion unit 143 is not turned on by using the setting key and the setting checking flag is not set to "1" (step S110 and). Step S111: NO), it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is open (step S113). The resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 is provided with a main body opening detection sensor 144 (see FIG. 6). The main body open detection sensor 144 is electrically connected to the main MPU 82, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, a LOW level open detection signal is transmitted to the main MPU 82. Then, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11, the HI level open detection signal is transmitted to the main MPU 82. The relationship between LOW and HI may be reversed. In step S113, it is determined whether or not the HI level opening detection signal is received from the main body opening detection sensor 144.

When the HI level open detection signal is received from the main body open detection sensor 144 (step S113: YES), that is, when the game machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, the ceiling of the main RAM 84 Information on the fixed ceiling number of 500 times is set in the counter 131 (step S114). When the process of step S113 is executed, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the reset button 142 is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on by the setting key. In addition, "1" is not set in both the setting updating flag and the setting checking flag of the main RAM 84. In this case, the setting confirmation process (step S112), the set value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear process (step S119) are not executed in the process (steps S101 to S126) at the start of supplying the operating power. The situation. Further, in the game hall, with the main power supply for supplying operating power to each pachinko machine 10 turned off, the power switch provided in the power supply / launch control device 78 of each pachinko machine 10 is turned on in advance. When it is time to start business on the 1st, the main power is turned on so that the pachinko machines 10 are activated all at once.

In such a situation, when the affirmative judgment is made in step S113, the gaming machine is in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112), the set value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear process (step S119) are not executed. This is a case where the supply of operating power is started in a state where the main body 12 is intentionally opened. Then, in such a situation, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131 at the start of supply of operating power as a situation different from that at the start of normal business, and also to confirm the setting. The processing (step S112), the set value updating processing (step S117), and the RAM clearing processing (step S119) can be generated without being involved.

When a negative determination is made in step S113 or the process of step S114 is executed, a normal return command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S115). By receiving the normal return command, the sound and light side MPU 93 specifies that the processing (steps S101 to S126) at the start of supplying the operating power in the main MPU 82 has been completed, and at the time of starting the supply of the operating power this time. In the process (steps S101 to S126), it is specified that none of the RAM clear process (step S119), the setting confirmation process (step S112), and the set value update process (step S117) is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S108 that the reset button 142 is being pressed, and it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 143 is being turned on using the setting key (step S116: YES). Or, when it is determined in step S107 that "1" is set in the setting updating flag, the setting value updating process is executed (step S117). Not only when the reset button 142 is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on (that is, when the "setting change operation" is performed) as described above, but also when the reset button 142 is pressed. The setting value is updated by executing the setting value updating process (step S117) even when the setting updating flag is set to "1" regardless of whether or not the pressing operation and the setting key insertion unit 143 are turned on. If the power failure process is executed in the situation where the process (step S117) is being executed, the operation contents at the start of the subsequent operation power supply are "no operation", "RAM clear operation", and "setting change". The set value update process (step S117) is executed regardless of which of the "operation" and the "setting confirmation operation". As a result, it is possible to prioritize the execution of the set value update process (step S117).

Here, the setting value update process executed in step S117 will be described.

In the setting value update process, interrupt enable is first set. As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is interrupted at a predetermined cycle and started. In the pachinko machine 10, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is basically prohibited from being interrupted in the processing (steps S101 to S126) at the start of supplying the operating power, and the setting confirmation processing (step S112) and the setting Execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is permitted in the situation where the value update process (step S117) is being executed. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the set value update process (step S117) is being executed, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) because the start-up process flag is set to "1". Is activated, of the various processes of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the process for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring fraud is executed, while the process for advancing the game is executed. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is terminated without any notice. After that, "1" is set in the setting updating flag on the condition that "1" is not set in the setting updating flag of the main RAM 84. By setting "1" to the setting updating flag, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display of the setting value selected as the update target of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. This is performed by the notification display device 141.

After that, the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0". If the power failure flag is not set to "1" (step S104: NO) because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure, the game stop flag is set to the main side from the previous power failure. When the checksums do not match due to the change in the storage state of the RAM 84 (step S105: NO), or when the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area is not in the normal range. (Step S106: NO), this is a flag in which "1" is set in step S121 of the main process (FIG. 13). When the game stop flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S201 to S205 are executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), while the affirmative determination is made in step S206 to perform steps S207 to S220. Do not execute the process. As a result, when the above-mentioned information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the process for monitoring the power failure, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud is executed, while the process for advancing the game is executed. Will not be done. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the set value update process, the state in which the occurrence of the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 is specified is released when the set value update process (step S117) is executed. Is possible.

After that, "1" is set in the setting update area provided in the main RAM 84. The setting update area is a storage area in which information on the setting value being updated in the setting value update process (step S117) is stored. When the numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated is "setting 1". When the numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated is "setting 2". When the numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated is "setting 3". When the numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated is "setting 4". When the numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated is "setting 5". When the numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated is "setting 6". After that, the update start command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. As a result, the image indicating that the set value update process (step S117) is being executed, the image for making the operation content for changing the set value recognizable, and the set value update process (step S117) are completed. The display side MPU 103 is displayed and controlled so that the image for making the operation content to be recognized is recognizable is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

In the setting value update process, the value of the setting update area is added by 1 on condition that the reset button 142 is pressed. As a result, each time the reset button 142 is pressed once, the set value is updated one step higher. If the value of the setting update area after 1 addition is 7 or more, "1" is set in the setting update area. As a result, when the reset button 142 is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", it returns to "setting 1".

In the set value update process, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 143 uses the setting key to switch from the ON state to the OFF state. When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state, the information of the setting value stored in the setting update area is overwritten in the setting reference area. As a result, the setting value information of the result updated in the current setting value update process (step S117) is set in the setting reference area, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is the current pachinko machine. It becomes the set value of the machine 10. After that, the interrupt is disabled. As a result, when the set value update process (step S117) is terminated and the process returns to the process (steps S101 to S126) at the start of supply of the operating power in the main process (FIG. 13), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is performed. Interruption is prohibited.

After that, the RAM clear process is executed. In the RAM clear processing, the area in which the information of the set value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main RAM 84 (that is, the setting reference area), the information for calculating the combination ratio in the ceiling counter 131 and the main RAM 84. Except for the area where is stored, the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so that the winning / failing lottery is performed regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not executed, the open / close execution mode is not executed, and the normal map display unit 38a is not variablely displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. It becomes a situation. Further, since the special figure holding area 84a and the normal drawing holding area 84c are also cleared to "0", the first holding information, the second holding information, and the holding information on the normal drawing side are deleted. In addition, the setting updating flag, the setting checking flag, and the setting updating area are cleared to "0". Further, in the RAM clear processing, the initial setting is executed after the various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, the same process as the internal function register setting process in step S102 is executed.

Here, even if the set value update process (step S117) is executed, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not executed, and the ceiling count is newly set including the information on the fixed ceiling count. Is not done. As a result, even if the set value update process (step S117) is executed, the remaining number of ceilings can be maintained.

After that, the return command at the time of update is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. As a result, an image indicating that the set value update process (step S117) in the symbol display device 41 is being executed, an image for making the operation content for changing the set value recognizable, and a set value update process (set value update process). The display of the image for making the operation content for ending step S117) recognizable is finished.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 13), when it is determined in step S108 that the reset button 142 is being pressed, the setting key insertion unit 143 is not turned on by using the setting key. If it is determined (step S116: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 (step S118). The game stop flag is a flag in which "1" is set when the power failure flag is not set, when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S201 to S205 are executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), while the affirmative determination is made in step S206 to perform steps S207 to S220. Do not execute the process. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure processing was not performed properly at the time of the previous power failure, the storage state of the main RAM 84 changes from the previous power failure. If the checksums do not match due to the fact that the checksums do not match, or if the set values are abnormal, the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while the game progresses. Will not be executed.

If "1" is not set in the game stop flag (step S118: NO), the RAM clear process is executed (step S119). In the RAM clear processing, the area in which the information of the set value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main RAM 84 (that is, the setting reference area), the information for calculating the combination ratio in the ceiling counter 131 and the main RAM 84. Except for the area where is stored, the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so that the winning / failing lottery is performed regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not executed, the open / close execution mode is not executed, and the normal map display unit 38a is not variablely displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. It becomes a situation. Further, since the special figure holding area 84a and the normal drawing holding area 84c are also cleared to "0", the first holding information, the second holding information, and the holding information on the normal drawing side are deleted. In addition, the setting updating flag and the setting checking flag are cleared to "0". Further, in the RAM clear processing, the initial setting is executed after the various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step SB102 is executed.

Here, even if the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not executed, and the new setting of the ceiling count including the information of the fixed ceiling count is set. Not done. As a result, even if the RAM clearing process (step S119) is executed, the remaining number of ceilings can be maintained.

After that, the return command at the time of clearing is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S120). By receiving the return command at the time of clearing, the sound and light side MPU 93 specifies that the processing (steps S101 to S126) at the start of supplying the operating power in the main MPU 82 has been completed, and starts supplying the operating power this time. It is specified that the RAM clear process (step S119) has been executed in the time process (steps S101 to S126).

When a negative determination is made in any of steps S104 to S106 in the main process (FIG. 13), that is, when "1" is not set in the power failure flag, the checksum does not match, or the set value is abnormal. If this is the case, "1" is set in the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 (step S121). As described above, when the game stop flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S201 to S205 are executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), while the affirmative determination is made in step S206 to make a positive determination in step S207. -The process of step S220 is not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure processing was not performed properly at the time of the previous power failure, the storage state of the main RAM 84 changes from the previous power failure. If the checksums do not match due to the fact that the checksums do not match, or if the set values are abnormal, the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while the game progresses. Will not be executed.

After that, information on the fixed ceiling number of 500 times is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S122). As described above, the set value update process (step S117) is executed, but even if it is executed, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not executed, and the ceiling including the information on the fixed number of ceilings is included. No new setting is made for the number of times. Therefore, even if the set value update process (step S117) is executed in order to cancel the game stop state due to the information abnormality when the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the information of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained as it is. .. On the other hand, when it is specified that an information abnormality in the main RAM 84 has occurred and the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", the ceiling counter 131 has a fixed number of ceilings of 500 times. Information is set. As a result, even if the information of the ceiling counter 131 is rewritten when an information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the information of the ceiling counter 131 can be reset to the information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings. It becomes.

After that, it is determined whether or not the reset button 142 is being pressed (step S123). When the reset button 142 is not pressed (step S123: NO), an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag, checksum, or set value at the start of supply of operating power is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. (Step S124). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound-light side MPU 93 causes the display light emitting unit 64 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of supplying the operating power, and the speaker unit 65 "Please change the setting." Is output. In addition, the character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification is sent when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the set value update process (step S117) is executed. It will be started again.

After that, the external output process at the time of abnormality is executed (step S125). In the external output process at the time of an abnormality, a process for externally outputting an abnormal signal to the management computer of the game hall is executed. In this case, the signal output of the abnormal signal is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the game stop flag is set to "1", the signal output of the abnormal signal is continued, and the game stop flag is cleared to "0", so that the abnormal signal is displayed. The signal output may be stopped.

When the reset button 142 is pressed (step S123: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on by using the setting key (step S116). When the reset button 142 is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on by using the setting key (step S116 and step S123: YES), the set value update process is executed (step S117). The processing content of the setting value update processing is as described above. That is, when the operating power is supplied to the main MPU 82 while the "setting change operation" is being performed, it is denied in any of steps S104 to S106 because an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84. Even when the determination is made, the set value update process (step S117) is executed. This makes it possible to give priority to changing the set value. Further, in the set value update process (step S117), the game stop flag is cleared to "0" as described above. As a result, when the set value update process (step S117) is executed, it is possible to eliminate the state in which an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84 after the update of the set value is completed.

On the other hand, when the reset button 142 is pressed but the setting key insertion unit 143 is not turned ON (step S123: YES, step S116: NO), "1" is set in the game stop flag of the main RAM 84. It is determined whether or not (step S118). In the process of step S118 after the game stop flag is set to "1" in step S121, as a matter of course, "1" is set to the game stop flag, so an affirmative determination is made in step S118. In this case, an abnormality command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 in step S124, and an abnormality signal is output externally in step S125.

That is, when an abnormality related to the power failure flag, checksum, and set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps S104 to S106, the operation to the main MPU 82 is performed in the situation where the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. Even if the power supply is started, the RAM clear process (step S119) is not executed. Also, when the game stop flag is set to "1" and the "RAM clear operation" is being performed and the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the RAM clear process ( Step S119) is not executed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in the situation where the "RAM clear operation" is being performed, the state in which "1" is set in the game stop flag can be prevented from being resolved. It will be possible. On the other hand, when the "setting change operation" is performed, the setting value update process (step S117) is executed and the setting is performed regardless of whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". In the value update process (step S117), the game stop flag is cleared to "0". As a result, it is necessary to execute the set value update process (step S117) in order to eliminate the state in which "1" is set in the game stop flag. Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84, it is possible to require not only the process for initializing a part of the area of the main RAM 84 but also the resetting of the set value.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in the situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", the "setting change operation" is not performed, that is, the case is "no operation". Alternatively, when a "RAM clear operation" or a "setting confirmation operation" is performed, an affirmative judgment is made in step S109 or step S118 to send an abnormal command in step S124 and externally in the event of an abnormality in step S125. Execute output processing. As a result, when the game stop flag is set to "1", the main side is not executed unless the set value update process (step S117) is executed regardless of the processing results of steps S104 to S106 in the subsequent main process. Every time the supply of the operating power to the MPU 82 is started, the pachinko machine 10 is notified of the abnormality and the pachinko machine 10 is externally output at the time of the abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall aware that the set value should be changed.

When the process of step S112 is executed, the process of step S115 is executed, the process of step S117 is executed, the process of step S120 is executed, or the process of step S125 is executed, the main RAM 84 stands up. The raising process flag is cleared to "0" (step S126). When the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is started by clearing the start-up processing flag "0", a negative determination is made in step S206, so that not only the processing of steps S201 to S205 but also step S207 -The process of step S220 is executed, and the state in which the process for advancing the game is not executed is released. In step S126, the power failure flag of the main RAM 84 is also cleared to "0".

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S127 to S130. That is, the main MPU 82 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), but a residual time is generated between the timer interrupt process of 1 and the next timer interrupt process. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of the timer interrupt processing, and the residual processing of steps S127 to S130 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S127 to S130 is an irregular process that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S127, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14). In the following step S128, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed in step S129. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 84, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S130, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is permitted is set. When the process of step S130 is executed, the process returns to step S127, and the processes of steps S127 to S130 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started in a cycle of 4 msec.

First, the power failure monitoring process is executed (step S201). In the power failure monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power failure monitoring board 85, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, an infinite loop occurs after executing the power failure processing. .. In the power failure processing, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 84, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, the lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing a process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information. Executes the process of overwriting the read source counter. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S128 of the main process (FIG. 13), and in step S204, the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S129 of the main process (FIG. 13). do.

After that, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed (step S205). In the fraud detection process, "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 84 by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in any of the game stop flag and the start-up processing flag of the main RAM 84 (step S206). When "1" is set in either the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag (step S206: YES), the timer interrupt processing ends without executing the processing of steps S207 to S220. As a result, in a situation where "1" is set in the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag, the step is performed while performing power failure monitoring, random number update, and fraud monitoring in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14). It is possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game in steps S207 to S220 from being executed.

When "1" is not set in both the game stop flag and the start-up processing flag (step S206: NO), the processing for advancing the game in steps S207 to S220 is executed. Specifically, first, the port output process is executed (step S207). In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special electric is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the utility accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the utility should be started and the state should be switched to the closed state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

After that, the reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. After that, the ball entry detection process is executed (step S209). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from the winning detection sensors 86a to 86e are read, and the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are reached. Executes a process for specifying the presence or absence of a ball entering the ball.

After that, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 84 is executed (step S210). In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are aggregated. It may be configured.

After that, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (step S211). In a situation where the firing operation is continued for the firing operation device 28, as described above, one game ball is fired every 0.6 seconds so as to have a predetermined firing cycle.

After that, as the input state monitoring process, the disconnection confirmation of each of the winning detection sensors 86a to 86e and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading process of step S208 (step). S212).

After that, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed (step S213), and the display control of the normal figure display unit 38a and the execution control of the normal electric open state are performed. (Step S214). These special figure special electric control processing and general figure general electric control processing will be described in detail later.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, the output information for reflecting the increased / decreased number of the first reserved information on the first special figure reserved display unit 37c is set, and the second reserved information is set. The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number in the second special figure hold display unit 37d and the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information on the normal figure side in the normal figure hold display unit 38b are set. Further, in step S215, output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214. , Set the output information for updating the display contents of the general drawing display unit 38a.

After that, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed (step S216). In addition, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S217). Further, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S218).

After that, the setting monitoring process is executed (step S219). In the setting monitoring process, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area of the main RAM 84 is set as a target for use by determining whether or not it is any of "1" to "6". It is determined whether or not the set value is any of "setting 1" to "setting 6". If the set value information stored in the setting reference area is "0" or 7 or more, it means that the set value set as the target of use is abnormal, so the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 Set to "1". As a result, the game cannot proceed until the set value to be used is newly set in the set value update process (step S117). After that, the management process is executed (step S220). In the management process, the process for storing the game history for calculating the combination ratio, the process for calculating the combination ratio using the stored game history, and the calculated combination display for notification. A process for displaying the display on the device 141 is executed.

<Fuzu Fuden control processing>
Next, the general-purpose electric control processing executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When a prize has been awarded to the through gate 35 (step S301: YES), the maximum number of reserved information on the normal drawing side stored in the first area 114a to the fourth area 114d of the normal drawing holding area 84c is the maximum number. On condition that the number is less than four (step S302: NO), the storage process in the normal figure holding area 84c is executed (step S303). In the storage process, the numerical information of the Fuden random number counter C4 is used as the hold information on the Fuzu side, and the hold information on the Fuzu side in the first area 114a to the fourth area 114d of the Fuzu hold area 84c is not stored. Store in the area with the earliest digestion order. It should be noted that when the hold information on the normal figure side is acquired, the data for updating the display contents of the normal figure hold display unit 38b in accordance with the increase in the number of hold information on the normal figure side this time. Make settings.

When a negative determination is made in step S301, an affirmative determination is made in step S302, or the process of step S303 is executed, the normal drawing address table stored in the main ROM 83 is read out (step S304). In the Fuzu Fuden address table, the start address of the program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter is set. The Fuzu Fuden counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the Fuzu Fuden control process on the main MPU 82.

The Fuzu Fuden counter can take values of "0" to "3", and each value of "0" to "3" corresponds to each process (step S307 to step S310). Specifically, when the value of the normal map normal electric counter is "0", the normal figure fluctuation start process (step S307), which is a process for starting the fluctuation display times in the normal figure display unit 38a, is executed. Then, when the value of the normal map normal electric counter is "1", the normal figure change processing (step S308), which is a process for advancing the fluctuation display times in the normal figure display unit 38a, is executed. When the value of the figure Fuden counter is "2", the Fuzu finalizing process (step S309), which is a process for ending the fluctuation display times in the Fuzu display unit 38a, is executed, and the Fuzu Fuden is executed. When the value of the counter is "3", the normal power control process (step S310), which is a process for controlling the normal power open state of the normal power accessory 34a in the second operating port 34, is the execution target.

In the Fuzu Fuden control process, after reading the Fuzu Fuden address table (step S304), the start address corresponding to the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter is acquired from the Fuzu Fuden address table (step S305). , Jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S306). Hereinafter, each process of steps S307 to S310 will be described individually.

<Public map fluctuation start processing>
First, the normal map fluctuation start process in step S307 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the normal map fluctuation start process, the data setting process is executed on condition that the hold information on the normal map side is stored in the normal map hold area 84c (step S401: YES) (step S402). In the data setting process, the data stored in the first area 114a of the normal drawing holding area 84c is moved to the execution area 115 for the normal drawing. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the normal figure holding area 84c is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 114a to 114d to the lower area side, and specifically, the second area 114b → the first area 114a, the third. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area 114c → second area 114b, fourth area 114d → third area 114c, and so on. Then, the fourth area 114d is cleared to "0". Further, in the data setting process, data setting is performed so that the display contents of the normal figure hold display unit 38b are updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold information on the normal figure side this time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the current state is the open / close execution mode (step S403), and if it is not the open / close execution mode, whether or not "1" is set in the first high frequency flag provided in the main RAM 84. (Step S404). The first high-frequency flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, and is the first flag when the transition to the first high-frequency support mode occurs. 1 "1" is set in the high frequency flag, and "0" is cleared when the first high frequency support mode ends.

In the open / close execution mode (step S403: YES), the low probability table on the normal side is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S405). Further, when it is not the open / close execution mode but "1" is not set in the first high frequency flag (step S404: NO), that is, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, it is mainly. The low-probability table on the normal drawing side is read from the side ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S405). On the other hand, when "1" is set in the first high frequency flag instead of the open / close execution mode (step S404: YES), that is, when the support mode is the first high frequency support mode, the main side ROM 83 to the main side The high-probability table on the normal drawing side is read into the RAM 84 (step S406). The value of the normal electric random number counter C4, which is the winning of the electric service opening, is set in each of the low probability table on the normal map side and the high probability table on the normal map side. In this case, the high-probability table on the normal map side has a larger number of values of the normal electric random number counter C4 that wins the electric service opening than the low-probability table on the normal map side. As a result, the probability of winning the electric service opening is higher when the high probability table on the normal map side is referred to than when the low probability table on the normal map side is referred to. That is, the high-probability mode on the normal map side and the low-probability mode on the normal map side are set so that the probability of winning the electric service open is relatively high or low as the determination mode of the normal figure winning / failing determination process (step S407) described later. Existing. The low-probability table on the normal map side is set so that the probability of winning the electric service is halved, and the high-probability table on the general map side is set so that the probability of winning the electric service is 4/5. However, if the high probability mode on the normal map side has a higher probability of winning the electric service open than the low probability mode on the normal map side, the probability of winning the electric service open is arbitrary. ..

When the process of step S405 or the process of step S406 is executed, the normal figure hit / miss determination process is executed (step S407). In the normal figure hit / fail judgment process, for the table read in step S405 or step S406, the numerical information about the normal electric random number counter C4 in the hold information on the normal figure side that is the execution target of the normal figure hit / miss judgment process this time. To match.

When the result of the normal figure winning / failing determination process is the electric service open winning (step S408: YES), the stop result setting process for the normal figure winning result is executed (step S409). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern for the result of winning the normal map, which is finally stopped and displayed at the current variation display times on the normal map display unit 38a, is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. It should be noted that one type of stop mode may be set as the stop mode of the picture for the winning result of the general drawing, or a plurality of types of stop modes of the picture may be set.

When the result of the normal figure hit / fail determination process is not the electric service open winning (step S408: NO), the stop result setting process for the normal figure wrong result is executed (step S410). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern for the result of the deviation from the normal drawing, which is finally stopped and displayed on the normal figure display unit 38a at the current display continuation time, is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the stop mode of the pattern for the winning result of the general drawing.

When the process of step S409 or the process of step S410 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current state is the open / close execution mode (step S411), and if it is not the open / close execution mode, the first height provided in the main RAM 84 is provided. It is determined whether or not "1" is set in either the frequency flag or the second high frequency flag (step S412). As already explained, the first high-frequency flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, and the transition to the first high-frequency support mode occurs. When this is done, "1" is set in the first high frequency flag, and "0" is cleared when the first high frequency support mode ends. The second high-frequency flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, and is the second flag when the transition to the second high-frequency support mode occurs. 2 “1” is set in the high frequency flag, and “0” is cleared when the second high frequency support mode ends.

In the case of the open / close execution mode (step S411: YES), information corresponding to a long period of 10 seconds as the duration of the fluctuation display times in the normal map display unit 38a this time is provided on the normal map side provided in the main RAM 84. It is set in the timer counter (step S413). Further, when "1" is not set in both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag (step S412: NO), that is, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the normal map display unit this time. Information corresponding to a long period of 10 seconds as the duration of the fluctuation display times in 38a is set in the timer counter on the normal drawing side provided in the main RAM 84 (step S413). The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter on the normal drawing side is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). As a result, when the open / close execution mode or the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the variable display times on the normal figure display unit 38a are performed over a long period of time, which is a relatively long duration.

When "1" is set in the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag instead of the open / close execution mode (step S412: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support. In the mode, the information corresponding to 1 second, which is a short period as the continuation period of the fluctuation display times in the normal map display unit 38a this time, is set in the normal map side timer counter of the main RAM 84 (step S414). As a result, when the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the fluctuation display times on the normal map display unit 38a are performed over a short period of time, which is a relatively short duration.

After that, the variable display of the pattern on the normal drawing display unit 38a is started (step S415). A variable display table for normal drawings is stored in advance in the main ROM 83 as a table to be referred to by the main MPU 82 when the normal drawing display unit 38a is used to display the variable display of the pattern. When the variable display of the pattern is executed in the normal map display unit 38a, the same variable display table is used regardless of the result of the normal map pass / fail determination process. When the variable display of the pattern is performed on the normal map display unit 38a, the variable display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern is repeated, but the variable display table for the general map shows the variable display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern. Control data for one lap is set. Therefore, when the variable display of the pattern is performed on the normal map display unit 38a, the variable display table for the normal map is repeatedly used until immediately before the final display is performed. After that, the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is added by 1 (step S416). As a result, the value of the normal map normal electric counter becomes "1" corresponding to the normal figure fluctuation processing (step S308).

<Processing during fluctuation of general map>
Next, the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map in step S308 in the normal drawing control process (FIG. 15) will be described.

In the normal map variation processing, it is determined whether or not the pattern is being variablely displayed on the normal map display unit 38a and the timing is before the final display. Specifically, when the value of the timer counter on the normal drawing side, which measures the duration of the fluctuation display times this time, is 0.4 seconds remaining, it is determined that the timing is before the final display. Before the final display, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern on the normal map display unit 38a is executed. This regular change continues until it is time to start the final display. Further, this regular change is performed in a certain manner regardless of whether or not the result of the normal figure winning / failing determination process (step S407) is the winning of the electric service opening. In addition, when it is time to confirm the display, the display mode of the pattern on the normal map display unit 38a is set to the stop mode corresponding to the result of the current normal map hit / miss determination process. This stop mode corresponds to the information read into the main RAM 84 in step S409 or step S410 of the normal figure variation start process (FIG. 16). Then, by adding 1 to the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter, the value of the counter is updated to the one corresponding to the processing during the Fuzu finalization.

<Processing during confirmation of general map>
Next, the process during the determination of the normal figure in step S309 in the normal figure general control process (FIG. 15) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

By determining whether or not the value of the timer counter on the normal map side, which measures the duration of the current fluctuation display times, is "0", the final display period of the current fluctuation display times (specifically, It is determined whether or not 0.4 seconds) has elapsed (step S501). When the definite display period has elapsed (step S501: YES), it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / miss determination process in the current variable display times is the electric service open winning (step S502). If the electric service opening is not won (step S502: NO), after clearing the value of the normal drawing counter to "0" (step S503), the processing during confirmation of the normal drawing is terminated. As a result, the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter corresponds to the Fuzu fluctuation start processing.

When the electric service opening is won (step S502: YES), it is determined whether or not the current state is the open / close execution mode (step S504), and when it is not the open / close execution mode, the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 and It is determined whether or not "1" is set in any of the second high frequency flags (step S505). In the open / close execution mode (step S504: YES), the processes of steps S506 to S508 are executed. Further, when "1" is not set in both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag (step S505: NO), that is, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, although it is not the open / close execution mode. The processes of steps S506 to S508 are executed.

In steps S506 to S508, first, "1" is set in the normal power release counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S506). Further, "10" is set in the general electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S507). Further, information corresponding to 0.7 seconds, which is the duration of the short opening on the normal power side, is set in the timer counter on the normal side of the main RAM 84 (step S508). The normal power release counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the normal power accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened in the current normal power open state by the main MPU 82. The normal power winning counter specifies whether or not the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit of 10 on the normal power side in the current normal power open state by the main MPU 82. It is a counter for.

By executing the processes of steps S506 to S508, the execution mode in the open state of the normal power generated in the low frequency support mode becomes the low expectation mode. That is, in the low expectation mode, the general electric utility 34a is short-opened once. As already explained, the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, so if the short opening of the general electric accessory 34a occurs once, the game ball basically enters the second operating port 34. Even if it does not occur, the number of balls entered is about one.

When "1" is set in the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag instead of the open / close execution mode (step S505: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support. In the mode, "3" is set in the timer of the main RAM 84 (step S509), "10" is set in the timer of the main RAM 84 (step S510), and the timer of the main RAM 84 is set. Information corresponding to 2 seconds, which is the duration of the long opening on the general electric side, is set in the timer counter on the drawing side (step S511). By executing the processes of steps S509 to S511, the execution mode in the open state of the normal power generated in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode becomes the high expectation mode. That is, in the high expectation mode, the long opening of the general electric accessory 34a occurs three times. As already explained, the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, so if the long opening of the general electric accessory 34a occurs once, about three game balls will enter the second operating port 34. obtain. Then, in the high expectation mode in the open state of the normal electric power, the long open state occurs three times with an interval period on the normal power side in which the second operating port 34 is closed. Therefore, when the normal power open state in the high expectation mode occurs, about nine game balls can enter. Since the normal power open state ends when the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit of 10 on the normal power side, the normal power open state in the high expectation mode is set. If this occurs, an event may occur in which the open state of the normal power is terminated when the upper limit number of game balls on the normal power side enters the second operating port 34.

When the process of step S507 or the process of step S510 is executed, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened by starting the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b. After that, by adding 1 to the value of the normal power counter, the value of the counter is updated to be compatible with the normal power control process.

<Public control processing>
Next, the normal power control process in step S310 in the normal power control process (FIG. 15) will be described.

In the normal power control process, when a prize is generated in the second operating port 34, a value corresponding to the number of prizes is subtracted from the value of the normal power prize counter of the main RAM 84. Then, when the value of the general electric winning counter is "0", the value of the general electric release counter of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b is stopped. By doing so, the second operating port 34 is closed. Then, the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing round of the Fuzu Fuden control process becomes the Fuzu variation start process (step S307).

If the second operating port 34 has not been won, or if the value of the general electric winning counter is not "0", whether or not the value of the normal timer counter of the main RAM 84 is "0" is determined. judge. When the value of the timer counter on the normal drawing side is "0", the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for general electric power is stopped to close the second operating port 34. Then, the value of the normal power release counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal power release counter after 1 subtraction is "0". When the value of the normal power opening counter after subtraction 1 is 1 or more, the second operating port 34 is maintained in the closed state for the interval period (specifically, 1 second) on the normal power side, and then for the normal power. The second operating port 34 is opened by outputting the drive signal to the drive unit 34b again. Further, the timer counter on the normal side of the main RAM 84 is set with information corresponding to 2 seconds, which is the duration of long opening on the normal power side. As a result, the second operating port 34 is opened again, and the duration of the open state is set to 2 seconds, which is the duration of the long opening on the normal electric side. When the value of the normal power release counter after subtraction 1 is "0", the value of the normal power power counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing round of the Fuzu Fuden control process becomes the Fuzu variation start process (step S307).

<Special figure special electric control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control process executed in step S213 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the pending information acquisition process is executed (step S601). In the process of acquiring the hold information, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, a prize has been generated in the first operating port 33 (step S701: YES), and the first special figure hold area 111 is stored in the first special figure hold area 111. When the number of 1 hold information is less than the upper limit storage number (step S702: YES), the process for acquiring the first hold information is executed.

In the process for acquiring the first hold information, first, the main RAM 84 is provided in order for the main MPU 82 to grasp the number of unprocessed first hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 111. The value of the first special figure hold counter is added by 1 (step S703). The display content of the first special figure hold display unit 37c in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the first special figure hold counter. As a result, the display content of the first special figure hold display unit 37c corresponds to the number of first hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 111. After that, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation area 111, that is, the number of storages corresponding to the number of storages in which 1 is added in step S703. Store in the area (step S704). After that, the first hold command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S705). As a result, the symbol display device 41 is displayed and controlled by the display side MPU 103 so that the display content of the first hold display area 42a of the symbol display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the increase in the first hold information.

When a negative determination is made in step S701, a negative determination is made in step S702, or the process of step S705 is executed, a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 (step S706: YES). Further, on the condition that the number of the second reserved information stored in the second special figure reserved area 112 is less than the upper limit stored number (step S707: YES), the process for acquiring the second reserved information is executed. do.

In the process for acquiring the second hold information, first, the main RAM 84 is provided in order for the main MPU 82 to grasp the number of unprocessed second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 112. The value of the second special figure hold counter is added by 1 (step S708). The display content of the second special figure hold display unit 37d in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the second special figure hold counter. As a result, the display content of the second special figure hold display unit 37d corresponds to the number of second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 112. After that, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 112, that is, the number of storages corresponding to the number of storages in which 1 is added in step S708. Store in the area (step S709). After that, the second hold command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S710). As a result, the symbol display device 41 is displayed and controlled by the display side MPU 103 so that the display content of the second hold display area 42b of the symbol display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the increase in the second hold information.

Returning to the description of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18), after executing the hold information acquisition process in step S601, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter provided in the main RAM 84 is read out (step S602). , Read the special figure special electric address table provided in the main ROM 83 (step S603). Then, the start address corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table (step S604), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S605).

The special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to grasp which of the processes of steps S606 to S612 in the special figure special electric control process should be executed, and is displayed in the special figure special electric address table. Is set to the start address in the program for executing each process of step S606 to step S612 in correspondence with the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter. When the value of the special figure special electric counter is "0", the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process in step S606, and when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "1", the process during special figure change in step S607. If the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2", the process jumps to the process of determining the special figure in step S608, and if the value of the special figure special electric counter is "3", the special electric of step S609 It jumps to the start process, jumps to the process during opening of the special electric power in step S610 when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "4", and when the value of the special electric special electric counter is "5" in step S611. It jumps to the processing during closing of the special electric power, and when the value of the special electric power counter of the special figure is "6", it jumps to the processing of ending the special electric power in step S612. Hereinafter, each process of steps S606 to S612 will be described individually.

<Special figure fluctuation start processing>
First, the special figure variation start processing in step S606 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the special figure variation start process is not executed in the situation where the game round is already executed and the open / close execution mode is executed.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, when the second reserved information is not stored in the second special figure reserved area 112 and the first reserved information is stored in the first special figure reserved area 111 (step S801: YES, step). S802: NO), the first data setting process is executed (step S803). In the first data setting process, the data stored in the first area 111a of the first special figure holding area 111 is moved to the execution area 113 for the special figure. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area 111 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 111a to 111d to the lower area side, and specifically, the second area 111b → the first area 111a, the third. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area 111c → second area 111b, fourth area 111d → third area 111c, and so on. Then, the fourth area 111d is cleared to "0". After that, the value of the first special figure hold counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. As a result, the display content of the first special figure hold display unit 37c in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the first hold information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, a first reduction command indicating that the first holding information in the first special figure holding area 111 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. As a result, the symbol display device 41 is displayed and controlled by the display side MPU 103 so that the display content of the first hold display area 42a of the symbol display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the decrease of the first hold information.

On the other hand, when the second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112 (step S801 and step S802: YES), the first hold information acquired before the second hold information is the first. 1 Even if it is stored in the special figure holding area 111, the second data setting process is executed (step S804). In the second data setting process, the data stored in the first area 112a of the second special figure holding area 112 is moved to the execution area 113 for the special figure. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 112 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 112a to 112d to the lower area side, and specifically, the second area 112b → the first area 112a, the third. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area 112c → second area 112b, fourth area 112d → third area 112c, and so on. Then, the fourth area 112d is cleared to "0". After that, the value of the second special figure hold counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. As a result, the display content of the second special figure hold display unit 37d in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the second hold information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, a second reduction command indicating that the second holding information in the second special figure holding area 112 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. As a result, the symbol display device 41 is displayed and controlled by the display side MPU 103 so that the display content of the second hold display area 42b of the symbol display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the decrease of the second hold information.

When the second hold information is stored as described above, even if the first hold information acquired before the second hold information is stored, the second hold information is the execution area for the special figure. It becomes a shift target to 113. As a result, the second hold information is preferentially digested as the start target of the game round rather than the first hold information.

When the process of step S803 or the process of step S804 is executed, the pass / fail determination process is executed (step S805). In the win / fail determination process, if the win / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode and the start target of the game round is the first hold information, the first win / fail table 121 (see FIG. 9A) at the time of low probability is displayed from the main ROM 83. If it is read into the main RAM 84 and the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the start target of the game round is the second hold information, the second winning / failing table 122 (see FIG. 9B) at the time of low probability is displayed on the main ROM83. If the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the winning / losing table 123 at the time of high probability regardless of whether the game is started with the first hold information or the second hold information (FIG. 9 (c)). ) Is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. After reading the hit / fail tables 121 to 123, the hit / fail determination information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read from the hold information stored in the execution area 113 for the special figure, and the read numerical information is obtained. It is determined whether or not the data group corresponding to the set value of the current use target in the read-out hit / fail tables 121 to 123 matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result. If the numerical information does not match the numerical information set as the jackpot result, the information for determining whether or not the result is a data group corresponding to the currently set value of the target to be used in the read or not table 121 to 123. In, it is determined whether or not it matches with any of the numerical information set as the time saving result.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is the jackpot result (step S806: YES), the jackpot distribution determination process is executed (step S807). In the jackpot distribution determination process, if the start target of the game round is the first hold information, the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure (see FIG. 10A) is transferred from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. If the target of reading and starting the game round is the second hold information, the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure (see FIG. 10B) is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. After reading the jackpot distribution tables 125 and 126, the distribution determination information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the type random number counter C2 is read from the hold information stored in the execution area 113 for the special figure, and the jackpot distribution is performed. By referring to the minute tables 125 and 126, it is specified which kind of jackpot result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After executing the jackpot distribution determination process, "1" is set in the flag of the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in the jackpot distribution determination process (step S808). After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S809). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which is the start target of the game round, is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance for the jackpot result stop. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of jackpot result. In step S809, information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in step S808 is stored in the main RAM 84. It should be noted that the stop mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of stop modes of the pattern may be set for at least a part of the jackpot results. The method of selecting the stop result for the jackpot result in which the stop modes of a plurality of types of symbols are set is arbitrary, but for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type random number counter C2.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is not a jackpot result but a time saving result (step S806: NO, step S810: YES), the time saving distribution determination process is executed (step S811). In the time saving distribution determination process, if the start target of the game round is the first hold information, the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure (see FIG. 10C) is transferred from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. If the target for starting the reading and the game round is the second hold information, the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure (see FIG. 10D) is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. After reading the time-saving distribution tables 127 and 128, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the type random number counter C2 is read from the hold information stored in the execution area 113 for the special figure, and the time-saving distribution is performed. By referring to the minute tables 127 and 128, it is specified which kind of time saving result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After executing the time saving distribution determination process, "1" is set in the flag of the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of the time saving result specified in the time saving distribution determination process (step S812). After that, the stop result setting process for the time saving result is executed (step S813). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which is the start target of the game round, is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance for the time saving result stop. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In the stop result table for the time saving result, the type of the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the time saving result. In step S813, information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of time saving result specified in step S812 is stored in the main RAM 84. It should be noted that the stop mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each time saving result, or a plurality of types of stop modes of the pattern may be set for at least a part of the time saving results. The method of selecting the stop result for the time saving result in which the stop modes of a plurality of types of patterns are set is arbitrary, but for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type random number counter C2. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in step S813 is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is neither the jackpot result nor the time saving result (step S810: NO), the stop result setting process for the missed result is executed (step S814). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b in this game is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result and the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the time saving result. It is one type common to the figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b.

When the process of step S809, the process of step S813, or the process of step S814 is executed, the specific process of the variable display period is executed (step S815). FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying the variable display period.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S901). The high-probability flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, and when the transition to the high-probability mode occurs, "1" is set in the high-probability flag. It is set and the high probability flag is cleared to "0" when the high probability mode ends. When "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S901: YES), that is, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the table group for high probability is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step). S902). In the situation where the variable display period selection process is executed in step S908 with reference to the table group for high probability, if a big hit result occurs in this game round, or the result of the hit / fail judgment process is out of order. If the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information that is being executed at the same time corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display and the out-of-reach display occurs in this game, the variation type counter at that time. By collating the numerical information of CS with the reach-corresponding table in the table group for high probability, the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is read out. There are a plurality of types of variable display periods of the reach display mode, but any of the variable display periods of the reach display mode is longer than the variable display period when the reach display does not occur.

If the jackpot result does not occur in this game round and the out-of-reach display does not occur, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, and two or more second cards are in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game is started in a situation where the hold information is stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special drawing side is read out as the variable display period of the current game. As a result, it is possible to improve the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the second hold information in the high probability mode. Further, even if a time saving result occurs in the current game round, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, and two or more second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game is started in the above situation, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special drawing side is read out.

On the other hand, when the jackpot result does not occur in this game round and the out-of-reach display does not occur, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round and one second hold in the second special figure hold area 112. The first reserved information is the execution target of the game round when the game round is started in the situation where the information is stored, or when the jackpot result does not occur in the current game round and the missed reach display does not occur. If it is, the information of the middle period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special map side is read out as the variation display period of the game times this time. As a result, it is possible to guarantee the situation in which the second hold information is acquired in the high probability mode. Further, even if a time saving result occurs in the current game round, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, and one second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game round is started in the situation where the game is running, or if the first hold information is the execution target of the game round, the information for the middle period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special figure side is read out.

In the high probability mode, even if the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process (step S805), it is invalidated. In this case, when the variable display period of the game times is selected by referring to the table group for high probability, the time saving result is treated in the same way as the out-of-time result, so that the time saving result that is invalidated is generated. It is possible to make it inconspicuous.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S901: NO), "1" is set in either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84. Whether or not it is determined (step S903). When "1" is set in the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag (step S903: YES), that is, the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the first high frequency support mode. 2 In the high frequency support mode, the table group for high frequency support is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S904). In the situation where the variable display period selection process is executed in step S908 with reference to the table group for high frequency support, if a big hit result occurs in this game round, or the result of the hit / fail judgment process is out of order. In addition, if the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information to be executed corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display and the out-of-reach display occurs in this game round, the variation type at that time. By collating the numerical information of the counter CS with the reach-compatible table in the table group for high frequency support, the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is read out. In this case, the selection mode of the variable display period of the reach display mode is different from the case where the table group for high probability is referred to, and specifically, the frequency is higher when the table group for high probability is referred to. It is easier to select a longer variable display period than when the supporting tables are referenced. However, this relationship may be reversed.

If the jackpot result does not occur in this game round and the out-of-reach display does not occur, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, and two or more second cards are in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game is started in a situation where the hold information is stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special drawing side is read out as the variable display period of the current game. As a result, in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, it is possible to increase the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the second hold information. Further, even if a time saving result occurs in the current game round, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, and two or more second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game is started in the above situation, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special drawing side is read out.

On the other hand, when the jackpot result does not occur in this game round and the out-of-reach display does not occur, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round and one second hold in the second special figure hold area 112. The first reserved information is the execution target of the game round when the game round is started in the situation where the information is stored, or when the jackpot result does not occur in the current game round and the missed reach display does not occur. If it is, the information of the middle period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special map side is read out as the variation display period of the game times this time. As a result, it is possible to guarantee the situation in which the second hold information is acquired in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. Further, even if a time saving result occurs in the current game round, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, and one second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game round is started in the situation where the game is running, or if the first hold information is the execution target of the game round, the information for the middle period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special figure side is read out.

In the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, even if the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process (step S805), the final game of the high frequency support mode. Unless it is a time, it is invalidated. In this case, when the variable display period of the game times is selected by referring to the table group for high frequency support, the time saving result is treated in the same way as the out-of-time result, so that the time saving result is invalidated. Can be made inconspicuous. Further, when the time saving result is selected in the last game round of the high frequency support mode, the second high frequency support mode is generated triggered by the time saving result, but even in this case, the said time saving result is generated. As for the variable display period of the game times, the same variable display period as in the case of the deviation result in which the reach display does not occur will be selected. It becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize.

When "1" is not set in either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag (step S903; NO), that is, the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. If there is, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S905). The high-reach state flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the high-reach state is a high-reach state that can occur in the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode. The high reach state is a gaming state in which the off-reach display occurs more frequently than in the situation where the low probability mode is in the low frequency support mode and the reach is not in the high frequency state.

When the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" (step S905: YES), that is, when the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are set and the reach high frequency state is further set, the table group for the high reach frequency is displayed. Read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S906). In the situation where the variable display period selection process is executed in step S908 with reference to the table group for high reach frequency, the variable display period is selected in step S908 with reference to the table group for low frequency support described later. The numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information to be executed when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is different from the situation where the selection process is executed corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. The probability of being identified is high.

When a big hit result occurs in this game round, or the result of the hit / fail judgment process is a miss result and the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information to be executed is missed and corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. If an out-of-reach display occurs in this game, the reach display mode is by collating the numerical information of the variable type counter CS at that time with the reach-compatible table in the table group for high reach frequency. Read the information of the variable display period of. In this case, as the selection mode of the variable display period of the reach display mode, a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the table group for low frequency support described later is referred to. Further, in this case, the selection mode of the variation display period of the reach display mode is the same as the case where the table group for high probability is referred to, but the fluctuation is longer than the case where the table group for high probability is referred to. The display period may be easily selected, or a shorter variable display period may be more easily selected than when the table group for high probability is referred to, and the table group for high frequency support may be referred to. The configuration may be the same, or a configuration in which a shorter variable display period can be easily selected than when a table group for high frequency support is referred to may be used.

When a time saving result occurs in this game, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is collated with the table corresponding to the time saving result in the table group for high reach frequency, so that the variation display corresponding to the time saving result is displayed. Read the period information. Multiple types of information on the variable display period corresponding to the time saving result are set, and it corresponds to the fact that the reach display occurs longer than the shortest period on the special figure side regardless of the variable display period corresponding to the time saving result. The period is shorter than the variable display period. Specifically, 10 seconds, 11 seconds, 12 seconds, and 13 seconds are set as the variation display period corresponding to the time saving result, and the period corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS is the period of this game. Selected as the variable display period of times.

If the jackpot result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round and the out-of-reach display does not occur, the first hold information is the execution target of the game round and three or more in the first special figure hold area 111. If the game is started in a situation where the first hold information of the above is stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special drawing side is read out as the variation display period of the current game. As a result, in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to improve the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the first hold information.

On the other hand, in the case where the jackpot result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round and the off-reach display does not occur, the first hold information is the execution target of the game round and one in the first special figure hold area 111 or The second game is started in a situation where two first hold information is stored, or when the jackpot result and the time saving result are not generated in this game time and the out-of-reach display is not generated. When the hold information is the target of the game round, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is collated with the table corresponding to the complete deviation result in the table group for high reach frequency, so that the complete deviation result is obtained. Read the information of the corresponding variable display period. Multiple types of information on the variable display period corresponding to the complete deviation result are set, and any variable display period corresponding to the complete deviation result is longer than the shortest period on the special figure side, and the variable display corresponding to the time saving result is displayed. The period is shorter than the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of the period and reach display. Specifically, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, and 8 seconds are set as the fluctuation display period corresponding to the complete deviation result, and the period corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS is this time. It is selected as the variable display period of the game times.

When "1" is not set in the reach high frequency state flag (step S905: NO), that is, when the low probability mode is in the low frequency support mode and the reach high frequency state is not set, the table for low frequency support is provided. The group is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S907). In the situation where the variable display period selection process is executed in step S908 with reference to the low frequency support table group, the variable display is performed in step S908 with reference to the high reach high frequency table group as described above. Numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information to be executed when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is out of order than the situation in which the period selection process is executed is out of order and the reach display occurs. The probability of being identified as corresponding is low.

When a big hit result occurs in this game round, or the result of the hit / fail judgment process is a miss result and the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information to be executed is missed and corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. If an out-of-reach display occurs in this game, the reach display mode is by collating the numerical information of the variable type counter CS at that time with the reach-compatible table in the table group for low-frequency support. Read the information of the variable display period of. In this case, as for the selection mode of the variable display period of the reach display mode, as described above, it is easier to select a shorter variable display period than when the table group for high reach frequency is referred to.

When a time saving result occurs in this game, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is collated with the table corresponding to the time saving result in the table group for low frequency support, so that the variation display corresponding to the time saving result is displayed. Read the period information. The mode of selecting the information of the variable display period corresponding to the time saving result is the same as the case where the table corresponding to the time saving result in the table group for high reach frequency is referred to. In other words, multiple types of information on the variable display period corresponding to the time saving result are set, and the reach display occurs longer than the shortest period on the special figure side regardless of the variable display period corresponding to the time saving result. The period is shorter than the corresponding variable display period. Specifically, 10 seconds, 11 seconds, 12 seconds, and 13 seconds are set as the variation display period corresponding to the time saving result, and the period corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS is the period of this game. Selected as the variable display period of times.

If the jackpot result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round and the out-of-reach display does not occur, the first hold information is the execution target of the game round and three or more in the first special figure hold area 111. If the game is started in a situation where the first hold information of the above is stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special drawing side is read out as the variation display period of the current game. As a result, in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to improve the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the first hold information.

On the other hand, in the case where the jackpot result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round and the off-reach display does not occur, the first hold information is the execution target of the game round and one in the first special figure hold area 111 or The second game is started in a situation where two first hold information is stored, or when the jackpot result and the time saving result are not generated in this game time and the out-of-reach display is not generated. When the hold information is the target of the game round, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is collated with the table corresponding to the complete deviation result in the table group for low frequency support, so that the complete deviation result is obtained. Read the information of the corresponding variable display period. The mode of selecting the information of the variable display period corresponding to the complete deviation result is the same as the case where the table corresponding to the complete deviation result in the table group for high reach frequency is referred to. In other words, multiple types of information on the variable display period corresponding to the complete deviation result are set, and the fluctuation display period corresponding to any of the complete deviation results is longer than the shortest period on the special map side, and the variation corresponding to the time saving result is changed. The display period and the period are shorter than the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of reach display. Specifically, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, and 8 seconds are set as the fluctuation display period corresponding to the complete deviation result, and the period corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS is this time. It is selected as the variable display period of the game times.

When the process of step S902, the process of step S904, the process of step S906, or the process of step S907 is executed, the variable display period selection process is executed with reference to the table group read in any of these processes (step). S908). The content of the selection process has already been described. Then, the information of the fluctuation display period selected in step S908 is set in the special figure side timer counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S909). The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter on the special figure side is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

Returning to the explanation of the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 20), after executing the specification processing of the fluctuation display period in step S815, the fluctuation command and the type command corresponding to the game times to be started this time are executed. It is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S816). The change command includes the information of the change display period specified in step S815, and the game times to be started is set to either the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. Contains information that indicates whether it is supported. The variable command does not include information on whether or not to execute reach display, but the variable display period when reach display occurs is longer than the variable display period when reach display does not occur. Since it is set, the sound / light side MPU 93 can specify the presence / absence of the reach display from the information of the variable display period. The type command includes information on whether or not the game times to be started this time correspond to the jackpot result, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, it is any type of jackpot result. Information indicating that is included. In addition, the type command includes information on whether or not the game times to be started this time correspond to the time saving result, and if it corresponds to the time saving result, any type of time saving result is supported. Contains information indicating whether or not.

After that, the variable display of the pattern is started in the display unit of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, which is the target for starting the current game round (step S817). Then, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S818). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "1" corresponding to the special figure changing process (step S607).

When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the variation command and the type command, the sound / light side MPU 93 executes a process for determining the execution content of the game rotation effect corresponding to those commands. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 are executed according to the table corresponding to the processing result. As a result, the light emitting effect of the display light emitting unit 64 and the sound output effect of the speaker unit 65 are executed over the variable display period of the game times. Further, the sound / light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the execution content of the game rounding effect determined this time to the display side MPU 103. Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 103 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 according to the table corresponding to the command. As a result, the display effect on the symbol display device 41 is executed over the variable display period of the game times this time.

<Processing during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S607 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18) will be described.

When the value of the timer counter on the special figure side is 1 or more and the fluctuation display period of the current game times has not elapsed, the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b that are the execution targets of the current game times. When it is the update timing of the contents, the data for updating the display contents of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is set. As a result, the display contents of the patterns on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled are updated to the display contents in the following order.

The mode at the start of the variable display of the pattern on the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the update mode of the variable display of the pattern are performed in a certain mode regardless of the hit / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result, and the design display device. It is performed in a certain manner regardless of the content of the effect for the game round in 41. For example, when a predetermined plurality of update timings occur, the display content of the pattern goes around once and the display pattern in which the display order is a fixed order is repeatedly performed, and when the variable display period elapses, the display pattern is concerned. Regardless of the order in which the game is displayed, the stop result determined at the start of the game is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, when the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, when the fluctuation display period has elapsed, the final stop command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. After that, at the start of the game round, the pattern of the special figure display units 37a and 37b stored in the main RAM 84 in any of step S809, step S813 and step S814 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 20) is stopped. Read information. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the state where the pattern corresponding to the game result of the current game is displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. After that, the information of the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter on the special figure side. As a result, the measurement of the final stop period is started. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "2" corresponding to the special figure finalizing process (step S608).

When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the final stop command, the sound / light side MPU 93 transmits the corresponding command to the display side MPU 103. When the display-side MPU 103 receives the command, the display-side MPU 103 confirms and displays the combination of symbols corresponding to the stop result of the current game on the symbol display device 41 over the final stop period.

<Processing during special drawing confirmation>
Next, the special figure finalizing process executed in step S608 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the value of the timer counter on the special figure side is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S1001: YES), and the game result of this game is a jackpot result (step S1002: YES). ), The information corresponding to the opening period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special drawing side (step S1003), and the opening command is transmitted to the MPU 93 on the sound light side (step S1004). When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the opening command, the effect corresponding to the opening period is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

After that, information on the fixed ceiling number of 500 times is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S1005). That is, when the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the open / close execution mode is started, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131. In the case of a configuration in which the fixed ceiling count is set in the ceiling counter 131 during the open / close execution mode or when the open / close execution mode ends, instead of when the open / close execution mode is started, the operation is performed after the open / close execution mode is started. If a fraudulent act is performed so that the set value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the power supply is stopped and the operating power supply is restarted, the set value update process (step S117) is performed. In step S117) or the RAM clearing process (step S119), the information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress is cleared as described above, whereas the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained, so that the operating power is supplied. While gaining the benefit of the open / close execution mode until is stopped, there is a risk that the game will be restarted in a situation where the number of remaining ceilings is small. On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be neutralized.

After that, information of 450 times, which is the period switching reference number, is set in the fluctuation selection state counter 132 provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1006). The trigger for subtracting 1 from the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is the same as the trigger for subtracting 1 from the value of the ceiling counter 131. That is, when the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high probability mode and the game times are exhausted once, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted by 1 at the end of the game times. Then, when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented by 1 in a situation where the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes “0”, the main RAM 84 "1" is set in the reach high frequency status flag of. When the reach high frequency status flag is set to "1" in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the reach high frequency is performed in the variable display period identification process (FIG. 21) as described above. The variable display period of the game times is selected with reference to the table group for.

In other words, if the game times of the period switching reference number are exhausted in the low probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends, the reach high frequency table group is referred to in the low frequency support mode. It becomes a high frequency state. Then, in the high reach state, as already explained, there is a high probability that the reach display is selected when the result is out of the situation in which the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are used and the reach is not in the high frequency state. In addition, the variable display period when the reach display is selected tends to be longer than the situation in which the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are used and the reach is not in the high frequency state. Further, the period switching reference number of times is a predetermined number of times (specifically, 50 times) less than the number of times of the fixed ceiling. Therefore, it is possible to generate the reach high frequency state before the second high frequency support mode is generated due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction.

After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S1007). As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "3" corresponding to the special electric power start processing (step S609).

If the game result of the current game is not a jackpot result (step S1002: NO), the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 (see FIG. 6) is executed in step S1008, and the variable selection state counter 132 of the variable selection state counter 132 is executed in step S1009. The subtraction process is executed, the setting process for the time saving result is executed in step S1010, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed in step S1011, and the subtraction of the high probability state counter 133 (see FIG. 6) is executed in step S1012. Execute the process. The contents of the processes of steps S1008 to S1012 will be described in detail later. After that, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1013). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S606).

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric start processing executed in step S609 of the special electric special electric control process (FIG. 18) will be described.

The opening / closing number setting process is executed on condition that the value of the timer counter on the special figure side is "0", that is, the opening period has elapsed. In this case, if the current game result is a 5R low accuracy result or a 5R high accuracy result, "5" is set in the round counter provided in the main RAM 84, and if the current game result is a 10R high accuracy result, the main result is Set "10" in the round counter of the side RAM 84. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the open / close execution mode by the main MPU 82. In addition, information on the open duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special drawing side. Further, "10" is set in the winning counter provided in the main RAM 84. The winning counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of the maximum winning number on the main MPU 82. Further, the special electric power winning device 32 is opened by outputting the drive signal to the special electric power driving unit 32b. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "4" corresponding to the processing during opening of the special electric power (step S610).

<Processing while the special electric power is open>
Next, the process during opening of the special electric power, which is executed in step S610 of the special electric power control process (FIG. 18), will be described.

When the value of the timer counter on the special figure side is "0", that is, when the open continuation period has elapsed, the value of the round counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 and the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for special electric power is transmitted. By stopping the output, the special electric winning device 32 is closed. Further, when the game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32, the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the winning counter after 1 subtraction is "0", the main RAM 84 The special electric winning device 32 is closed by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter and stopping the output of the driving signal to the special electric driving unit 32b. Further, when the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1, if the value of the round counter after the subtraction is 1 or more, the interval period information (specifically, 3 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special figure side. , The value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "5" corresponding to the special electric closed processing (step S611). On the other hand, if the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is "0", the ending period information (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special figure side, and the ending command is transmitted to the MPU 93 on the sound light side. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 2. As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "6" corresponding to the special electric power end processing (step S612). When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the ending command, the effect corresponding to the ending period is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

<Processing while the special electric train is closed>
Next, the special power closing process executed in step S611 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 18) will be described.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, when the interval period has elapsed, the information on the open duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special figure side timer counter. .. Further, "10" is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 84. Further, the special electric power winning device 32 is opened by outputting the drive signal to the special electric power driving unit 32b. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1. As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "4" corresponding to the processing during opening of the special electric power (step S610).

<Special train end processing>
Next, the special electric power termination process executed in step S612 of the special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, when the ending period has elapsed (step S1101: YES), the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a 5R high probability result or a 10R. If the result is highly accurate (step S1102: YES), the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1103). As already described, the high-probability flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. When "1" is set in the high probability flag, the winning / losing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode.

After that, "1" is set in the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84, and "0" is cleared in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1104). The first high-frequency flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode as described above, and the second high-frequency flag is the support mode as described above. Is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not is the second high frequency support mode. When the first high frequency flag is set to "1" and the second high frequency flag is cleared to "0", the support mode becomes the first high frequency support mode.

After that, the information of "100" which is the high probability continuation number is set in the high probability state counter 133 provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1105). The high-probability state counter 133 is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuations of the high-probability mode by the main MPU 82. In this pachinko machine 10, the high-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode are set when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-probability result or the 10R high-probability result ends. In the mode situation, if the number of game times executed without a new jackpot result is 100, which is the high probability continuation number, the low probability mode and the low probability mode and even if the jackpot result does not occur Enter low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, when the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a 5R low probability result (step S1102: NO), the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1106). When the high probability flag is cleared to "0", the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode. After that, "1" is set in the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84, and "0" is cleared in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1107). When the first high frequency flag is set to "1" and the second high frequency flag is cleared to "0", the support mode becomes the first high frequency support mode.

After that, the information of "100" which is the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1108). The time saving state counter 134 is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuations of the high frequency support mode (first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode) in the low probability mode by the main MPU 82. In the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode are set when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result is terminated. In the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, if the number of game times executed without a new jackpot result is the first time reduction continuation number, the jackpot result has not occurred. However, it becomes a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode.

When the process of step S1105 or the process of step S1108 is executed, the state specification command transmission process is executed (step S1019). In the transmission process, a state designation command corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 determined by the processes of steps S1102 to S1108 is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93. The sound / light side MPU 93 executes a process for causing the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect corresponding to the content of the received state designation command. After that, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S606).

<Subtraction process of high probability state counter 133>
Next, the subtraction process of the high-probability state counter 133 executed in step S1012 of the process during determination of the special figure (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

When "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1201: YES), that is, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. (Step S1202). When the value of the high-probability state counter 133 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1203: YES), the high-probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the first high-frequency support mode. It means that 100 game times, which is a high probability continuation number, have been digested. In this case, the high probability flag is cleared to "0" (step S1204), and the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1205). As a result, it becomes a normal game state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode. After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S1206). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the high probability state has ended is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. Upon receiving the state designation command, the sound / light side MPU 93 ends the execution of the effect corresponding to the high probability mode in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and the effect corresponding to the normal gaming state. To start.

<Setting process for time saving results>
Next, the setting process for the time saving result executed in step S1010 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the game result of this game is a time saving result (step S1301: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1302). Then, when "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S1302: YES), the setting process for the time saving result is terminated without executing the processes after step S1303. That is, even if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) is selected in the winning / failing determination process of the game times executed in the situation of the high probability mode, the second high frequency support is triggered by the time saving result. The time saving result is invalidated without setting the mode.

Here, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), as described above, the setting process (FIG. 25) for the time saving result is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. As a result, in the final game round in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. When the value of the high-probability state counter 133 becomes "0", the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed before the high-probability flag and the first high-frequency flag are cleared to "0". Become. Then, when the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed at that timing, the high probability flag is still set to "1", so that the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is set. Is not done. Therefore, in the game times in which the hit / fail determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time saving result. Further, in the process of determining the special figure (FIG. 22), such an effect is executed in the process of executing the setting process (FIG. 25) for the time saving result before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. It can be realized by setting.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag (step S1302: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1302: NO). Step S1303, step S1304). That is, it is determined whether or not the support mode is either the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode. When the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode (step S1303 or step S1304: YES), the setting process for this time saving result is terminated without executing the processes after step S1305. That is, even if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) is selected in the winning / failing determination process of the game times executed in the situation of the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the time saving is shortened. If the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode is set at the timing when the setting process for the result (FIG. 25) is executed, the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is set. Time saving results are invalidated without being done. This makes it possible to prevent additional settings for shifting to the high-frequency support mode from being executed in the middle of the high-frequency support mode.

When the support mode is the low frequency support mode (step S1303 and step S1304: NO), "1" is set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1305). As a result, the support mode becomes the second high-frequency support mode. If the time saving result this time is the first time saving result (step S1306: YES), the time saving state counter 134 (see FIG. 6) provided in the main RAM 84 is informed of the first time saving continuation number of "100". (Step S1307), and if the current time saving result is the second time saving result (step S1306: NO), the information of "150" which is the second time saving continuation number is set in the time saving state counter 134 (step S1308). ). The time saving state counter 134 is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode) by the main MPU 82. Is. In a situation where the time is shortened, if the number of game times executed without a new jackpot result is 100, which is the number of continuations of the first time reduction, or 150 times, which is the number of continuations of the second time reduction, the jackpot is hit. Even if no result is generated, the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are set.

When the process of step S1307 or the process of step S1308 is executed, the state specification command transmission process is executed (step S1309). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time saving state has been started is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The status specification command also includes information on the number of time reduction continuations set this time. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the sound / light side MPU 93 performs a process for causing the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time saving state is started. Execute.

Even if the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail judgment process as described above, the time saving result setting process (FIG. 25) is executed at the end of the game round that resulted in the time saving result, depending on the situation. The second high-frequency support mode may or may not be set based on the time saving result. In this case, the stop result displayed as a stop on the special figure display units 37a and 37b in the game in which the time reduction result is selected in the hit / fail determination process is set to the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction result. While it does not change depending on whether or not it is performed, the stop result displayed as a stop on the symbol display device 41 changes depending on whether or not the second high frequency support mode is set triggered by the time saving result. .. Such contents will be described in detail below. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop result of the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the stop result of the symbol display device 41.

As described above, as the game results that can be selected by the game round hit / fail determination process (step S805) and various distribution determination processes (step S807, step S811), 5R low accuracy result, 5R high accuracy result, 10R high accuracy result, There are first time-saving results, second time-saving results, and missed results. The stop result displayed as a confirmation display of the game times on the special figure display units 37a and 37b is "1" in the case of the 5R low probability result and "2" in the case of the 5R high probability result. It is "3" in the case of 10R high accuracy result, "4" in the case of the first time saving result, "5" in the case of the second time saving result, and "-" in the case of the wrong result. ". These stop results do not change in any game situation. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can uniquely grasp the game result of the game times by checking the stop result of the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

The stop result, which is stopped and displayed as the final display of the game times on the symbol display device 41, does not change regardless of the game situation when it is a jackpot result or a missed result, whereas it is a time saving result. In some cases, it changes depending on the game situation. Specifically, in the case of a 5R low probability result, the combination of the same even-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and red is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43. NS. In the case of 5R high accuracy result, the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols other than the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5 of any of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the red color is stopped in the state suggestion area 43. Is displayed. In the case of a 10R high accuracy result, the combination of "7" symbols is stopped and displayed in any of the effective lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and red is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion region 43. In the case of a deviation result, each effective line L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, a combination of the first time reduction occurrence symbols (“1 ・ 2 ・ 3”) and a second time reduction occurrence symbol. Combinations of outlier symbols other than the combination of (“3.4.1”) are stopped and displayed, and red is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43.

In the case of the first time saving result, the normal gaming state which is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, or the time saving state which is the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode). In the case of the final game round of, the combination of the first time saving symbols (“1, 2, 3”) is stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5 of any of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the state suggestion region 43. Is stopped and displayed in red. In the case of the second time saving result, the normal gaming state which is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, or the time saving state which is the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode). In the case of the final game round of, the combination of the second time reduction occurrence symbols (“3.4.1”) is stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5 of any of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the state suggestion area 43. Is stopped and displayed in red. Although details will be described later, in the final game round of the time saving state, the time saving result setting process (FIG. 25) is performed after the subtraction process (step S1008) of the time saving state counter 134 for ending the time saving state is executed. Is executed, so that the time saving state has already ended and the normal gaming state is reached at the timing when the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed.

FIG. 27 (a) shows the first special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device when the first game time is obtained in the game time triggered by the first hold information, which is the final game time in the normal game state or the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stop result of 41. As shown in FIG. 27 (a1), in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, the combination of the first time reduction occurrence symbols (“1 ・ 2 ・ 3”) is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, suggesting the state. The red color is stopped and displayed in the area 43. Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (a2), the stop result "4" corresponding to the first time saving result is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a.

On the other hand, in the case of a game time other than the final game time in the high probability state and the first high frequency support mode, or the time saving state, the symbol sequence is either the first time saving result or the second time saving result. On Z1 to Z3, the combination of non-reach off symbols is stopped and displayed on each of the effective lines L1 to L5. The non-reach out-of-reach symbol combinations are the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, the combination of the first time-saving symbols ("1 ・ 2 ・ 3"), and the combination of the second time-saving symbols ("3.4.1"). ) And a combination of symbols other than the out-of-reach symbol combination. In the state suggestion area 43, blue is stopped and displayed in the case of the first time saving result, and green is stopped and displayed in the case of the second time saving result.

FIG. 27 (b) shows a second special figure display unit 37b in the case where the first game time is obtained in the game time triggered by the second hold information, which is a game time other than the final game time in the high probability state or the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stop result of the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 27 (b2), the stop result "4" corresponding to the first time saving result is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 37b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 (b1), in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, the combination of non-reach-out symbols is stopped and displayed on each effective line L1 to L5, and the state suggestion region 43 is displayed. The blue color is stopped and displayed.

In the case of a time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) that does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode, each effective line L1 to L5 of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is combined with a non-reach off symbol. Is stopped and displayed. Then, the combination of the non-reach out-of-reach symbols is stopped and displayed even when the result of the hit / miss determination process is the out-of-reach result.

FIG. 27 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop result of the second special figure display unit 37b and the symbol display device 41 when the result of the hit / fail determination process is missed in the game round triggered by the second hold information. Is. As shown in FIG. 27 (c2), “−”, which is a stop result corresponding to the disengagement result, is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 37b. Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (c1), in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, the combination of non-reach-out symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5, and the state suggestion region 43 is displayed. The red color is stopped and displayed.

The display area of the symbol display device 41 is wider than the display area of the special symbol display units 37a and 37b, and the symbol display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA, whereas the special symbol display units 37a and 37b Is arranged on the corner side of the game area PA, so that the symbol display device 41 attracts more attention from the player than the special figure display units 37a and 37b. Further, while the symbol display device 41 executes a wide variety of effects such as reach display, the special symbol display units 37a and 37b perform variable display of the symbol in a certain mode as described above to correspond to the game result. Since only the stop result is displayed, the symbol display device 41 attracts more attention from the player than the special figure display units 37a and 37b from this point as well. In such a situation, if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode, the result deviates from each effective line L1 to L5 of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. By stopping and displaying the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols that can be stopped and displayed in the case of, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the time saving result is invalidated even though it is selected. Become.

In the case of a time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) that does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode, the hit / fail determination process is performed on each effective line L1 to L5 of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 as described above. Even if the result is an out-of-reach result, even if the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols that is stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed, a stop result different from the case where the result of the hit / fail determination process is an out-of-reach result is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. Stop is displayed. That is, in the case of FIGS. 27 (b) and 27 (c), if the first time saving result does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode, the state is as shown in FIG. 27 (b). While the blue color is stopped and displayed in the suggestion area 43, the red color is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43 as shown in FIG. 27 (c) when the result is out of alignment. Further, in the case of the second time saving result that does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode, the green color is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43, whereas in the case of the off result, the state suggestion area 43 Red is stopped and displayed. As a result, in a situation where it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to visually recognize the special symbol display units 37a and 37b, the combination of non-reach-out symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41. In this case, by checking the state suggestion region 43, it is possible to grasp whether the result is a time saving result or an out-of-time result.

Whether it is the first time saving result that does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode or the second time result that does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode, symbol columns Z1 to Even if the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols is stopped and displayed on each effective line L1 to L5 of Z3, the stop result different from the case of the first time saving result and the case of the second time saving result is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. Stop is displayed. That is, in the case of the first time saving result that does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode, the blue color is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43, whereas the trigger for setting the second high frequency support mode is If it is the second time saving result, the green color is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43. As a result, in a situation where it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to visually recognize the special symbol display units 37a and 37b, the combination of non-reach-out symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41. In that case, by checking the state suggestion region 43, not only whether it is a time saving result or an outlier result, but also whether it is a time saving result or a second time saving result if it is a time saving result. It becomes possible to grasp.

The processing configuration that enables the display of the stop result in the symbol display device 41 as described above will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern determination process executed by the sound light side MPU 93. The variation pattern determination process is executed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 82.

When the type command received this time has information indicating that the game times to be started this time correspond to the jackpot result (step S1401: YES), the stop symbol determination process for the jackpot result is executed. (Step S1402). In the stop symbol determination process for the jackpot result, a combination of stop symbols corresponding to the type of the jackpot result this time is selected as the stop result to be stopped and displayed on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. The relationship between the type of jackpot result and the combination of stop symbols is as shown in FIG. Further, in the stop symbol determination process for the jackpot result, the effective lines L1 to L5 for stopping and displaying the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the type of the jackpot result this time are determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion region 43 of the symbol display device 41 (step S1403).

When the type command received this time is set with information indicating that the game times to be started this time correspond to the time saving result (step S1404: YES), the current game state is the high probability state and the time saving. When it is not in the state (step S1405 and step S1406: NO), or when the current game state is the final game round of the time-saving state even if it is in the time-saving state (step S1406 and step S1407: YES), it is for suggesting time-saving. The stop symbol determination process of (step S1408) is executed. The sound light side MPU 93 can specify whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, a high probability state, or a time saving state by a state specification command received from the main side MPU 82, and further corresponds to the start of the time saving state. It is possible to specify whether or not the game is the final game in a time-saving state by the number of times the variable command is received after the state specification command is received.

In the stop symbol determination process for suggesting a time reduction, a combination of stop symbols corresponding to the type of the time reduction result this time is selected as the stop result to be stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, if it is the first time reduction result, the combination of the first time reduction occurrence symbols ("1 ・ 2 ・ 3") is selected, and if it is the second time reduction result, the combination of the second time reduction occurrence symbols ("3. 4.1 ") is selected. Further, in the stop symbol determination process for suggesting the time reduction, the effective lines L1 to L5 for stopping and displaying the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the type of the time reduction result of this time are determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion region 43 of the symbol display device 41 (step S1409).

On the other hand, when the type command received this time is set with information indicating that the game times to be started this time correspond to the time saving result (step S1404: YES), the current game state is When there is a high probability state (step S1405: YES), or when the current gaming state is a time-saving state and not the final game round of the time-saving state (step S1406: YES, step S1407: NO), for non-reach off The stop symbol determination process of (step S1410) is executed. In the stop symbol determination process for non-reach loss, as the stop result of displaying the stop on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result and the combination of the first time reduction occurrence symbols ("1.2"・ 3 ”), the combination of the second time-saving symbols (“3.4.1”) and the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols, which is a combination of symbols other than the out-of-reach symbol combination, will be stopped and displayed by lottery. decide.

After that, when the type command received this time is set with information indicating that the game times to be started this time correspond to the first time saving result (step S1411: YES), the symbol display device 41 Blue is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion region 43 (step S1412). Further, when the type command received this time is set with information indicating that the game times to be started this time correspond to the second time saving result (step S1411: NO), the symbol display device 41 Green is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion region 43 (step S1413).

When the type command received this time is set with information indicating that the game times to be started this time correspond to the deviation result (step S1404: NO), the stop symbol determination process for the deviation result is executed. (Step S1414). In the stop symbol determination process for the deviation result, when the information of the variation display period indicating that the game times to be started this time corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display is set in the variation command received this time. As a stop result of stopping and displaying the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, effective lines L1 to L5 for determining the combination of the out-reach symbols by lottery and stopping and displaying the determined combination of the out-reach symbols are provided. It will be decided by lottery. In addition, in the stop symbol determination process for the deviation result, the information of the variation display period indicating that the game times to be started this time does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach display is set in the variation command received this time. If so, the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, the combination of the first time-saving symbols ("1 ・ 2 ・ 3"), the combination of the second time-saving symbols ("3.4.1") and the missed reach The stop result in which the combination of symbols other than the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed is determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion region 43 of the symbol display device 41 (step S1415).

When the process of step S1403, the process of step S1409, the process of step S1412, the process of step S1413, or the process of step S1415 is executed, the variation pattern determination process is executed (step S1416). In the variation pattern determination process, first, the presence / absence of execution of the notice display and, if the notice display is executed, the notice lottery process for determining the type is executed. Then, as a result of the advance notice lottery process, a variation pattern corresponding to the stop result determined in steps S1401 to S1415 and the variation display period information included in the variation command received this time is selected, and the selected variation pattern is used. The corresponding variation pattern table is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. The sound light side MPU 93 controls the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read variation pattern table, so that the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 execute the effect of the variation pattern corresponding to the current game times. ..

After that, the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in step S1416 is transmitted to the display side MPU 103 (step S1417). The display side MPU 1417 reads the display control table corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105. By controlling the symbol display device 41 according to the read display control table, the display side MPU 103 causes the symbol display device 41 to execute a display effect of a variation pattern corresponding to the current game times. In this case, in the game round, the stop result of displaying the stop display in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 and the stop result of displaying the stop display in the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 are the variation pattern determination process (FIG. 28). The stop result is determined in steps S1401 to S1415 in the above.

<Subtraction process of ceiling counter 131>
Next, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 executed in step S1011 of the process during determination of the special figure (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1501). Then, when "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S1501: YES), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S1502. That is, in the game times executed in the high probability mode, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted, so that the ceiling time is shortened. Nor.

Here, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133 as described above. As a result, in the final game round in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. When the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0", the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0". Become. When the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is executed at that timing, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted because the high probability flag is still set to "1". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being executed in the game times in which the hit / fail determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode. Further, in the process of determining the special figure (FIG. 22), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24). It can be realized by setting.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag (step S1501: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S1502). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S1502: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S1503. As already explained, the process of setting information in the ceiling counter 131 is a situation in which none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation", and "setting confirmation operation" is executed, and the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state. Step S114 when the supply of the operating power is started in a certain situation, step S122 when the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs when the supply of the operating power is started, and the open / close execution mode are started. Only in step S1005 in the case, after the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0", the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" unless any of the above processes is executed. On the other hand, the ceiling time reduction occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented by 1 and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" in a situation where the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more. In this case, if the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" as described above (step S1502: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S1503. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0", and a time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs, and the game times of the number of times of the time saving continuation are digested without the big hit result occurring in the time saving state. When the time reduction state ends and the game state becomes the normal game state, the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction does not occur even if the digestion of the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur is repeated thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessive time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S1502: YES), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 (step S1503), and whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the 1 subtraction is "0". (Step S1504). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S1504: YES), the main side is provided that "1" is not set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1505: NO). “1” is set in the second high frequency flag of the RAM 84 (step S1506), and information of “100”, which is the number of continuations of the first time reduction, is set in the time reduction state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 (step S1507). As a result, the time is shortened, which is the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode. In addition, the time saving state ends when the number of game times executed without a jackpot result reaches 100 times, which is the first time saving continuation number, and is a normal game which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode. It becomes a state.

After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S1508). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time saving state has been started is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The status specification command also includes information on the number of times of the first time reduction continuation set this time. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the sound / light side MPU 93 performs a process for causing the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time saving state is started. Execute.

On the other hand, even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0", if "1" is set in the second high frequency flag, the processes of steps S1506 to S1508 are not executed. The ceiling time reduction this time is invalidated without setting the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction. That is, even if the digestion of the game times of the fixed number of ceilings is completed in the situation where the time is shortened, the ceiling time is invalidated without setting the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time. This makes it possible to prevent additional settings for shifting to the high-frequency support mode from being executed in the middle of the high-frequency support mode. The first high-frequency support mode is set only within the range until 100 game times are exhausted after the open / close execution mode, whereas the fixed ceiling number of 500 times is set when the open / close execution mode is started. Is set, so that the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 does not become "0" in the situation of the first high frequency support mode.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1505 or the process of step S1508 is executed, the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1509). As a result, when the ceiling time reduction occurs, the reach high frequency state ends regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode is set triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

<Subtraction process of time saving state counter 134>
Next, the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 executed in step S1008 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1601). When "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S1601: YES), the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 is terminated without executing the processes after step S1602. In the high-probability state, the support mode becomes the first high-frequency support mode, but since the end trigger of the high-probability state is specified by using the high-probability state counter 133 as already explained, the high-probability flag is set to "1". If is set, the process for subtracting the value of the time saving state counter 134 is not executed.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag and "1" is set in the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1602: YES), that is, the time is shortened. In the case of a state, the value of the time saving state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 (step S1603), and when the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1604: YES), the main Both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the side RAM 84 are cleared to "0" (step S1605). As a result, in the case of the first high-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode ends and becomes the low-frequency support mode, and in the case of the second high-frequency support mode, the second high-frequency support is supported. The mode ends and becomes the low frequency support mode. That is, the time saving state ends and the normal game state is set.

After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S1606). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has ended is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. Upon receiving the state designation command, the sound / light side MPU 93 ends the execution of the effect corresponding to the time saving state in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and produces an effect corresponding to the normal gaming state. Let's get started.

Here, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), as already described, the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 is executed before the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25), and the time saving state counter 134 is subtracted. The subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 (FIG. 30) is executed before the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29). Further, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), as already described, the setting process (FIG. 25) for the time saving result is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131. The operation of setting the execution order of such processing will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 31 (a) shows the period during which the game round is executed, FIG. 31 (b) shows the period during which the time saving state is executed, and FIG. 31 (c) shows the subtraction of the time saving state counter 134 (step S1603). 31 (d) shows the timing at which the time saving state setting (steps S1305 to step S1308) is executed triggered by the time saving result, and FIG. 31 (e) shows the subtraction of the ceiling counter 131 (step S1503). ) Is executed.

First, a case will be described in which the result of the winning / failing determination process becomes the time saving result and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes “0” in the final game round in the time saving state.

In the situation where the time is shortened as shown in FIG. 31 (b), the game round is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 31 (a). Then, as the variable display period of the game times elapses, the stop result corresponding to the game result is generated on the side of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b that is the execution target of the game times. Along with the confirmation display, the stop result corresponding to the game result is confirmed and displayed on the symbol display device 41. When the final stop period elapses with these stop results confirmed and displayed, the processes after step S1002 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22) are executed. In this case, since the game result of the game times is not a jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S1002 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), and the processes after step S1008 are executed.

In the processes after step S1008, first, the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 is executed. Since this time is the game times executed in the time saving state, the time saving state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 31 (c) at the timing of t2, which is the timing at which the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 is being executed. The value of is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the time saving state counter 134 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 are cleared to "0", so that the timing of t2 As shown in FIG. 31 (b), the current time saving state ends and the normal gaming state, which is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, is established.

After that, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the setting process (FIG. 25) for the time saving result in which the execution order of the processes is set later than the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 is executed. do. Since the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail judgment process this time, the time saving result of this time is displayed at the timing of t3, which is the timing during execution of the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25), as shown in FIG. 31 (d). The time saving state is set as an opportunity. Therefore, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 31B, the gaming state becomes the time saving state in which the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are set. Further, since the time saving result this time is the second time saving result, the information of "150" which is the second time saving continuation number is set in the time saving state counter 134.

After that, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 in which the execution order of the processes is set later than the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed. .. As shown in FIG. 31 (e), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 at the timing of t4, which is the timing during execution of the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131, and the ceiling counter 131 after the subtraction of 1 is subtracted. The value becomes "0". That is, the ceiling time is shortened. However, as already explained, the result of the hit / fail determination process in this game round is the time saving result, and the time saving state is already set at the timing of t3 in this game round, triggered by the time saving result. Therefore, the ceiling time reduction that occurred this time is invalidated. After that, at the timing of t5, this game round ends as shown in FIG. 31 (a).

As described above, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the setting process (FIG. 25) for the time saving result is set in the order in which the execution order of the processes is later than the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134. As a result, even if the result of the hit / fail determination process is a time-saving result in a game time other than the final game time in the time-saving state, the second high-frequency support mode is not set triggered by the time-saving result. When the result of the winning / failing determination process is the time saving result in the final game round in the time saving state, it is possible to set the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result. As a result, by preventing the time saving state from being newly set in the middle of the time saving state, the time saving state is prevented from continuing excessively, and the time saving result in the final game round of the time saving state is triggered. By making the setting of the time saving state set to be effective, it is possible to give the player the benefit of selecting the time saving result in the hit / fail determination process as much as possible. In addition, such an excellent effect can be produced by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

As described above, in the game times other than the final game time in the time saving state, even if the result of the hit / fail judgment process is the time saving result, the second high frequency support mode is not set triggered by the time saving result. However, in the final game round in the time-saving state, if the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time-saving result, the second high-frequency support mode is set with the time-saving result as an opportunity. As shown, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, when the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time reduction result in the game times other than the final game times in the time saving state, the non-reach out-of-reach symbols are placed on the respective effective lines L1 to L5. When the combination is stopped and displayed and the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time saving result in the final game round in the time saving state, the time saving occurrence symbol combination (the first time saving occurrence symbol combination or the combination of the time saving occurrence symbols is performed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. The second time saving occurrence symbol combination) is stopped and displayed. As a result, the stop result in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 can be set as a stop result corresponding to whether or not the time reduction result triggers the setting of the time reduction state.

In particular, the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols that is stopped and displayed when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is the time-saving result in the game rounds other than the final game round in the time-saving state is stopped when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is the missed result. It is a combination of displayed symbols. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the second high-frequency support mode is not set triggered by the time-saving result, although the time-saving result is obtained.

Although the time saving result is obtained as described above, when the second high frequency support mode is not set triggered by the time saving result, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 display a stop when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is incorrect. Even if the stop result is displayed, the special figure display units 37a and 37b stop and display the pattern corresponding to the time saving result. As a result, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm whether or not the time saving result has occurred regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode has been set.

Although the time saving result is obtained as described above, when the second high frequency support mode is not set triggered by the time saving result, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 display a stop when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is incorrect. Even if the stop result is displayed, the stop result different from the case where the result of the hit / fail determination process is out of order is displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41. As a result, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm whether or not the time saving result has occurred regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode has been set.

In the process during determination of the special figure (FIG. 22), the setting process (FIG. 25) for the time saving result is set in the order in which the execution order of the process is earlier than the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131. When the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 is "0" in the game times when the result of the determination process is the time saving result, the time saving result is compared with the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving. It is possible to prioritize the setting of the second high-frequency support mode as an opportunity. The number of time reduction continuations in the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction is fixed at 100 times, while the number of time reduction continuations in the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction result is the first time reduction result. If there is, it is 100 times, and if it is the second time saving result, it is 150 times. That is, the number of time reduction continuations in the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction result is equal to or greater than the number of time reduction continuations in the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction. In this case, as described above, the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result is prioritized over the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction, so that the result of the hit / fail determination process is obtained. When the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 is set to "0" in the game times resulting in the time reduction, it is possible to prevent the setting mode of the time reduction continuation number from becoming disadvantageous to the player. In addition, such an excellent effect can be produced by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

Next, a case will be described in which the result of the hit / miss determination process is out of order and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is “0” in the final game round in the time saving state.

In the situation where the time is shortened as shown in FIG. 31 (b), the game round is started at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 31 (a). Then, as the variable display period of the game times elapses, the stop result corresponding to the game result is generated on the side of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b that is the execution target of the game times. Along with the confirmation display, the stop result corresponding to the game result is confirmed and displayed on the symbol display device 41. When the final stop period elapses with these stop results confirmed and displayed, the processes after step S1002 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22) are executed. In this case, since the game result of the game times is not a jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S1002 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), and the processes after step S1008 are executed.

In the processes after step S1008, first, the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 is executed. Since this time is the game times executed in the time saving state, the time saving state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 31 (c) at the timing of t7, which is the timing during which the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 is being executed. The value of is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the time saving state counter 134 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 are cleared to "0", so that the timing of t7 As shown in FIG. 31 (b), the time saving state ends and the normal game state, which is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, is set. After that, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the setting process (FIG. 25) for the time saving result in which the execution order of the processes is set later than the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 is executed. However, in this game round, the result of the hit / fail judgment process is a wrong result, so the time saving state is not set in the setting process.

After that, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 whose execution order is set to be later than the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 is executed. do. As shown in FIG. 31 (e), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 at the timing of t8, which is the timing during execution of the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131, and the ceiling counter 131 after the subtraction of 1 is subtracted. The value becomes "0". That is, the ceiling time is shortened. Then, by setting the time saving state triggered by the occurrence of the ceiling time saving, the gaming state is the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 31B at the timing of the t8. It will be in a short time state. Further, since the ceiling time is shortened, the information of "100" which is the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134. After that, at the timing of t9, this game round ends as shown in FIG. 31 (a).

As described above, in the process during determination of the special figure (FIG. 22), the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is set in the order of execution of the process after the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134. As a result, even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction 1 is set to "0" in the game times other than the final game time in the time saving state, the second high frequency support mode is set with the ceiling time saving as a trigger. If the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction 1 becomes "0" in the final game round in the time saving state, the second high frequency support mode is set with the ceiling time saving as a trigger. It becomes possible to. As a result, the ceiling time reduction occurs in the final game round of the time reduction state while preventing the time reduction state from being newly set in the middle of the time reduction state so that the time reduction state does not continue excessively. By making the setting of the time saving state triggered by the above, it becomes possible to give the player the benefit of the ceiling time saving as much as possible. In addition, such an excellent effect can be produced by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

<Subtraction processing of variable selection state counter 132>
Next, the subtraction process of the variation selection state counter 132 executed in step S1009 of the process during determination of the special figure (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1701). When "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S1701: YES), the subtraction process of the variable selection state counter 132 is terminated without executing the processes after step S1702.

As already explained, if the game times of the period switching reference number are exhausted in the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the table group for high reach frequency is referred to in the low frequency support mode. Reach becomes a high frequency state. Then, in the high reach state, as already explained, there is a high probability that the reach display is selected when the result is out of the situation in which the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are used and the reach is not in the high frequency state. In addition, the variable display period when the reach display is selected tends to be longer than the situation in which the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are used and the reach is not in the high frequency state. Further, the period switching reference number of times is a predetermined number of times (specifically, 50 times) less than the number of times of the fixed ceiling. Therefore, it is possible to generate the reach high frequency state before the second high frequency support mode is generated due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction. The variable selection state counter 132 is a counter for measuring the game times of the remaining period switching reference number of times. In this case, as described above, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted in the high probability state, and the ceiling time reduction does not occur in the high probability state. Therefore, when the high probability flag is set to "1", the process for subtracting the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is not executed.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag (step S1701: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 is 1 or more (step S1702). When the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is "0" (step S1702: NO), the subtraction process of the variable selection state counter 132 is terminated without executing the processes after step S1703. The process of setting information in the variable selection state counter 132 is only step S1006 when the open / close execution mode is started as described above, and after the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes “0”, step S1006 The value of the variable selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0" unless the process of is executed. On the other hand, in the high reach high frequency state, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted by 1 in the situation where the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more, and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes “0”. Occurs when. In this case, if the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is "0" as described above (step S1702: NO), the subtraction process of the variable selection state counter 132 is performed without executing the processes after step S1703. finish. As a result, the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 after 1 subtraction becomes "0" and the reach high frequency state occurs, and when the reach high frequency state ends, the digestion of the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur is repeated. Even if it does, the high reach condition does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the high reach state from occurring excessively.

Further, as already explained, the period switching reference number is set to a predetermined number (specifically, 50 times) less than the fixed ceiling number, so that before the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction. However, if the ceiling time is shortened once, the jackpot result does not occur after that, even if the digestion of the game times is repeated. In this case, when the high-reach state ends as described above, the jackpot result does not occur after that. Even if the digestion of the game times is repeated, the high-reach state does not occur, so that the ceiling time can be shortened. It is possible to prevent a high-reach state from occurring in a situation where it does not occur.

When the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more (step S1702: YES), the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted by 1 (step S1703), and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 after the 1 subtraction is ". It is determined whether or not it is "0" (step S1704). When the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is “0” (step S1704: YES), “1” is set in the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1705).

When "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" by subtracting 1 by the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131, and the reach high frequency in step S1509. It is released by executing the process of clearing the status flag "0". That is, the state in which "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag is canceled regardless of whether or not the time reduction state is set triggered by the ceiling time reduction when the ceiling time reduction occurs.

Here, the process of step S1705 is executed even in the time saving state. On the other hand, in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 21), the main side is prior to the process of step S905 for determining whether or not the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1". Since the process of step S903 for determining whether or not "1" is set in either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the RAM 84 is executed, "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag. Even if it is set, when selecting the variable display period of the game times, the selection mode of the variable display period in the short time state has priority over the selection mode of the variable display period in the high reach state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation where the digestion efficiency of the game times is high in the time saving state from being hindered by setting "1" in the reach high frequency state flag.

On the other hand, even in the time saving state, the state in which "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag and "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag is maintained. Therefore, if the time saving state ends before the opportunity to clear the reach high frequency state flag "0" occurs, the reach high frequency state can be generated from that point.

After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S1706). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 are provided with an effect indicating that the reach high frequency state is started on condition that the time saving state is not obtained. Executes the process to be executed. Further, when the sound light side MPU 93 receives the above state designation command in the time saving state, if the time saving state ends before the game times of the period switching reference number are exhausted, the reach high frequency state is started. A process is executed so that the effect shown is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

Next, the relationship between the high reach frequency state and the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 33. FIG. 33 (a) shows a period in which the opening / closing execution mode is performed, FIG. 33 (b) shows a period in which the high probability state (high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode) is performed, and FIG. 33 (c) shows a time saving state. (Low probability mode, first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode) is shown, FIG. 33 (d) shows the state of the variable selection state counter 132, and FIG. 33 (e) shows the reach. The period in which the frequency is high is shown, and FIG. 33 (f) shows the state of the ceiling counter 131.

First, a case where the reach high frequency state is reached at the timing when the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 becomes “0” will be described.

When the game round that gives a 5R high accuracy result ends at the timing of t1, the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 33 (a). In this case, at the timing of t1, the variable selection state counter 132 is set with information of 450 times, which is the period switching reference number, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), and the ceiling is set as shown in FIG. 33 (f). Information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the counter 131.

After that, when the open / close execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 33 (a) at the timing of t2, the high-probability mode and the first high-probability support mode, which are the high-probability mode, are set as shown in FIG. 33 (b). .. In the high probability state, the game times are repeatedly executed, but in the high probability state, even if the game times are repeatedly executed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (f). As shown in 33 (d), the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is not subtracted.

After that, when the digestion of the game times of the high probability continuation number in the high probability state is completed at the timing of t3, the high probability state ends as shown in FIG. 33 (b), and the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are completed. It becomes a normal game state. Each time the game times are digested in the normal game state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (f), and the variable selection state counter 132 is shown in FIG. 33 (d). The value of is subtracted.

After that, when the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process at the timing of t4, the time saving state is started as shown in FIG. 33 (c). In the time saving state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (f) and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (d) each time the game is digested. Will be done.

After that, when the digestion of the game times of the number of times of continuous time reduction is completed at the timing of t5, the time reduction state ends and the normal game state is established as shown in FIG. 33 (c). In the normal game state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (f) and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is changed as shown in FIG. 33 (d) each time the game times are digested. It is subtracted.

After that, at the timing of t6, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes “0” as shown in FIG. 33 (d). At the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the time is not shortened. Therefore, at the timing of t6, the reach high frequency state is reached as shown in FIG. 33 (e). In the high reach state, as already explained, the probability that the reach display is selected is higher when the result is out of the normal game state and the result is different from the situation where the reach high frequency state is not, and when the reach display is selected. The variable display period in is also likely to be longer than in the normal gaming state and not in the reach high frequency state.

After that, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes “0” as shown in FIG. 33 (f) at the timing of t7, which is a high reach frequency state. At the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the time is not shortened. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the time is shortened as shown in FIG. 33 (c). Further, at the timing of t7, the high reach frequency state ends as shown in FIG. 33 (e). In the time-saving state, it becomes easy to select a short period as the variable display period of the game times, so that the digestion efficiency of the game times becomes high.

After that, when the digestion of the game times of the number of times of continuous time reduction is completed at the timing of t8, the time reduction state ends and the normal game state is established as shown in FIG. 33 (c). In this case, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" without resetting the value to the ceiling counter 131 as shown in FIG. 33 (f) at the timing of the t8. Further, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0" without resetting the value to the variable selection state counter 132.

Next, a case where the setting of the reach high frequency state is delayed due to the time saving state at the timing when the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 becomes “0” will be described.

When the game round that gives a 5R low probability result ends at the timing of t9, the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 33 (a). In this case, at the timing of t9, information of 450 times, which is the period switching reference number, is set in the variable selection state counter 132 as shown in FIG. 33 (d), and the ceiling is set as shown in FIG. 33 (f). Information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the counter 131.

After that, when the opening / closing execution mode is terminated as shown in FIG. 33 (a) at the timing of t10, the time saving state of the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode is set as shown in FIG. 33 (c). In the time saving state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (f) and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (d) each time the game is digested. Will be done.

After that, when the digestion of the game times of the number of times of continuous time reduction is completed at the timing of t11, the time reduction state ends and the normal game state is established as shown in FIG. 33 (c). In the normal game state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (f) and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is changed as shown in FIG. 33 (d) each time the game times are digested. It is subtracted.

After that, when the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process at the timing of t12, the time saving state is started as shown in FIG. 33 (c). In the time saving state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (f) and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (d) each time the game is digested. Will be done.

After that, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes “0” as shown in FIG. 33 (d) at the timing of t13, which is the time saving state. At the timing of t13, the time is shortened as shown in FIG. 33 (c). Therefore, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 33 (e), the reach high frequency state does not occur. However, "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84, and the state in which "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag is maintained. In this case, the time saving state is continued, and in the time saving state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted each time the game round is digested, as shown in FIG. 33 (f).

After that, when the digestion of the game times of the number of times of continuous time reduction is completed at the timing of t14, the time reduction state ends and the normal game state is established as shown in FIG. 33 (c). However, since "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84, the reach high frequency state is set at the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 33 (e). In the high reach state, as already explained, the probability that the reach display is selected is higher when the result is out of the normal game state and the result is different from the situation where the reach high frequency state is not, and when the reach display is selected. The variable display period in is also likely to be longer than in the normal gaming state and not in the reach high frequency state.

After that, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes “0” as shown in FIG. 33 (f) at the timing of t15, which is a high reach frequency state. At the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the time is not shortened. Therefore, at the timing of t15, the time is shortened as shown in FIG. 33 (c). Further, at the timing of t15, the high reach frequency state ends as shown in FIG. 33 (e). In the time-saving state, it becomes easy to select a short period as the variable display period of the game times, so that the digestion efficiency of the game times becomes high.

After that, when the digestion of the game times of the number of times of continuous time reduction is completed at the timing of t16, the time reduction state ends and the normal game state is established as shown in FIG. 33 (c). In this case, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" without resetting the value to the ceiling counter 131 as shown in FIG. 33 (f) at the timing of the t16. Further, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0" without resetting the value to the variable selection state counter 132.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Even if a time reduction result or ceiling time reduction occurs in the time reduction state (excluding the final game round), the time reduction state is not set triggered by these time reduction results or ceiling time reduction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from being newly set in the middle of the time saving state, and it is possible to prevent the time saving state from continuing excessively.

In the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is set in the order in which the processing is executed later than the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134. Even if the result of the hit / fail judgment process is the time-saving result in the game times other than the final game time in the time-saving state, the second high-frequency support mode is not set triggered by the time-saving result, and the time-saving state is set. When the result of the hit / fail determination process is a time-saving result in the final game round, it is possible to set the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result. As a result, by preventing the time saving state from being newly set in the middle of the time saving state, the time saving state is prevented from continuing excessively, and the time saving result in the final game round of the time saving state is triggered. By making the setting of the time saving state set to be effective, it is possible to give the player the benefit of selecting the time saving result in the hit / fail determination process as much as possible. In addition, such an excellent effect can be produced by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

In the game times other than the final game times in the time-saving state, even if the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time-saving result, the time-saving state is set while preventing the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result. In the final game round of the above, when the result of the hit / fail determination process is a time saving result, the second high frequency support mode is set with the time saving result as a trigger, and the symbol of the symbol display device 41 is set. In rows Z1 to Z3, when the result of the hit / fail determination process is a time-saving result in a game time other than the final game time in the time-saving state, the combination of non-reach off symbols is stopped and displayed on each effective line L1 to L5 to stop and display the time-saving state. If the result of the hit / fail determination process is a time-saving result in the final game round, a combination of time-saving symbols on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (combination of first time-saving symbols or combination of second time-saving symbols). Is stopped and displayed. As a result, the stop result in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 can be set as a stop result corresponding to whether or not the time reduction result triggers the setting of the time reduction state.

In particular, the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols that is stopped and displayed when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is the time-saving result in the game rounds other than the final game round in the time-saving state is stopped when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is the missed result. It is a combination of displayed symbols. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the second high-frequency support mode is not set triggered by the time-saving result, although the time-saving result is obtained.

Although the time reduction result is obtained, when the second high frequency support mode is not set triggered by the time reduction result, the stop result is stopped and displayed when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is incorrect in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Is displayed, the special figure display units 37a and 37b stop and display the pattern corresponding to the time saving result. As a result, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm whether or not the time saving result has occurred regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode has been set.

Although the time reduction result is obtained, when the second high frequency support mode is not set triggered by the time reduction result, the stop result is stopped and displayed when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is incorrect in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Is displayed, in the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41, a stop result different from the case where the result of the hit / fail determination process is out of order is displayed. As a result, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm whether or not the time saving result has occurred regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode has been set.

If the time saving result is obtained but the second high frequency support mode is not set triggered by the time saving result, the symbol sequence Z1 to regardless of whether the time saving result is the first time saving result or the second time saving result. In Z3, the stop result that is stopped and displayed when the result of the hit / fail determination process is out of order is displayed. This makes it possible not only to make it inconspicuous that the time saving result was invalidated, but also that the relatively favorable second time saving result was invalidated. ..

If the time saving result is obtained but the second high frequency support mode is not set triggered by the time saving result, the symbol sequence Z1 to regardless of whether the time saving result is the first time saving result or the second time saving result. In Z3, in the configuration in which the stop result is displayed when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is out of order, the special figure display units 37a and 37b display the patterns corresponding to the first time reduction result and the second time reduction result, respectively. Stop is displayed. As a result, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm whether or not each of the first time saving result and the second time saving result has occurred regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode has been set. Will be.

If the time saving result is obtained but the second high frequency support mode is not set triggered by the time saving result, the symbol sequence Z1 to regardless of whether the time saving result is the first time saving result or the second time saving result. In Z3, in the configuration in which the stop result is displayed when the result of the hit / fail determination process is out of order, the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 corresponds to the first time reduction result and the second time reduction result, respectively. The stop result is displayed. As a result, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm whether or not each of the first time saving result and the second time saving result has occurred regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode has been set. Will be.

In the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is set in a later order than the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134. Even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction 1 is set to "0" in the game times other than the final game time in the time saving state, the second high frequency support mode is not set with the ceiling time saving as a trigger. However, when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 in the final game in the time saving state becomes "0", the second high frequency support mode is set with the ceiling time saving as a trigger. Is possible. As a result, the ceiling time reduction occurs in the final game round of the time reduction state while preventing the time reduction state from being newly set in the middle of the time reduction state so that the time reduction state does not continue excessively. By making the setting of the time saving state triggered by the above, it becomes possible to give the player the benefit of the ceiling time saving as much as possible. In addition, such an excellent effect can be produced by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

If a time reduction result or ceiling time reduction occurs in the final game round in the time reduction state, the time reduction state triggered by the time reduction result or ceiling time reduction is started following the end of the current time reduction state. The total number of times the game times are executed is larger than the number of times the game times in the time-saving state are executed when the time-saving state is started from the normal game state. As a result, if a time reduction result or ceiling time reduction occurs in the final game in the time reduction state, the time reduction state triggered by the time reduction result or ceiling time reduction is started following the end of the current time reduction state. It is possible to increase the advantage of what has been done.

In the process during determination of the special figure (FIG. 22), the setting process (FIG. 25) for the time saving result is set in the order in which the execution order of the process is earlier than the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131. When the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 is "0" in the game times when the result of the determination process is the time saving result, the time saving result is compared with the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving. It is possible to prioritize the setting of the second high-frequency support mode as an opportunity. The number of time reduction continuations in the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction is fixed at 100 times, while the number of time reduction continuations in the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction result is the first time reduction result. If there is, it is 100 times, and if it is the second time saving result, it is 150 times. That is, the number of time reduction continuations in the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction result is equal to or greater than the number of time reduction continuations in the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction. In this case, as described above, the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result is prioritized over the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction, so that the result of the hit / fail determination process is obtained. When the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 is set to "0" in the game times resulting in the time reduction, it is possible to prevent the setting mode of the time reduction continuation number from becoming disadvantageous to the player. In addition, such an excellent effect can be produced by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

In the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the setting process (FIG. 25) for the time saving result is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. As a result, in the final game round in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. When the value of the high-probability state counter 133 becomes "0", the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed before the high-probability flag and the first high-frequency flag are cleared to "0". Become. Then, when the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed at that timing, the high probability flag is still set to "1", so that the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is set. Is not done. Therefore, in the game times in which the hit / fail determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time saving result. Further, in the process of determining the special figure (FIG. 22), such an effect is executed in the process of executing the setting process (FIG. 25) for the time saving result before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. It can be realized by setting.

In the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. As a result, in the final game round in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. When the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0", the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0". Become. When the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is executed at that timing, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted because the high probability flag is still set to "1". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being executed in the game times in which the hit / fail determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode. Further, in the process of determining the special figure (FIG. 22), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24). It can be realized by setting.

In the high probability state, not only the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving does not occur, but also the process itself for subtracting 1 from the ceiling counter 131 is not executed. As a result, it is possible to exclude the number of times the game is executed in the high probability state, which is advantageous for the player, from the number of times the game is executed to be subtracted from the value of the ceiling counter 131.

The value of the ceiling counter 131 is not set in either case of shifting to the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction or the end of the time reduction state. Further, the transition to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving is the value of the ceiling counter 131 as a result of the game times being digested and the value of the ceiling counter 131 being subtracted in the situation where the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more. Occurs when becomes "0". Therefore, the transition to the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs only once after the jackpot result occurs, and basically after the transition to the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs once. Unless the jackpot result occurs and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is set, the transition to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessive shift to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving.

Even if the set value update process (step S117) is executed, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not executed, and the ceiling count is newly set including the information on the fixed ceiling count. do not have. As a result, even if the set value update process (step S117) is executed, the remaining number of ceilings can be maintained.

Even if the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not executed, and the ceiling count is not newly set including the information on the fixed ceiling count. .. As a result, even if the RAM clearing process (step S119) is executed, the remaining number of ceilings can be maintained.

Even if the set value update process (step S117) is executed, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not executed, and the number of ceilings is new including the information on the fixed number of ceilings. No settings are made. Therefore, even if the set value update process (step S117) is executed in order to cancel the game stop state due to the information abnormality when the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the information of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained as it is. .. On the other hand, when it is specified that an information abnormality in the main RAM 84 has occurred and the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", the ceiling counter 131 has a fixed number of ceilings of 500 times. Information is set. As a result, even if the information of the ceiling counter 131 is rewritten when an information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the information of the ceiling counter 131 can be reset to the information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings. It becomes.

When the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84. When such a process is executed, the setting confirmation process (step S112), the set value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear in the process at the start of supplying the operating power (steps S101 to S126). This is a situation in which the process (step S119) is not executed. Further, in the game hall, with the main power supply for supplying operating power to each pachinko machine 10 turned off, the power switch provided in the power supply / launch control device 78 of each pachinko machine 10 is turned on in advance. When it is time to start business on the 1st, the main power is turned on so that the pachinko machines 10 are activated all at once. Under such circumstances, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112), the set value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear process (step S119) are not executed, the gaming machine main body 12 is intentionally opened to reduce the operating power. When the supply is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131 at the start of supply of operating power as a situation different from that at the start of normal business, and also to confirm the setting. The processing (step S112), the set value updating processing (step S117), and the RAM clearing processing (step S119) can be generated without being involved.

When the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the open / close execution mode is started, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131. In the case of a configuration in which the fixed ceiling count is set in the ceiling counter 131 during the open / close execution mode or when the open / close execution mode ends, instead of when the open / close execution mode is started, the operation is performed after the open / close execution mode is started. If a fraudulent act is performed so that the set value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the power supply is stopped and the operating power supply is restarted, the set value update process (step S117) is performed. In step S117) or the RAM clearing process (step S119), the information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress is cleared as described above, whereas the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained, so that the operating power is supplied. While gaining the benefit of the open / close execution mode until is stopped, there is a risk that the game will be restarted in a situation where the number of remaining ceilings is small. On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be neutralized.

When the game times of the period switching reference number are exhausted in the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, in the low frequency support mode, the table group for high reach frequency is referred to. It becomes a state. Then, in the high-reach state, the probability that the reach display is selected is higher when the result is out of the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode than in the non-high-reach state, and the reach is high. The variable display period when the display is selected is also likely to be longer in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode than in the non-reach high frequency state. Further, the period switching reference number of times is a predetermined number of times (specifically, 50 times) less than the number of times of the fixed ceiling that triggers the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction. Therefore, it is possible to generate the reach high frequency state before the second high frequency support mode is generated due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction.

When the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0" in the reach high frequency state and the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs, the reach high frequency state ends. Then, in the time-saving state, a short period can be easily selected as the variable display period of the game times, so that the digestion efficiency of the game times becomes high. This makes it possible to allow a high-reach state to occur while not hindering the high digestion efficiency of the game times in the short-time state.

The process of setting the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84 to "1" when the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 after subtraction 1 becomes "0" is executed even in the time saving state. On the other hand, in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 21), the main side is prior to the process of step S905 for determining whether or not the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1". Since the process of step S903 for determining whether or not "1" is set in either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the RAM 84 is executed, "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag. Even if it is set, when selecting the variable display period of the game times, the selection mode of the variable display period in the short time state has priority over the selection mode of the variable display period in the high reach state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation where the digestion efficiency of the game times is high in the time saving state from being hindered by setting "1" in the reach high frequency state flag.

On the other hand, even in the time saving state, the state in which "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag and "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag is maintained. Therefore, if the time saving state ends before the opportunity to clear the reach high frequency state flag "0" occurs, the reach high frequency state can be generated from that point.

The process of setting information in the variable selection state counter 132 is only step S1006 when the open / close execution mode is started, and the process of step S1006 is executed after the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0". Unless this is done, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0". On the other hand, in the high reach high frequency state, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted by 1 in the situation where the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more, and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes “0”. Occurs when. In this case, if the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is “0” (step S1702: NO), the subtraction process of the variable selection state counter 132 is terminated without executing the processes after step S1703. As a result, the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 after 1 subtraction becomes "0" and the reach high frequency state occurs, and when the reach high frequency state ends, the digestion of the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur is repeated. Even if it does, the high reach condition does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the high reach state from occurring excessively.

Since the period switching reference number is set to a predetermined number (specifically, 50 times) less than the fixed ceiling number, the reach high frequency state occurs before the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction. However, if the ceiling time reduction occurs once, the jackpot result does not occur after that. Even if the digestion of the game times is repeated, the ceiling time reduction does not occur. In this case, when the high-reach state ends, the jackpot result does not occur after that. Even if the digestion of the game times is repeated, the high-reach state does not occur, so that the ceiling time is not shortened. It is possible to prevent a high-reach state from occurring in the ceiling.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution order of the processes in the process during the determination of the special figure is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a special figure variation start process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

In steps S1801 to S1817, the same processing as in steps S801 to S817 of the special figure variation start processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment is executed. After executing the process of step S1817, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state by determining whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84. (Step S1818). When "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S1818: YES), "1" is set in the start high probability flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1819), and "1" is set in the high probability flag. If is not set (step S1818: NO), the start high probability flag is cleared to "0" (step S1820). The start high probability flag is a flag for the main MP82 to specify whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode at the start of the game round is the high probability mode in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 35) described later.

When the process of step S1819 or the process of step S1820 is executed, the value of the special electric power counter in the figure is added by 1 (step S1821). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "1" corresponding to the special figure changing process (step S607).

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a process during special figure determination in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

In steps S1901 to S1907, the same process as in steps S1001 to S1007 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is executed. When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S1901: YES), and the game result of this game is not a jackpot result (step S1902: NO). ), The subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 is executed in step S1908, the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 is executed in step S1909, and the subtraction process of the variable selection state counter 132 is executed in step S1910. In S1911, the setting process for the time saving result is executed, and in step S1912, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed. Then, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1913). That is, in the present embodiment, the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 is not set as the processing order after the setting process for the time saving result and the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131, but the setting process for the time saving result and the ceiling. The subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 is set as the processing order prior to the subtraction process of the counter 131.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a setting process for a time saving result in the present embodiment executed in step S1911 of the process during determination of the special figure (FIG. 35).

When the game result of the current game times is a time saving result (step S2001: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the start high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2002). Then, when "1" is set in the start high probability flag (step S2002: YES), the setting process for this time saving result is ended without executing the processes after step S2003. That is, even if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) is selected in the winning / failing determination process of the game times started in the situation of the high probability mode, the second high frequency support is triggered by the time saving result. The time saving result is invalidated without setting the mode.

When "1" is not set in the start high probability flag (step S2002: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84. (Step S2003, Step S2004). That is, it is determined whether or not the support mode is either the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode. When the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode (step S2003 or step S2004: YES), the setting process for this time saving result is terminated without executing the processes after step S2005. That is, even if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) is selected in the winning / failing determination process of the game times executed in the situation of the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the time saving is shortened. If the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode is set at the timing when the setting process for the result (FIG. 36) is executed, the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is set. Time saving results are invalidated without being done. This makes it possible to prevent additional settings for shifting to the high-frequency support mode from being executed in the middle of the high-frequency support mode.

When the support mode is the low frequency support mode (step S2003 and step S2004: NO), "1" is set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2005). As a result, the support mode becomes the second high-frequency support mode. Then, if the time saving result this time is the first time saving result (step S2006: YES), the information of "100" which is the first time saving continuation number is set in the time saving state counter 134 provided in the main RAM 84 (step). S2007), if the current time saving result is the second time saving result (step S2006: NO), the information of "150" which is the second time saving continuation number is set in the time saving state counter 134 (step S2008). In a situation where the time is shortened, if the number of game times executed without a new jackpot result is 100, which is the number of continuations of the first time reduction, or 150 times, which is the number of continuations of the second time reduction, the jackpot is hit. Even if no result is generated, the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are set.

When the process of step S2007 or the process of step S2008 is executed, the state specification command transmission process is executed (step S2009). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time saving state has been started is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The status specification command also includes information on the number of time reduction continuations set this time. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the sound / light side MPU 93 performs a process for causing the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time saving state is started. Execute.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 in the present embodiment executed in step S1912 of the process during determination of the special figure (FIG. 35).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the start high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2101). Then, when "1" is set in the start high probability flag (step S2101: YES), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S2102. That is, in the game times started in the high probability mode, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted, so that the ceiling time is shortened. Nor.

When "1" is not set in the start high probability flag (step S2101: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S2102). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S2102: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S2103. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0", and a time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs, and the game times of the number of times of the time saving continuation are digested without the big hit result occurring in the time saving state. When the time reduction state ends and the game state becomes the normal game state, the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction does not occur even if the digestion of the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur is repeated thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessive time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S2102: YES), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 (step S2103), and whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the 1 subtraction is "0". (Step S2104). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S2104: YES), the main side is provided that "1" is not set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2105: NO). “1” is set in the second high frequency flag of the RAM 84 (step S2106), and information of “100”, which is the number of continuations of the first time reduction, is set in the time reduction state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 (step S2107). As a result, the time is shortened, which is the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode. In addition, the time saving state ends when the number of game times executed without a jackpot result reaches 100 times, which is the first time saving continuation number, and is a normal game which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode. It becomes a state.

After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S2108). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time saving state has been started is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The status specification command also includes information on the number of times of the first time reduction continuation set this time. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the sound / light side MPU 93 performs a process for causing the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time saving state is started. Execute.

On the other hand, even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", if "1" is set in the second high frequency flag, the processes of steps S2106 to S2108 are not executed, so this time. The ceiling time reduction this time is invalidated without setting the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction. That is, even if the digestion of the game times of the fixed number of ceilings is completed in the situation where the time is shortened, the ceiling time is invalidated without setting the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time. This makes it possible to prevent additional settings for shifting to the high-frequency support mode from being executed in the middle of the high-frequency support mode. The first high-frequency support mode is set only within the range until 100 game times are exhausted after the open / close execution mode, whereas the fixed ceiling number of 500 times is set when the open / close execution mode is started. Is set, so that the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 does not become "0" in the situation of the first high frequency support mode.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2105 or the process of step S2108 is executed, the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2109). As a result, when the ceiling time reduction occurs, the reach high frequency state ends regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode is set triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the process of determining the special figure (FIG. 35), the setting process (FIG. 36) for the time saving result is executed after the subtraction process (step S1908) of the high probability state counter 133. However, when the game round is started in the high probability mode and the hit / fail determination process is executed with reference to the hit / miss table 123 at the time of high probability, "1" is set in the start high probability flag of the main RAM 84. Will be done. Then, when the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 36) is started and the start high accuracy flag is set to "1", even if the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process, the time saving result is concerned. The time saving state is not set with the result as a trigger. As a result, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time saving result in the game times in which the hit / fail determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode.

By using the start high probability flag in which "1" is set on condition that the game is in the high probability mode when the game round is started, the time saving result is invalidated in the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 36). Since it is configured to determine whether or not it is, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned excellent effect regardless of the execution order of the processes in the process during special figure determination (FIG. 35).

In the process of determining the special figure (FIG. 35), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 37) is executed after the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (step S1908). However, when the game round is started in the high probability mode and the hit / fail determination process is executed with reference to the hit / miss table 123 at the time of high probability, "1" is set in the start high probability flag of the main RAM 84. Will be done. Then, when the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 37) is started and the start high accuracy flag is set to "1", the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being executed in the game times in which the hit / fail determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode.

The value of the ceiling counter 131 is set in the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 37) by using the start high probability flag in which "1" is set on condition that the game is in the high probability mode when the game round is started. Since it is configured to determine whether or not to subtract, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned excellent effect regardless of the execution order of the processes in the process during special figure determination (FIG. 35).

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the opportunity to shift the winning / failing lottery mode from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 82 in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, the variable type counter CS, and the general electric random number counter C4, a fall random number counter C5 is provided. The contents of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, the variable type counter CS and the general electric random number counter C4, and the processing using these counters C1 to C4, CINI, CS. The content is the same as that of the first embodiment.

The fall random number counter C5 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The fall random number counter C5 is periodically updated, stored in the first special figure holding area 111 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, and the second at the timing when the game ball wins the second operating port 34. It is stored in the special figure holding area 112. In the high probability mode, when the game round is started, the fall determination process is executed by using the numerical information corresponding to the fall random number counter C5 among the reserved information that is the start target of the game round. Then, when the fall result is selected in the fall determination process, the winning / failing lottery mode changes from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at that time. That is, in the first embodiment, when the number of game times executed in the high-probability mode becomes the high-probability continuation number, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. In the embodiment, the transition to the low-probability mode does not occur depending on the number of game times executed in the high-probability mode, and the transition to the low-probability mode occurs by selecting the fall result in the fall determination process. ..

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a special figure variation start process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

When the second reserved information is not stored in the second special figure reserved area 112 and the first reserved information is stored in the first special figure reserved area 111 (step S2201: YES, step S2202: NO), the first The data setting process is executed (step S2203). The content of the first data setting process is the same as step S803 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment. On the other hand, when the second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112 (step S2201 and step S2202: YES), the first hold information acquired before the second hold information is the first. 1 Even if it is stored in the special figure holding area 111, the second data setting process is executed (step S2204). The content of the second data setting process is the same as step S804 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

When the process of step S2203 or the process of step S2204 is executed, the fall determination process is executed on condition that "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2205: YES) (step S2206). ). In the fall determination process, the fall determination table is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. Numerical information of the fall random number counter C5, which is the fall result, is set in the fall determination table. Only one type of the fall determination table is provided, and the probability that the fall result is selected in the fall determination process is constant regardless of the set value, and the start target of the game round is the first hold information and the second hold information. It is constant regardless of any of the above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the fall result is selected in the fall determination process may be changed according to the set value, and the probability that the fall result is selected in the fall determination process is the first. The configuration may vary depending on which of the 1st hold information and the 2nd hold information is the start target of the game round.

The fall determination table is set so that the probability that the fall result is selected is 1/15, but the probability may be lower than 1/15 or higher than 1/15. In the fall determination process, the information for the fall determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the fall random number counter C5 is read from the hold information stored in the execution area 113 for the special figure, and the read numerical information is the read-out fall determination. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information set as the fall result in the table.

When the result of the fall determination process is the fall result (step S2207: YES), the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2208), and the result of the fall determination process is not the fall result (step S2207). : NO), keep the high probability flag set to "1". As a result, if the result of the fall determination process is a fall result, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and if the result of the falling determination processing is not a falling result, the winning / failing lottery mode has a high probability. Maintained in mode. Further, the fall determination process is executed before the hit / fail determination process (step S2209), and the transition to the low probability mode when the result of the fall determination process is the fall result is also performed before the hit / fail determination process (step S2209). Executed before. As a result, when the result of the fall determination process is a fall result, it is possible to execute the pass / fail determination process (step S2209) in a situation where the win / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S2205, a negative determination is made in step S2207, or the process of step S2208 is executed, the pass / fail determination process is executed (step S2209). The content of the pass / fail determination process is the same as step S805 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is the jackpot result (step S2210: YES), the jackpot distribution determination process is executed (step S2211), the jackpot flag setting process is executed (step S2212), and the jackpot result is used. The stop result setting process of is executed (step S2213). The contents of steps S221 to S2213 are the same as those of steps S807 to S809 of the special figure variation start processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

If the result of the hit / fail determination process is not a jackpot result but a time saving result (step S2210: NO, step S2214: YES), and if "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2215: YES), the first time saving result is selected (step S2216), and if "1" is not set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2215: NO), the time saving distribution determination process is executed. (Step S2217). In the distribution determination process for shortening the time, as in step S811 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment, if the start target of the game round is the first hold information, the first special figure is used. The time saving distribution table 127 (see FIG. 10C) is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84, and if the start target of the game round is the second hold information, the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure (FIG. 10C). 10 (d)) is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. After reading the time-saving distribution tables 127 and 128, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the type random number counter C2 is read from the hold information stored in the execution area 113 for the special figure, and the time-saving distribution is performed. By referring to the minute tables 127 and 128, it is specified which kind of time saving result the read numerical information corresponds to. Therefore, either the first time saving result or the second time saving result is selected.

Even in this embodiment, even if the result of the hit / fail determination process is a time-saving result in the high probability state as in the first embodiment, the time-saving state is not set triggered by the time-saving result. In this case, if the result of the hit / fail determination process is a time-saving result in the high-probability state, the first time-saving result, which has a lower advantage than the second time-saving result, is forcibly selected. Even if the player recognizes from the display contents of the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 41 that the result of the hit / fail determination process is a time saving result in the probability state, the second time saving result having a high advantage is It is possible to make the player recognize that the first time saving result, which has a low advantage, has been invalidated, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of wasteful pulling on the occurrence of the invalidation. The configuration may be applied to the first embodiment, the second embodiment, or the fourth to twelfth embodiments described later.

When the process of step S2216 or the process of step S2217 is executed, the flag set process for time saving is executed (step S2218), and the stop result setting process for the time saving result is executed (step S2219). The contents of steps S2217 to S2219 are the same as steps S811 to S813 of the special figure variation start processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment. Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination process is neither the jackpot result nor the time saving result (step S2214: NO), the stop result setting process for the missed result is executed (step S2220). The content of step S2220 is the same as step S814 of the special figure variation start processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

When the process of step S2213, the process of step S2219, or the process of step S2220 is executed, the processes of steps S2221 to S2224 are executed. The contents of steps S2221 to S2224 are the same as steps S815 to S818 of the special figure variation start processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a process during special figure determination in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

In steps S2301 to S2307, the same processing as in steps S1001 to S1007 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is executed. When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S2301: YES), and the game result of this game is not a jackpot result (step S2302: NO). ), The subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 is executed in step S2308, the subtraction processing of the variation selection state counter 132 is executed in step S2309, the setting process for the time saving result is executed in step S2310, and the setting process for the time saving result is executed in step S2311. The subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed. Then, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S2312). In steps S2308 to S2311, the same processes as in steps S1008 to S1011 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment are executed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 set in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is not set in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 40). .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the transition to the low probability mode does not occur depending on the number of game times executed in the high probability mode.

As described above, when the game round is started in the high probability mode, the fall determination process (step S2206) is executed, and when the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) is the fall result, the winning / failing lottery mode is performed at that time. Changes from high-probability mode to low-probability mode. Then, these processes are executed before the pass / fail determination process (step S2209). As a result, when the result of the fall determination process is a fall result, it is possible to execute the pass / fail determination process (step S2209) in a situation where the win / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode.

When the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process (step S2209), the first time saving result or the second time saving result is selected in the time saving distribution determination process (step S2217) in the low probability mode. On the other hand, in the high probability mode, the first time saving result is forcibly selected. Even in this embodiment, even if the result of the hit / fail determination process is a time-saving result in the high probability state as in the first embodiment, the time-saving state is not set triggered by the time-saving result. In this case, if the result of the hit / fail determination process is a time-saving result in the high-probability state, the first time-saving result, which has a lower advantage than the second time-saving result, is forcibly selected to achieve a high probability. Even if the player recognizes that the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time saving result in the state from the display contents of the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 41, it is not the second time saving result having a high advantage. It is possible to make the player recognize that the first time saving result having a low advantage is invalidated, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of wasteful pulling on the occurrence of the invalidation.

In the configuration in which the first time-saving result, which has a relatively low advantage, is selected when the result of the hit / fail determination process (step S2209) is the time-saving result in the high probability mode, the time-saving result is the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result. The fall determination process (step S2206) is executed before the process of allocating to any of the time saving results (step S2215 to step S2219). As a result, when the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) becomes the fall result and the transition to the low probability mode occurs, the time reduction result is set to the first time reduction after the transition to the low probability mode is performed. The process of allocating to either the result or the second time saving result (step S2215 to step S2219) is executed. Therefore, in the game times in which the transition to the low probability mode occurs due to the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) being the fall result, it is relative to the case where the result of the hit / fail determination process (step S2209) is a time saving result. It is possible to allow the second time saving result, which is advantageous to the user, to be selected.

In the configuration of shifting from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode when the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) is the fall result, the process of shifting to the low-probability mode is executed at the start of the game round. On the other hand, the setting process for the time saving result (step S2310) and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (step S2311) are executed in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 40) which is the process at the end of the game round. As a result, when the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) becomes the fall result and the transition to the low probability mode occurs, the setting process for the time saving result is performed after the transition to the low probability mode is performed. (Step S2310) and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (step S2311) are executed. Therefore, in the game round in which the transition to the low probability mode occurs due to the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) being the fall result, when the result of the hit / fail determination process (step S2209) is the time reduction result, the time reduction is concerned. It is possible to set the time reduction state triggered by the result, and when the ceiling time reduction occurs because the value of the ceiling counter 131 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", the ceiling time reduction is set. It is possible to set the time saving state as an opportunity.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the main process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

In steps S2401 to S2416, the same processing as in steps S101 to S116 of the main processing (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment is executed. When it is determined that the reset button 142 is being pressed (step S2408 or step S2422: YES), and it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 143 is being turned on using the setting key (step S2416). : YES), or when it is determined in step S2407 that "1" is set in the setting updating flag of the main RAM 84, the setting value updating process is executed (step S2417). The setting value update process will be described later. Further, in steps S2418 to S2420, the same processing as in steps S118 to S120 of the main processing (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in any of steps S2404 to S2406, that is, if the power failure flag is not set to "1", the checksums do not match, or the set value is abnormal, the main side “1” is set in the game stop flag of the RAM 84 (step S2421). By setting the game stop flag to "1" as in the first embodiment, the processing of steps S201 to S205 is executed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), while the affirmative determination is made in step S206. By doing so, the processes of steps S207 to S220 are not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure processing was not performed properly at the time of the previous power failure, the storage state of the main RAM 84 changes from the previous power failure. If the checksums do not match due to the fact that the checksums do not match, or if the set values are abnormal, the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while the game progresses. Will not be executed.

In the first embodiment, when the game stop flag is set to "1" in step S121 by identifying that an information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84, the ceiling counter of the main RAM 84 is set in step S122. Although it is configured to execute a process of setting information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, in 131, the process is not set in the present embodiment. That is, by identifying that an information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84, even if the game stop flag is set to "1" in step S2421, the process of setting the information in the ceiling counter 131 is not executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the reset button 142 is being pressed (step S2422). When the reset button 142 is not pressed (step S2422: NO), the processes of step S2423 and step S2424 are executed. In the processes of steps S2423 and S2424, the same processes as those of steps S124 and S125 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed.

When the reset button 142 is pressed (step S2422: YES), the set value update process is performed on condition that the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on by using the setting key (step S2416: YES). Execute (step S2417). In steps S2425 to S2429, the same processes as in steps S126 to S130 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a set value update process executed in step S2417 of the main process (FIG. 41).

First, the interrupt permission is set (step S2501). After that, "1" is set in the setting updating flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2502). After that, if "1" is not set in the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2503: NO), after executing the RAM clear process (step S2504), the process proceeds to step S2507 and the game stop flag is set to "1". If "1" is set (step S2503: YES), the RAM clear process is executed (step S2505), and after the ceiling counter 131 is set (step S2506), the process proceeds to step S2507.

In the RAM clear processing in each of step S2504 and step S2505, the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (that is, the setting reference area), the ceiling counter 131, and the setting updating flag are set in the main RAM 84. And, except for the area in which the information for calculating the winning combination ratio is stored in the main RAM 84, the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so that the winning / failing lottery is performed regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not executed, the open / close execution mode is not executed, and the normal map display unit 38a is not variablely displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. It becomes a situation. Further, since the special figure holding area 84a and the normal drawing holding area 84c are also cleared to "0", the first holding information, the second holding information, and the holding information on the normal drawing side are deleted. In addition, the setting confirmation flag and the setting update area are cleared to "0". Further, in the RAM clear processing, the initial setting is executed after the various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step S2402 is executed.

In the setting process of the ceiling counter 131 in step S2506, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131. As a result, it is identified that an information abnormality in the main RAM 84 has occurred, and the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", so that the start of the process for advancing the game is prevented. When the set value update process is executed in the present situation and the blocked situation is released, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131.

After that, "1" is set in the setting update area of the main RAM 84 (step S2507), and the update start command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93 (step S2508). Further, it is determined whether or not the information of the set value stored in the setting update area is any of "1" to "6" (step S2509). If it is not any of "1" to "6" (step S2509: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area (step S2510). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1".

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2509 or when the process of step S2510 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state by using the setting key (step S2511). When a negative determination is made in step S2511, the value of the setting update area is added by 1 on condition that the reset button 142 is pressed (step S2512: YES) (step S2513). As a result, each time the reset button 142 is pressed once, the set value is updated one step higher. Further, when the reset button 142 is not pressed (step S2512: NO) or when the value of the setting update area is added by 1, the process returns to the process of step S2509, but the setting update is performed in step S2509. If it is determined that the value of the area is 7 or more, "1" is set in the setting update area in step S2510. As a result, when the reset button 142 is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", it returns to "setting 1".

When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S2511: YES), the information of the setting value stored in the setting update area is overwritten in the setting reference area (step S2514). ). As a result, the information of the setting value of the result updated by the setting value update process of this time is set in the setting reference area, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is the setting of the current pachinko machine 10. It becomes a value.

After that, interrupt prohibition is set (step S2515). Further, the return command at the time of update is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S2516). Further, the setting updating flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2517).

According to the above configuration, it is identified that an information abnormality in the main RAM 84 has occurred, and "1" is set in the game stop flag of the main RAM 84, so that the process for advancing the game can be started. When the set value update process is executed in the blocked situation and the blocked situation is released, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131. As a result, even if the information of the ceiling counter 131 is rewritten when an information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the information of the ceiling counter 131 can be reset to the information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings. It becomes.

When an information error in the main RAM 84 occurs, the process of resetting the information of the ceiling counter 131 to the information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is released from the situation where the start of the process for advancing the game is blocked. It is possible to concentrate on the setting value update process that is executed for this purpose. Further, when an information abnormality in the main RAM 84 occurs, the process of resetting the information of the ceiling counter 131 to the information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, prevents the start of the process for advancing the game. When the setting value update process is executed in order to release the above, it is possible to execute it naturally.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the main process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

In steps S2601 to S2612, the same processing as in steps S101 to S112 of the main processing (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment is executed. When the setting key insertion unit 143 is not turned on by using the setting key and "1" is not set in the setting checking flag (step S2610 and step S2611: NO), the main body open detection sensor 144 It is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is open by determining whether or not the opening detection signal of the HI level is received from the above (step S2613).

When the HI level open detection signal is received from the main body open detection sensor 144 (step S2613: YES), that is, when the game machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, the ceiling of the main RAM 84 Information of 500 times, which is the number of times of the first ceiling, is set in the counter 131 (step S2614). When the process of step S2613 is executed, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the reset button 142 is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on by the setting key. In addition, "1" is not set in both the setting updating flag and the setting checking flag of the main RAM 84. In this case, the setting confirmation process (step S2612), the set value update process (step S2617), and the RAM clear process (step S2619) are not executed in the process at the start of supplying the operating power (steps S2601 to S2626). The situation. Further, in the game hall, with the main power supply for supplying operating power to each pachinko machine 10 turned off, the power switch provided in the power supply / launch control device 78 of each pachinko machine 10 is turned on in advance. When it is time to start business on the 1st, the main power is turned on so that the pachinko machines 10 are activated all at once. In such a situation, when the affirmative judgment is made in step S2613, the gaming machine is in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S2612), the set value update process (step S2617), and the RAM clear process (step S2619) are not executed. This is a case where the supply of operating power is started with the main body 12 intentionally opened. Then, in such a situation, information of 500 times, which is the number of times of the first ceiling, is set in the ceiling counter 131. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which information of 500 times, which is the first ceiling count, is set in the ceiling counter 131 at the start of supply of operating power as a situation different from that at the start of normal business. The confirmation process (step S2612), the set value update process (step S2617), and the RAM clear process (step S2619) can be generated without being involved. Even when the jackpot result is obtained and the opening / closing execution mode is started, information of 500 times, which is the first ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131.

In steps S2615 to S2620, the same processes as in steps S115 to S120 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S2604 to S2606, that is, if the power failure flag is not set to "1", the checksums do not match, or the set value is abnormal, the main side “1” is set in the game stop flag of the RAM 84 (step S2621). By setting the game stop flag to "1" as in the first embodiment, the processing of steps S201 to S205 is executed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), while the affirmative determination is made in step S206. By doing so, the processes of steps S207 to S220 are not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure processing was not performed properly at the time of the previous power failure, the storage state of the main RAM 84 changes from the previous power failure. If the checksums do not match due to the fact that the checksums do not match, or if the set values are abnormal, the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while the game progresses. Will not be executed.

After that, the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is set with information of 800 times, which is the number of times of the second ceiling, which is larger than the number of times of the first ceiling (step S2622). In steps S2623 to S2630, the same processing as in steps S123 to S130 of the main processing (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment is executed.

Even if the set value update process (step S2617) is executed as in the first embodiment, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not executed, and the number of ceilings is newly set. I can't. Therefore, even if the set value update process (step S2617) is executed in order to cancel the game stop state due to the information abnormality when the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the information of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained as it is. .. On the other hand, when it is specified that an information abnormality in the main RAM 84 has occurred and the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", the ceiling counter 131 is set to 800, which is the second ceiling count. The information of the times is set. As a result, even if the information of the ceiling counter 131 is rewritten when an information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the information of the ceiling counter 131 can be reset to the information of 800 times, which is the second ceiling count. It will be possible.

The number of times of the second ceiling is larger than the number of times of the first ceiling set in the ceiling counter 131 when the opening / closing execution mode is started or in step S2614 of the main process (FIG. 43). As a result, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84, the second ceiling counter, which is a relatively large number of times, is set in the ceiling counter 131, which is fraudulent with the occurrence of an information abnormality in the main RAM 84. When an act is performed, it is possible to give a penalty that the number of executions of the game times required to generate the ceiling time reduction increases.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the game area PA provided on the game board 24 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 44 is a front view of the game board 24 for explaining the configuration of the game area PA in the present embodiment.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. The guide rail is configured as. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

Similar to the first embodiment, the game board 24 has a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, and a general drawing unit 38. Is provided. Further, a special winning device 151 is provided in place of the second operating port 34 in the first embodiment. Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution winning device 161 is provided.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball is entered into any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the special winning device 151, and the distribution winning device 161, the number of game media that can be used by the player is determined. A predetermined number of game balls are paid out in order to increase the number. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, 10 game balls are paid out when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, and 15 when a ball is entered into the special electric winning device 32. When the payout of one game ball is executed and the ball is entered into the first operating port 33, the payout of three game balls is executed, and when the ball is entered into the special winning device 151, the ball is paid out. One game ball is paid out, and when a ball is entered into the distribution winning device 161, 15 game balls are paid out.

The distribution winning device 161 is provided with a discharge passage area 165b and a V winning passage area 165c as described later, and the game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 161 is provided with the discharge passage area 165b and the V winning passage. Although it will pass through any of the areas 165c, the same number (specifically, 15) of game balls will be paid out regardless of which of the discharge passage area 165b and the V winning passage area 165c is passed. Will be done. Further, the number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the first operating port 33 and the special prize device 151 may be the same, and the number of prize balls in the distribution prize device 161 is the special electric prize device. The number of prize balls may be larger than or less than the number of prize balls of 32.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that does not enter various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 36 projecting forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area where the game ball launched into the game area PA can flow down is partitioned. Specifically, in the game area PA, the upper region PA1 which is an region above the predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 and the upper region PA1 which is continuously below the variable display unit 36 and the variable display unit 36. The left region PA2, which is the left region, the right region PA3, which is a region to the right of the variable display unit 36 and is continuous below the upper region PA1, and the left region PA2 and the right region PA3, respectively. On the other hand, it is continuously divided below the variable display unit 36 into a lower region PA4 which is a region below the variable display unit 36.

As the first launch operation, the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount, so that the game ball is moved to the left of the center position in the lateral direction in the upper region PA1. Start to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the left region PA2 → the lower region PA4. On the other hand, as the second launch operation, the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, so that the upper region PA1 is on the right side of the center position in the lateral direction. The game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the right region PA3 → the lower region PA4. That is, by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the launch operation device 28, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2 of the left side area PA2 and the right side area PA3, and the right side area. The game can be performed so that the game ball flows down the PA3. By the way, when the launch operation device 28 is operated with the maximum rotation amount, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the right region PA3 → the lower region PA4.

The first operating port 33 is installed in the lower region PA4. The first operating port 33 is opened upward, and no member such as an opening / closing member for preventing the game ball from entering the first operating port 33 is provided. Then, in the situation where the game ball is launched in the same mode, the winning probability to the first operating port 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operating port 33 is always capable of entering a game ball that flows down the game area PA toward the first operating port 33. Further, the first operating port 33 is arranged directly below the stage portion 36b formed in the variable display unit 36, and is a game ball that has flowed into the stage portion 36b via the guidance passage formed in the variable display unit 36. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the center of the stage portion 36b in the lateral direction to the outside of the variable display unit 36 can easily win a prize in the first operating port 33.

As described above, the first operating port 33 is provided in the lower region PA4, but on the upstream side of the first operating port 33 toward the right region PA3, a game ball flowing down the right region PA3 is the first. A regulation nail 24c is provided so as not to reach the 1 actuating port 33. Further, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage portion 36b is provided for the left side region PA2 and not for the right side region PA3. With these configurations, when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, the first operating port 33 can be won, but the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. When the launch operation device 28 is operated so as to do so, it is impossible to win a prize in the first operating port 33. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball flows down the right region PA3 because the regulation nail 24c is not provided or the entrance of the guide passage to the stage portion 36b is provided in the right region PA3. Even when the launch operation device 28 is operated as described above, the first operating port 33 may be configured to be able to win a prize.

The special winning device 151 is installed in the right area PA3. That is, the special winning device 151 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the launch operation device so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. If 28 is operated, a prize can be won.

The configuration of the special winning device 151 will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (a). FIG. 45A is a vertical cross-sectional view of the special winning device 151 in the non-inductive state. The special winning device 151 has a base unit 151a in which a discharge passage 153 for discharging the game ball flowing in from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 24 is formed, and a game ball flowing down the game area PA into the discharge passage 153. It is provided with a guidance unit 152 for guiding. The entrance portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 has an opening area of one game ball or more, and is opened toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. A detection sensor 154 is provided on the outlet portion 153b side of the discharge passage 153, and the detection sensor 154 detects a game ball that has won a prize in the special winning device 151.

The guidance unit 152 receives the game ball flowing down the front region of the entrance portion 153a in the game area PA from below, and guides the received game ball into the discharge passage 153 and the guide member 155 into the discharge passage 153. A situation in which the guide drive unit 156 for displacement of the guide member 155 between the initial position at which the game ball cannot be guided and the guidance position at which the guidance is possible, and the guide member 155 are arranged at the initial positions. Is arranged at a blocking position that prevents the inflow of the game ball into the discharge passage 153, and is arranged at a non-blocking position that does not prevent the inflow of the game ball into the discharge passage 153 in the situation where the guide member 155 is arranged at the guidance position. It includes a blocking member 157. The guide member 155 and the blocking member 157 are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction so that the guide member 155 faces downward. A transmission unit 158 is provided to the guide member 155 and the blocking member 157 so as to transmit the driving force of the guide driving unit 156.

When the guide driving unit 156 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 155 is arranged at the initial position and the blocking member 157 is arranged at the blocking position by the urging force of an urging means such as a spring (not shown). In this case, the guide member 155 and the blocking member 157 are entirely buried in the discharge passage 153 and do not project into the game area PA. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front region of the entrance portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 in the game area PA is not guided into the discharge passage 153 by the guide member 155 and the blocking member 157, that is, the game ball is a special prize. The game area PA flows downward without entering the device 151. Further, since the blocking member 157 is arranged at the blocking position, the substantially opening area of the inlet portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 is less than one game ball. As a result, in the situation where the guide member 155 is arranged at the initial position, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from entering the special winning device 151.

When the guide driving unit 156 is in the driving state, the guide member 155 and the blocking member 157 are displaced against the urging force of the urging means, the guide member 155 is arranged at the guiding position, and the blocking member 157 is not. Placed in a blocking position. FIG. 45B is a vertical cross-sectional view of the special winning device 151 in the guided state.

When the guide member 155 is arranged at the guide position, the tip end side of the guide member 155 projects from the inlet portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 toward the game area PA side. This amount of protrusion is such that the game ball flowing down the front region of the entrance portion 153a in the game region PA can be received from below. Since the upper surface of the tip side of the guide member 155 is inclined downward toward the inlet portion 153a of the discharge passage 153, the game ball received from below on the tip side of the guide member 155 is the upper surface of the guide member 155. Will be guided into the discharge passage 153. Further, when the blocking member 157 is arranged in the non-blocking position, the blocking member 157 is displaced so that the tip portion thereof is located above the blocking position, so that the game of rolling on the upper surface of the guide member 155. The ball flows into the discharge passage 153 without interfering with the blocking member 157. As a result, when the guide drive unit 156 is driven, the game ball flowing down the front region of the entrance portion 153a in the game area PA enters the special winning device 151. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, a state in which the guide driving unit 156 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 155 is arranged in the initial position, and the blocking member 157 is arranged in the blocking position is defined as the non-inducing state of the guiding unit 152 or the special winning device 151. The state in which the guide driving unit 156 is in the driving state, the guide member 155 is arranged in the guiding position, and the blocking member 157 is arranged in the non-blocking position is the guided state of the guiding unit 152 or the special winning device 151. It is called an open state.

The special winning device 151 includes a cover member 159 provided so as to face the entrance portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The cover member 159 is formed in a gate shape so as to form a vertical passage portion 159a in the front region of the entrance portion 153a in the game region PA, and one game ball passing through the front region of the entrance portion 153a at the same time. It is provided so as to limit the number of the game balls to one and to regulate the forward movement and lateral movement of the pachinko machine 10 of the game ball. As a result, when the guidance unit 152 of the special prize device 151 is in the guidance state, it is prevented that a plurality of game balls are simultaneously guided into the discharge passage 153 of the special prize device 151, and the guidance state is also prevented. It is possible to reliably guide the game ball passing through the front region of the entrance portion 153a into the discharge passage 153.

As shown in FIG. 44, a through gate 35 is provided above the special winning device 151 in the right region PA3. That is, the through gate 35 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. If is operated, a prize can be won. The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. Further, a special winning device 151 is provided vertically below the through gate 35, and a special electric winning device 32 and a distribution winning device 161 are provided on the downstream side of the special winning device 151 in the right region PA3. Has been done. Therefore, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the special winning device 151, the special electric winning device 32, or the distribution winning device 161.

The right region PA3 in which the special winning device 151 and the through gate 35 are centrally arranged is defined by the side wall 36f whose left side is bulging in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 in the variable display unit 36. The right side is provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13, and is defined by a regulation wall protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. The right side region PA3 is set to have a narrower lateral dimension than the lower region PA4, and the lateral dimension is such that it is impossible to arrange the ball entry devices of the game balls in the lateral direction at the same height position. It has become. As a result, it is possible to limit the flow trajectory of the game ball flowing down the right side region PA3 to a predetermined range, and it is easy for the game ball to enter the special winning device 151 and the through gate 35.

The arrangement mode of the plurality of nails 24b on the upstream side of the through gate 35 in the right region PA3 is set to guide the game ball flowing down the right region PA3 to the through gate 35. As a result, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA3 can easily enter the through gate 35, and the special winning device 151 can be easily entered as the ball easily enters the through gate 35.

The guidance unit 152 of the special prize device 151 is switched from the non-guidance state to the guidance state based on the winning of the through gate 35, so that the special prize device 151 is changed from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the winning of the through gate 35 is used as a trigger to perform the normal drawing pass / fail determination process, and the normal drawing unit 38 provided in the lower left corner of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass. A variable display of the pattern is performed on the figure display unit 38a. Then, when the result of the normal map pass / fail determination process is the electric service open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the normal electric open state. In the normal power open state, the guidance unit 152 is in the guidance state in a predetermined mode, so that the special winning device 151 is in the open state in the predetermined mode.

Even in this embodiment, a low-frequency support mode, a first high-frequency support mode, and a second high-frequency support mode are set as support modes. The probability of winning an open prize, the mode of selecting the duration of the variation display times in the general map display unit 38a, and the mode of selecting the stop result in the general map display unit 38a are the same as those in the first embodiment. Further, the mode in which the special winning device 151 is opened (opening continuation period, number of times of opening, maximum number of winnings, interval period) when the general electric power is opened in each support mode is described in each of the first embodiments. This is the same as the mode (opening continuation period, number of times of opening, maximum number of winnings, interval period) in which the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened when the general electric power is opened in the support mode.

In the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the special winning device 151 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is higher than that of the special winning device 151, but in the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode, the first operating port The probability of winning the special winning device 151 is higher than that of 33. Then, when a prize is awarded to the special winning device 151, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the player holds too many balls. You can play the game without reducing it.

The winning / failing determination process is performed based on the occurrence of a prize in the first operating port 33 or the special winning device 151. Then, the result of the hit / fail determination process is clarified through the display effect in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36. The special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display unit 37a and a second special figure display unit 37b as in the first embodiment. In the first special figure display unit 37a, a change display of the pattern is performed by performing a hit / fail determination process on the first hold information acquired by the occurrence of a prize in the first operation port 33. Then, the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the hit / fail determination process is displayed. In this case, as the determination result of the hit / fail determination process, there are a jackpot result, a time saving result, and a missed result as in the first embodiment, but the content of the stop result of the first special figure display unit 37a is the jackpot result. There is a difference between the time saving result and the out-of-time result. The display of the stop result on the first special figure display unit 37a is maintained until the next game round is started and a new pattern variation display is started on the first special figure display unit 37a. In addition, the second special figure display unit 37b performs a hit / fail determination process on the second hold information acquired by the occurrence of a prize in the special winning device 151, so that the pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Then, the result corresponding to the determination result of the hit / fail determination process is displayed. In this case, as the determination result of the hit / fail determination process, there are a big hit result, a time saving result, and a missed result as in the first embodiment, and there are other small hit results. The content of the stop result of the second special figure display unit 37b is different for each of the big hit result, the time saving result, the small hit result, and the missed result. The display of the stop result on the second special figure display unit 37b is maintained until the next game round is started and the new pattern variation display is started on the second special figure display unit 37b.

In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure holding display unit 37c is provided at a position adjacent to the first special figure display unit 37a. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the first operating port 33 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display unit 37c. On the other hand, the special figure holding display unit corresponding to the second special figure display unit 37b is not provided. Unlike the first operating port 33, the number of game balls winning in the special winning device 151 is not stored on hold. That is, when a prize is generated in the special winning device 151 in a situation where the game times can be started, the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are executed, but the game times cannot be started. Even if a prize is awarded to the special prize device 151 in the situation, the hold information that triggers the start of the game round is not stored. However, even if a prize is awarded to the special winning device 151 in a situation where the game round cannot be started, the payout of the game ball is executed.

The display range of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. Further, the entire display range of the first special figure display unit 37a, the second special figure display unit 37b, and the first special figure reservation display unit 37c is also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the symbol display device 41 more than the first special figure display unit 37a, the second special figure display unit 37b, and the first special figure reservation display unit 37c.

When the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b performs variable display of the pattern, that is, when the game round is executed, the symbol display device 41 performs a display effect accordingly. When the effect for game rounds is executed in the symbol display device 41, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the first hold display area 42a, and the state suggestion area 43 are set as in the first embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, the second hold display area 42b is not displayed because the second hold information is not stored on hold. Further, in the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect for the game round, but also the display effect in the open / close execution mode that shifts to after the big hit result is performed.

When a jackpot result is selected in the winning / failing determination process executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the special winning device 151, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode after the game times corresponding to the jackpot result are completed. In the open / close execution mode, the special electric winning device 32 can be won. As shown in FIG. 44, the special electric winning device 32 is provided in the right region PA3 at a position below the special winning device 151 and above the distribution winning device 161. That is, the special electric winning device 32 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the launch operation device 32 causes the game ball to flow down the right area PA3. If 28 is operated, a prize can be won.

The special electric winning device 32 includes a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and also includes an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in either the closed state or the open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and when a jackpot result is selected in the winning / failing determination process, the opening / closing door 32a can be switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize. ing. It should be noted that, although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which winning is less likely to occur than in the open state. Further, the execution content of the open / close execution mode is the same as that of the first embodiment.

When a small hit result is selected in the winning / failing determination process executed based on the winning of the special winning device 151, the game shifts to the distribution execution mode after the game times corresponding to the small winning result are completed. In the distribution execution mode, it is possible to win a prize in the distribution winning device 161.

As shown in FIG. 44, the distribution winning device 161 is provided at a position below the special winning device 151 in the right region PA3. That is, the distribution winning device 161 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. A prize can be won when the device 28 is operated.

The configuration of the distribution winning device 161 will be described with reference to FIG. 46 in addition to FIG. FIG. 46 is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the distribution winning device 161.

As shown in FIG. 44, the distribution winning device 161 is provided with a distribution entrance 161a having a size that allows the game ball to pass through, and is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass through the distribution entrance 161a. It is provided with a distribution side opening / closing member 162 that switches to an open state through which a sphere can pass. The distribution side opening / closing member 162 is opened by being driven by a drive unit 163 for distribution inlet through a link mechanism (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 46, the game ball winning the distribution entrance 161a is led out to the branch passage 165 formed in the base body 164 of the distribution winning device 161. The branch passage 165 has an upstream passage region 165a set so that the passage direction is laterally inclined downward from the entrance portion of the branch passage 165 to an intermediate position of the branch passage 165, and the upstream passage region 165a. The game is on a side different from the discharge passage area 165b, which is continuous with the downstream end of the above and is set so that the passage direction is vertically downward, and the discharge passage area 165b, which is provided by branching from an intermediate position of the discharge passage area 165b. It is provided with a V winning passage area 165c for guiding the ball. In this case, since the size of the upstream passage region 165a in the direction orthogonal to the passage direction is one game ball or more and less than two game balls, the direction is orthogonal to the passage direction. It is prevented that the game balls pass through the upstream passage area 165a in a state where a plurality of game balls are lined up. Therefore, it is prevented that a plurality of game balls reach the branch position of the discharge passage area 165b to the V winning passage area 165c at the same time.

At the branching point of the discharge passage area 165b to the V winning passage area 165c, a switching piece 166 for guiding the game ball flowing into the discharge passage area 165b to the V winning passage area 165c is provided. The switching piece 166 is rotatably supported in a region opposite to the V winning passage region 165c side with reference to the discharge passage region 165b in the base body 164, and is retracted to the outside of the discharge passage region 165b as a whole. It can be displaced between the position and the V-guide position protruding into the discharge passage area 165b. The driving force of the switching drive unit 167 is transmitted to the switching piece 166 through a transmission unit (not shown). When the switching drive unit 167 is in the non-driving state, the switching piece 166 is arranged at the retracted position by the urging force of an urging means such as a spring (not shown), and the switching drive unit 167 is brought into the driving state. The switching piece 166 is displaced against the urging force and is arranged at the V induction position.

When the switching piece 166 is arranged in the retracted position, the game ball flowing into the branch passage 165 flows down the discharge passage area 165b without being guided to the V winning passage area 165c. Then, the game ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 24 after being detected by the count detection sensor 168 provided downstream of the branch position by the switching piece 166 in the discharge passage area 165b. On the other hand, when the switching piece 166 is arranged at the V-guide position, the game ball flowing into the branch passage 165 is received from below by the switching piece 166. The upper surface of the switching piece 166 in the state of being arranged at the V guide position is inclined downward toward the V winning passage area 165c. As a result, the game ball received from below by the switching piece 166 flows into the V winning passage area 165c due to its own weight, and flows down the V winning passage area 165c. Then, the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 provided in the V winning passage area 165c, and then discharged to the rear of the game board 24.

When the distribution side opening / closing member 162 is in the open state, the period during which the open state is maintained is constant at 2 seconds, which is a period longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, and distribution is performed in the distribution execution mode. The maximum number of game balls that can be entered in the winning device 161 is 5 and is constant. Further, in a situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Then, when the distribution side opening / closing member 162 is opened, the number of game balls to be won in the distribution winning device 161 is often one or two, and the maximum is about three. On the other hand, the switching piece 166 starts operating when the operating power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and the switching piece 166 is arranged at the V induction position at a fixed cycle for a fixed period. .. The period in which the switching piece 166 is arranged at the V-lead position is once every 4 seconds, and the period during which the switching piece 166 is held at the V-lead position is 1 second. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the distribution winning device 161 in the open state, the switching piece 166 is not arranged at the V guidance position at the timing when the game ball reaches the position of the switching piece 166. Assumed, in this case, the game ball is not detected by the V winning detection sensor 169.

Regardless of whether the game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 168 or the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 169, the same number of prize balls corresponding to the distribution prize device 161 are paid out. Will be done. Further, when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 in the distribution execution mode, the open / close execution mode is generated after the distribution execution mode. On the other hand, if the distribution execution mode ends without the game ball being detected by the V winning detection sensor 169, the opening / closing execution mode does not occur.

In the present embodiment, when the distribution execution mode is generated and the firing of the game ball toward the distribution winning device 161 is continued, there is a 1/2 probability that the game ball in the V winning detection sensor 169 Detection occurs. However, the probability is not limited to this, and the probability may be lower than 1/2 or higher. Further, when the distribution execution mode is generated and the firing of the game ball toward the distribution winning device 161 is continued, there is a 100% or approximately 100% probability of the game ball in the V winning detection sensor 169. It may be configured to generate the detection of.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 82 in the present embodiment.

Similar to the first embodiment, the present embodiment also includes a hit random number counter C1, a type random number counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a random number initial value counter CINI, a variable type counter CS, and a general electric random number counter C4. The contents of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, the variable type counter CS and the general electric random number counter C4, and the contents of the processing using these counters C1 to C4, CINI, CS It is the same as the first embodiment. Further, when the through gate 35 is won, the numerical information of the normal number counter C4 is stored in the normal figure holding area 84c, and the configuration of the normal figure holding area 84c is the same as that of the first embodiment. Is.

Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first special drawing area 171 provided in the main RAM 84 when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33. Will be done. Further, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 and the type random number counter C2 is stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure provided in the main RAM 84 when a prize is generated in the special winning device 151. ..

The first special drawing area 171 includes a first area 172a, a second area 172b, a third area 172c, and a fourth area 172d, and a hit random number counter C1 is provided according to the winning history of the first operating port 33. , Each numerical information of the type random number counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 172a to 172d as the first hold information. In this case, in the first area 172a to the fourth area 172d, when the winning of the first operating port 33 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 172a → the second area 172b → the third area 172c → the third area 172c. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 4 areas 172d. By providing the four areas 172a to 172d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first operating port 33 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored on hold in the first special drawing area 171 is not limited to four, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular.

The first special drawing area 171 is provided with an execution area 173 for the first special drawing in addition to the first area 172a to the fourth area 172d. The execution area 173 for the first special figure stores the first hold information to be subjected to the hit / fail judgment process, various distribution judgment processes, etc. when the variable display of the pattern is started on the first special figure display unit 37a. It is an area to be done. The hold information stored in the first area 172a is shifted to the execution area 173 for the first special figure when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a is started.

In the execution area 174 for the second special figure, each numerical information of the random number counter C1 and the type random number counter C2 is second when a prize is generated in the special winning device 151 in a situation where the game round can be started. Stored as pending information. Here, as described above, the first special drawing area 171 is provided with the first to fourth areas 172a to 172d, and the first hold information is provided even in a situation where it is impossible to start the game round. In contrast to the configuration in which the second reserved information is held and stored, only the execution area 174 for the second special figure is provided for the second reserved information, and the area for holding and storing the second reserved information is not provided. .. This makes it possible to handle the presence / absence of hold storage differently between the first hold information and the second hold information. In addition, since the reach effect that is finally lost does not occur in the game round triggered by the second hold information, the first hold information includes the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3, whereas the first hold information includes the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3. 2 The hold information does not include the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second hold information may include the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3.

The hit / fail determination process is executed using the hit random number counter C1. In the first embodiment, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the winning / failing lottery mode, but in the present embodiment, there is only one type of winning / failing lottery mode.

When the pass / fail determination process is executed for the first hold information, the first pass / fail table 181 stored in the main ROM 83 is referred to. FIG. 48A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first pass / fail table 181 when the set value set as the target of use is “setting 3”. As shown in FIG. 48A, a jackpot result, a time saving result, and a loss result are set in the first hit / fail table 181 as the result of the hit / fail determination process. Even in the first hit / fail table 181 corresponding to the set values other than "setting 3", the jackpot result, the time saving result, and the missed result are set. The number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 set corresponding to the jackpot result is different for each set value as in the first embodiment, and the hit random number set corresponding to the time saving result. The number of numerical information of the counter C1 is the same for each set value.

When the pass / fail determination process is executed for the second hold information, the second pass / fail table 182 stored in the main ROM 83 is referred to. FIG. 48B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second pass / fail table 182 when the set value set as the target of use is “setting 3”. As shown in FIG. 48 (b), in the second hit / fail table 182, a jackpot result, a time saving result, and a missed result are set as the result of the hit / fail determination process, and a small hit result is further set. Even in the second hit / fail table 182 corresponding to the set value other than "setting 3", the big hit result, the time saving result, the small hit result and the missed result are set. The number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 set corresponding to the big hit result is different in each set value as in the first embodiment, and it corresponds to each of the time saving result and the small hit result. The number of numerical information of the set random number counter C1 is the same for each set value.

When the jackpot result is selected in the hit / fail determination process, the type of jackpot result is selected by using the type random number counter C2. When the jackpot distribution determination process for determining the type of the jackpot result is executed, the jackpot distribution table 183 stored in the main ROM 83 is referred to. FIG. 48C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot distribution table 183. As shown in FIG. 48 (c), a low-frequency jackpot result and a high-frequency jackpot result are set in the jackpot distribution table 183 as the result of the distribution determination processing for the jackpot.

The low-frequency jackpot result triggers a transition to the open / close execution mode. In the open / close execution mode triggered by the low-frequency jackpot result, the number of round game executions is 10. In addition, the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency support mode. The low frequency support mode in this case continues at least until the next open / close execution mode occurs.

The high-frequency jackpot result triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode. In the open / close execution mode triggered by the high-frequency jackpot result, the number of times the round game is executed is 10. Further, the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the first high-frequency support mode. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode ends when 10 game times have been completed without a new opening / closing execution mode. When 10 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

Refer to the jackpot distribution table 183 regardless of whether the result of the hit / fail determination process for the first hold information is the jackpot result or the result of the hit / fail determination process for the second hold information is the jackpot result. Will be done. Further, the same jackpot distribution table 183 is referred to regardless of the set value. The jackpot distribution table 183 is set so that the low-frequency jackpot results are selected with a probability of 2/3 and the high-frequency jackpot results are selected with a probability of 1/3, but these selection probabilities are arbitrary.

When the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process, the type of the time saving result is selected by using the type random number counter C2. When the time saving distribution determination process for determining the type of the time saving result is executed, the time saving distribution table 184 stored in the main ROM 83 is referred to. FIG. 48 (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving distribution table 184. As shown in FIG. 48 (d), the first time saving result and the second time saving result are set in the time saving distribution table 184 as the result of the time saving determination processing.

The first time saving result is a time saving result in which the support mode is set to the second high frequency support mode without triggering the transition of the open / close execution mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when the opening / closing execution mode is not newly generated and 10 game times, which is the number of continuations of the first time reduction, are exhausted. When 10 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

The second time saving result is a time saving result in which the support mode is set to the second high frequency support mode without triggering the transition of the open / close execution mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when the opening / closing execution mode is not newly generated and the 15 game times, which is the second time-saving continuation number, is exhausted. When 15 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. That is, the second time-saving result has a larger number of executions of the game times in which the second high-frequency support mode continues than the first time-saving result. Therefore, the second time saving result is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving result.

Even in this embodiment, there is a shortened ceiling time. When the second high-frequency support mode is set with the ceiling time reduction as an opportunity, the second high-frequency support mode is the number of continuations of the first time reduction without a new opening / closing execution mode, as in the case of the first time reduction result. It ends when a certain 10 game times are digested. When 10 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

Refer to the time saving distribution table 184 regardless of whether the result of the hit / fail determination process for the first hold information is the time saving result or the result of the hit / fail determination process for the second hold information is the time saving result. Will be done. Further, the same time saving distribution table 184 is referred to regardless of the set value. The time saving distribution table 184 is set so that the first time saving result is selected with a probability of 2/3 and the second time saving result is selected with a probability of 1/3, but these selection probabilities are arbitrary.

When the small hit result is selected in the hit / fail determination process, the type of the small hit result is selected by using the type random number counter C2. When the small hit distribution determination process for determining the type of the small hit result is executed, the small hit distribution table 185 stored in the main ROM 83 is referred to. FIG. 48 (e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the small hit distribution table 185. As shown in FIG. 48 (e), the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result are set in the small hit distribution table 185 as the result of the distribution determination processing for the small hit. ing.

All of these first to third small hit results trigger the transition to the distribution execution mode. In the distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 161 is opened as described above. The game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 161 flows into the V winning passage area 165c and is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169, so that the opening / closing execution mode is entered after the distribution execution mode. Then, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the support mode is set according to the type of small hit result. FIG. 48 (f) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination of the open / close execution mode and the support mode corresponding to each small hit result.

The first small hit result is a small hit result in which the number of executions of the round game in the open / close execution mode shifted by the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 169 in the distribution execution mode is one. In addition, the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

The second small hit result is a small hit result in which the number of executions of the round game in the open / close execution mode shifted by the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 169 in the distribution execution mode is four times. Further, the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the first high-frequency support mode. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode ends when 10 game times have been completed without a new opening / closing execution mode. When 10 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

The third small hit result is a small hit result in which the number of executions of the round game in the open / close execution mode shifted by the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 169 in the distribution execution mode is nine times. Further, the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the first high-frequency support mode. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode ends when 10 game times have been completed without a new opening / closing execution mode. When 10 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 48 (e), the small hit distribution table 185 shows that when the result of the hit / fail determination process for the first hold information is the small hit result and the result of the hit / fail judgment process for the second hold information is the small hit. It is referenced in any case that results. Further, the same small hit distribution table 185 is referred to regardless of the set value. In the small hit distribution table 185, the first small hit result is selected with a probability of 1/3, the second small hit result is selected with a probability of 1/3, and the third small hit result is selected with a probability of 1/3. However, these selection probabilities are arbitrary.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

First, the pending information acquisition process is executed (step S2701). FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the pending information. When a prize has been generated in the first operating port 33 (step S2801: YES), the number of first reserved information stored in the first area 172a to the fourth area 172d of the first special drawing area 171 is The storage process in the first special figure area 171 is executed on condition that the number of stored items is less than four (step S2802: NO) (step S2803). In the storage process, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is used as the first reserved information, and the first in the first area 172a to the fourth area 172d of the first special drawing area 171. Store the hold information in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas where the hold information is not stored. When the first hold information is acquired, the data setting for updating the display contents of the first special figure hold display unit 37c in accordance with the increase in the number of the first hold information this time is set. conduct. When the first hold information is acquired, the corresponding command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. As a result, the image of the first hold display area 42a in the symbol display device 41 is updated in correspondence with the new acquisition of the first hold information.

When a negative determination is made in step S2801, a negative determination is made in step S2802, or the process of step S2803 is executed, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated in the special winning device 151 (step S2804). .. When an affirmative judgment is made in step S2804, the second special figure is provided on the condition that none of the game times, the distribution execution mode, and the open / close execution mode is executed (step S2805: YES). Is executed in the execution area 174 (step S2806). In the storage process, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 and the type random number counter C2 is stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure as the second hold information. That is, the second hold information is acquired only in the situation where none of the game times triggered by the first hold information, the game times triggered by the second hold information, the distribution execution mode, and the open / close execution mode is executed. Will be done. Then, as will be described in detail later, regarding the execution of the pass / fail determination process, in other words, regarding the execution of the game round, the second hold information has priority over the first hold information as an execution trigger, so that the second hold information is the second. When it is stored in the execution area 174 for the special figure, the hit / fail determination process triggered by the second hold information is immediately executed, and the game round triggered by the second hold information is started. The second special figure hold display unit for notifying the number of the second hold information stored is not provided, and the symbol display device 41 further notifies the hold storage number of the second hold information. The image is not displayed.

Returning to the description of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 49), after executing the hold information acquisition process in step S2701, the special figure special electric address table stored in the main ROM 83 is read out (step S2702). In the special figure special electric address table, the start address of the program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is set. The special figure special electric counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the special figure special electric control process by the main MPU 82.

The special figure special electric counter can take values of "0" to "8", and each value of "0" to "8" corresponds to the start address of each process (step S2705 to step S2713). Specifically, when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "0", the special figure fluctuation start process (step S2705), which is a process for starting the effect for the game round, is executed, and the special figure special electric power is executed. When the value of the counter is "1", the special figure changing process (step S2706), which is a process for advancing the effect for the game round, is the execution target, and the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2". In some cases, the special figure finalizing process (step S2707), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, is the execution target, and when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "3", the distribution execution mode The distribution start process (step S2708), which is the process for setting the start of, is the execution target, and when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "4", various processes in the distribution execution mode are executed. (Step S2709) is the target of execution, and when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "5", the special electric start processing (step S2710) is a process for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode. Is the execution target, and when the value of the special power special electric counter is "6", the special electric power opening process (step S2711), which is a process for controlling the open state of the special electric power winning device 32, is the execution target. When the value of the special figure special electric counter is "7", the special electric special electric power counter processing (step S2712), which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric power winning device 32, is executed. When the value is "8", the special electric end process (step S2713), which is a process for controlling the ending of the open / close execution mode and the transition of the gaming state at the end of the open / close execution mode, is the execution target.

In the special figure special electric control process, after reading the special figure special electric address table (step S2702), the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table (step S2703), and the acquisition is obtained. Jump to the process indicated by the start address (step S2704). Hereinafter, each process of steps S2705-step S2713 will be described individually.

<Special figure fluctuation start processing>
First, the special figure variation start processing in step S2705 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, the data setting process is executed on condition that the first hold information or the second hold information is stored (step S2901: YES) (step S2902). In the data setting process, when the second reserved information is stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure, the first reserved information acquired earlier than the second reserved information in the first special figure area 171. The second reserved information stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure is set as the execution target regardless of whether or not is acquired. As a result, the second hold information can be prioritized over the first hold information as an execution trigger of the hit / miss determination process, and can be prioritized as an execution trigger of the game round. The second hold information stored in the execution area 174 for the second special drawing is deleted when the game round triggered by the second hold information is completed.

On the other hand, in the data setting process, when the second reserved information is not stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure, the data stored in the first area 172a of the first special figure area 171 is stored in the first special figure. Move to the execution area 173 for. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special drawing area 171 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 172a to 172d to the lower area side, and is a process of shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 172a to 172d in order, and the second area 172b → the first area 172a, the third area 172c → the third area. After the data in each area is shifted such as 2 area 172b, 4th area 172d → 3rd area 172c, the 4th area 172d is cleared to “0”. Further, in the data setting process, data is set so that the display contents of the first special figure reservation display unit 37c are updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold information on the first special figure side this time. Further, in the data setting process, a hold reduction command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93. As a result, the image of the first hold display area 42a in the symbol display device 41 is updated in correspondence with the decrease of the first hold information.

After executing the data setting process, the pass / fail determination process is executed (step S2903). In the hit / fail determination process, if the execution target of the current game round is the first hold information, the first hit / miss table 181 (see FIG. 48 (a)) corresponding to the current set value is read from the main ROM 83, and the current game is played. If the execution target of the times is the second hold information, the second pass / fail table 182 (see FIG. 48 (b)) corresponding to the current setting is read from the main ROM 83. As already explained, there is only one type of winning / failing lottery mode. After reading the pass / fail tables 181, 182, if the first hold information is the trigger for this game, the numerical information about the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special figure is displayed. When the second reserved information is read and the trigger of the game round is this time, the numerical information about the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure is read. Then, it is determined which of the game results set in 182 in the hit / fail table 181 matches the numerical information about the read random number counter C1.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is the jackpot result (step S2904: YES), the process for the jackpot result is executed (step S2905). In the process for the jackpot result, the same process as in steps S807 to S809 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment is executed. However, in the jackpot distribution determination process, the jackpot distribution table 183 shown in FIG. 48 (c) is referred to regardless of the type and set value of the reserved information that is the start target of the game round. In this case, when the first hold information is the start target of the game round, the numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special figure is set in the jackpot distribution table 183. Determine which of the jackpot results is in agreement. Further, when the second hold information is the start target of the game round, the numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure is set in the jackpot distribution table 183. Determine which of the jackpot results you have. In addition, in the flag set processing for big hits, when the low frequency big hit result is selected in the distribution judgment processing for big hits, the corresponding flag is set, and when the high frequency big hit result is selected, the flag is set. Sets the corresponding flag. Further, in the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, when the low frequency jackpot result is selected in the distribution determination process for the jackpot, the information of the stop result corresponding to the low frequency jackpot result is stored in the main RAM 84, and the frequency is high. When the jackpot result is selected, the information of the stop result corresponding to it is stored in the main RAM 84.

When the result of the pass / fail determination process is the time saving result (step S2906: YES), the process for the time saving result is executed (step S2907). In the process for shortening the time, the same process as in steps S811 to S813 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment is executed. However, in the time saving distribution determination process, the time saving distribution table 184 shown in FIG. 48 (d) is referred to regardless of the type and set value of the reserved information that is the start target of the game round. In this case, when the first hold information is the start target of the game round, the numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special figure is set in the time saving distribution table 184. Determine which of the time-saving results that have been given matches. Further, when the second hold information is the start target of the game round, the numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure is set in the time saving distribution table 184. Determine which of the time saving results matches. Further, in the flag setting process for time saving, when the first time saving result is selected in the distribution determination process for time saving, the corresponding flag is set, and when the second time saving result is selected, the flag is set. Sets the corresponding flag. Further, in the stop result setting process for the time saving result, when the first time saving result is selected in the distribution determination process for the time saving, the information of the stop result corresponding to the first time saving result is stored in the main RAM 84, and the second When the time saving result is selected, the information of the stop result corresponding to the time saving result is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is the small hit result (step S2908: YES), the distribution determination process for the small hit is executed (step S2909). In the small hit distribution determination process, the small hit distribution table 185 shown in FIG. 48 (e) is referred to regardless of the type and set value of the reserved information that is the start target of the game round. In this case, when the first hold information is the start target of the game round, the numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special figure is displayed in the small hit distribution table 185. It is determined which of the set small hit results matches. Further, when the second hold information is the start target of the game round, the numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure is set in the small hit distribution table 185. It is determined which of the small hit results that have been made matches.

After that, the flag setting process for small hits is executed (step S2910). In the flag set process for small hits, when the first small hit result is selected in the distribution determination process for small hits in step S2909, the corresponding flag is set and the second small hit result is obtained. If selected, the corresponding flag is set, and if the third small hit result is selected, the corresponding flag is set.

After that, the stop result setting process for the small hit result is executed (step S2911). In the stop result setting process for the small hit result, the small hit result in which the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 37b in the current game round is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In the stop result table for the small hit result, the type of the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the small hit result, and in step S2911 , Information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of the small hit result specified in step S2909 is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result, and is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the time saving result. .. It should be noted that the stop mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each small hit result, or a plurality of types of stop modes of the pattern may be set for at least a part of the small hit results. ..

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is a loss result (step S2908: NO), the stop result setting process for the loss result is executed (step S2912). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the side of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b that is the execution target of the game round in the current game round. Is specified from the stop result table for the disconnection result stored in advance in the main ROM 83, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the big hit result, the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the time saving result, and the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the small hit result. It is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern.

After executing any of the stop result setting processes, the variable display period specifying process is executed (step S2913). In the specification process of the variable display period, if the current situation is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, if a big hit result occurs in this game round, or the result of the hit / fail judgment process is a wrong result. If the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information to be executed at the same time corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display and the out-of-reach display occurs in the current game round, the fluctuation type counter CS at that time By collating the numerical information of the above with respect to the reach-compatible table in the table group for high-frequency support, the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is read out. In addition, when a small hit result occurs in this game, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS at that time is collated with the table corresponding to the small hit in the table group for high frequency support. Read out the information of the variable display period of the hit mode. In addition, when the big hit result, the missed reach display and the small hit result do not occur in this game round, if the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, the special figure side is set as the variable display period of this game round. The information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) of is read out. As a result, in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, it is possible to increase the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the second hold information. On the other hand, if the first hold information is the execution target of the game time when the big hit result, the missed reach display and the small hit result do not occur in this game time, the special figure side as the variable display period of this game time. Read the information for the middle period (specifically, 10 seconds).

If the current status is the low-frequency support mode, it corresponds to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information that is the execution target as well as the result of the jackpot result occurring in this game round or the result of the hit / fail judgment process being out of order. Numerical information corresponds to the occurrence of out-of-reach display, and if out-of-reach display occurs in this game, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is added to the reach-compatible table in the table group for low-frequency support. By collating with each other, the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is read out. In addition, when a small hit result occurs in this game, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS at that time is collated with the table corresponding to the small hit in the table group for low frequency support. Read out the information of the variable display period of the hit mode. In addition, when a time saving result occurs in this game round, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is collated with the table corresponding to the time saving in the table group for low frequency support, so that the time saving mode can be obtained. Read the information of the variable display period. In addition, if the big hit result, the missed reach display, the small hit result, and the time saving result do not occur in this game round, if the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, it is set as the variable display period of this game round. The information of the longest period (specifically, 10 minutes) on the special figure side is read out. As a result, in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to reduce the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the second hold information. On the other hand, when the big hit result, the missed reach display, the small hit result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round, and the first hold information is the execution target of the game round, three pieces are in the first special figure 171. If the game is started in the situation where the above first hold information is stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special drawing side is read out as the variation display period of this game. If the game is started in a situation where one or two first hold information is stored in the first special figure area 171, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS at that time is used for low frequency support. By collating with the table corresponding to the complete deviation result in the table group, the information of the variable display period corresponding to the complete deviation result is read out.

After executing the specification processing of the variation display period in step S2913, the variation command and the type command corresponding to the game times to be started this time are transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S2914). The change command includes the information of the change display period specified in step S2913, and the game times to be started is set to either the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. Contains information that indicates whether it is supported. The variable command does not include information on whether or not to execute reach display, but the variable display period when reach display occurs is longer than the variable display period when reach display does not occur. Since it is set, the sound / light side MPU 93 can specify the presence / absence of the reach display from the information of the variable display period. The type command includes information on whether or not the game times to be started this time correspond to the jackpot result, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, it is any type of jackpot result. Information indicating that is included. In addition, the type command includes information on whether or not the game times to be started this time correspond to the time saving result, and if it corresponds to the time saving result, any type of time saving result is supported. Contains information indicating whether or not. In addition, the type command includes information on whether or not the game times to be started this time correspond to the small hit result, and if it corresponds to the small hit result, any type of command. It contains information indicating whether it is a small hit result.

After that, the variable display of the pattern is started in the display unit of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, which is the target for starting the current game round (step S2915). Then, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S2916). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "1" corresponding to the special figure changing process (step S2706).

<Processing during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S2706 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 49) will be described.

When the value of the timer counter on the special figure side is 1 or more and the fluctuation display period of the current game times has not elapsed, the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b that are the execution targets of the current game times. When it is the update timing of the contents, the data for updating the display contents of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is set. As a result, the display contents of the patterns on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled are updated to the display contents in the following order.

The mode at the start of the variable display of the pattern on the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the update mode of the variable display of the pattern are performed in a certain mode regardless of the hit / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result, and the design display device. It is performed in a certain manner regardless of the content of the effect for the game round in 41. For example, when a predetermined plurality of update timings occur, the display content of the pattern goes around once and the display pattern in which the display order is a fixed order is repeatedly performed, and when the variable display period elapses, the display pattern is concerned. Regardless of the order in which the game is displayed, the stop result determined at the start of the game is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, when the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, when the fluctuation display period has elapsed, the final stop command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. After that, at the start of the game round, the patterns of the special figure display units 37a and 37b stored in the main RAM 84 in any of step S2905, step S2907, step S2911 and step S2912 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 51). Read the information on the stop mode. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the state where the pattern corresponding to the game result of the current game is displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. After that, the information of the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter on the special figure side. As a result, the measurement of the final stop period is started. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "2" corresponding to the special figure finalizing process (step S2707).

When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the final stop command, the sound / light side MPU 93 transmits the corresponding command to the display side MPU 103. When the display-side MPU 103 receives the command, the display-side MPU 103 confirms and displays the combination of symbols corresponding to the stop result of the current game on the symbol display device 41 over the final stop period.

<Processing during special drawing confirmation>
Next, the special figure finalizing process executed in step S2707 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 49) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52.

When the value of the timer counter on the special figure side is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S3001: YES), and the game result of this game is a jackpot result (step S3002: YES). ), The information corresponding to the opening period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special drawing side (step S3003), and the opening command is transmitted to the MPU 93 on the sound light side (step S3004). When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the opening command, the effect corresponding to the opening period is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 3 (step S3005). As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "5" corresponding to the special electric power start processing (step S2710).

If the game result of this game is not a jackpot result (step S3002: NO), the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 is executed in step S3006, the setting process for the time saving result is executed in step S3007, and the step The subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed in S3008. The subtraction process of the time reduction state counter 134 in step S3006 is the subtraction process of the time reduction state counter 134 in the first embodiment, except that the process of step S1601 is not executed because the high probability mode does not exist. It is the same as FIG. 30). Further, the setting process for the time saving result in step S3007 is the setting process for the time saving result in the first embodiment, except that the process of step S1302 is not executed because the high probability mode does not exist. It is the same as FIG. 25). Further, in the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 in step S3008, the process of step S1501 is not executed because the high probability mode does not exist, and the second high frequency support mode occurs when the ceiling time is shortened. Is the same as the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 in the first embodiment, except that the time saving state counter 134 is set with information of 10 times, which is the number of times of the first time saving continuation.

After that, it is determined whether or not the game result of this game is a small hit result (step S3009). When the game result of this game is a small hit result (step S3009: YES), the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S3010). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "3" corresponding to the distribution start processing (step S2708). When the game result of this game is not a small hit result (step S3009: NO), the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3011). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S2705).

<Processing for starting distribution>
Next, the distribution start process executed in step S2708 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 49) will be described.

First, the distribution start command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. When the sound light side MPU 93 receives the distribution start command from the main side MPU 82, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 and the sound output of the speaker unit 65 are executed so that the effect indicating that the distribution execution mode is in progress is executed. Take control. Further, the sound / light side MPU 93 transmits a distribution start command to the display side MPU 103. When the display side MPU 103 receives the distribution start command from the sound light side MPU 93, the display effect indicating that the distribution execution mode is in progress after the display effect indicating that the distribution execution mode has been started is executed. Is displayed and controlled so that the symbol display device 41 is executed.

After that, "5" is set in the distribution winning counter provided in the main RAM 84. The distribution winning counter triggers the switching of the distribution winning device 161 from the open state to the closed state in relation to the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 161 that is in the open state in the distribution execution mode. It is a counter for specifying by the main MPU 82. In addition, the set processing of the distribution opening period is executed. In the set processing of the distribution release period, the information corresponding to the 2 seconds is sent to the timer counter of the main RAM 84 so that the period in which the distribution winning device 161 is maintained in the open state is the distribution release period of 2 seconds. set. Then, in order to open the distribution winning device 161, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 163 for the distribution inlet is started. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "4" corresponding to the distribution process (step S2709).

<Distribution processing>
Next, the distribution process executed in step S2709 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 49) will be described.

When the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 of the distribution winning device 161, "1" is set in the V winning flag provided in the main RAM 84. The V winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the game ball has been detected by the V winning detection sensor 169. Further, the V winning command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. When the sound light side MPU 93 receives the V prize command from the main side MPU 82, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker so that the effect corresponding to the detection of the game ball by the V prize detection sensor 169 is executed. The sound output control of unit 65 is executed. Further, the sound light side MPU 93 transmits a V winning command to the display side MPU 103. When the display side MPU 103 receives the V prize command from the sound light side MPU 93, the display side MPU 103 displays and controls the symbol display device 41 so that a display effect indicating that the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 169 is executed. ..

In the distribution process, it is determined whether or not the distribution release period measured by using the timer counter of the main RAM 84 has elapsed in the situation where the distribution winning device 161 is in the open state. When the distribution opening period has not passed, the distribution winning device 161 is awarded a prize by determining whether or not the game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 168 or the V winning detection sensor 169 of the distribution winning device 161. Is determined whether or not has occurred. When a prize has been generated in the distribution winning device 161, the value of the distribution winning counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the distribution winning counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0".

When the distribution opening period has elapsed or when the value of the distribution winning counter after 1 subtraction is "0", the closing condition of the distribution winning device 161 is satisfied, so that the drive for the distribution entrance is satisfied. By stopping the output of the drive signal to the unit 163, the distribution winning device 161 is closed. After that, in order to wait for the end of the distribution execution mode until the game ball does not exist in the distribution winning device 161 surely, the timer counter of the main RAM 84 is set with the information corresponding to the standby period. The waiting period is set as a period longer than the longest period required for the game ball entered in the distribution winning device 161 to be detected by either the count detection sensor 168 or the V winning detection sensor 169. Specifically, it is set to 4 seconds. By waiting for the end of the distribution execution mode until the waiting period elapses in this way, the game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 161 immediately before the distribution winning device 161 is closed is tentatively detected as a V winning. When it is detected by the sensor 169, it can be treated as valid.

In the distribution process, it is determined whether or not the waiting period measured by the timer counter of the main RAM 84 has elapsed. When the waiting period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the V winning flag of the main RAM 84. When "1" is set in the V winning flag, the process for shifting to the open / close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the display start processing of the special display unit 191 provided on the game board 24 is executed. In the display start process, the display control of the special display unit 191 is performed so that the display state of the special display unit 191 becomes a predetermined display state corresponding to the execution of the open / close execution mode. After that, the same processing as in steps S3003 to S3005 in the processing during determination of the special figure (FIG. 52) is executed. As a result, the opening period of the open / close execution mode is started, and the value of the special electric power counter becomes "5" corresponding to the special electric power start processing (step S2710). It should be noted that the display mode of the special display unit 191 is set to a predetermined display state corresponding to the execution of the open / close execution mode when the process for shifting to the open / close execution mode is executed even in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 52). The special display unit 191 may be displayed and controlled.

On the other hand, if "1" is not set in the V winning flag of the main RAM 84, the flag clearing process is executed. In the flag clearing process, various flags of the main RAM 84 used in this game round are cleared to "0". For example, in the distribution execution mode, "1" is set in any of the first to third small hit flags of the main RAM 84, but the flag in which the "1" is set is cleared by "0". .. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S2705).

Here, if the game ball is not detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 even though the distribution execution mode is shifted, the process for shifting the support mode is not executed. As a result, if the open / close execution mode does not occur after shifting to the distribution execution mode, the support mode corresponding to the type of small hit result that triggered the distribution execution mode and the duration table of the game times are displayed. It is possible to prevent the setting from being performed. Then, after the end of the distribution execution mode, the support mode before the start of the distribution execution mode is maintained.

In the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, when the game round of the small hit result is executed, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is 1 in the subtraction process (step S3006) of the time-saving state counter 134. If the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the subtraction is 1 is "0", the process for shifting to the low frequency support mode is executed. Therefore, the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode or the second Even if the game round of the small hit result is started in the high frequency support mode, it is possible that the low frequency support mode is set in the distribution execution mode. In this case, if the open / close execution mode does not occur after the distribution execution mode, a new game round is executed in the low frequency support mode.

Even in the game times of the small hit result, the process of subtracting the value of the ceiling counter 131 by 1 is executed in the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (step S3008), and the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the subtraction of 1 is "0". In the case of ", the process for shifting to the second high frequency support mode is executed with the ceiling time reduction as a trigger, so even if the game round of the small hit result is started in the low frequency support mode, the distribution is executed. The mode may be the second high frequency support mode. In this case, if the open / close execution mode does not occur after the distribution execution mode, a new game round is executed in the situation of the second high frequency support mode.

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric start processing executed in step S2710 of the special electric special electric control process (FIG. 49) will be described.

The opening / closing number setting process is executed on condition that the value of the timer counter on the special figure side is "0", that is, the opening period has elapsed. In this case, if the current game result is a low-frequency jackpot result or a high-frequency jackpot result, "10" is set in the round counter of the main RAM 84, and if the current game result is the first small hit result, the main RAM 84 Set "1" to the round counter of, and if the result of this game is the result of the second small hit, set "4" to the round counter of the main RAM 84, and if the result of this game is the result of the third small hit. For example, "9" is set in the round counter of the main RAM 84. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the open / close execution mode by the main MPU 82. In addition, information on the open duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special drawing side. Further, "10" is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 84. The winning counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of the maximum winning number on the main MPU 82. Further, the special electric power winning device 32 is opened by outputting the drive signal to the special electric power driving unit 32b. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "6" corresponding to the processing during opening of the special electric power (step S2711).

<Processing while the special electric power is open>
Next, the process during opening of the special electric power, which is executed in step S2711 of the special electric power control process (FIG. 49), will be described.

When the value of the timer counter on the special figure side is "0", that is, when the open continuation period has elapsed, the value of the round counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 and the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for special electric power is transmitted. By stopping the output, the special electric winning device 32 is closed. Further, when the game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32, the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the winning counter after 1 subtraction is "0", the main RAM 84 The special electric winning device 32 is closed by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter and stopping the output of the driving signal to the special electric driving unit 32b. Further, when the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1, if the value of the round counter after the subtraction is 1 or more, the interval period information (specifically, 3 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special figure side. , The value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "7" corresponding to the special electric closed processing (step S2712). On the other hand, if the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is "0", the ending period information (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special figure side, and the ending command is transmitted to the MPU 93 on the sound light side. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 2. As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "8" corresponding to the special electric power end processing (step S2713). When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the ending command, the effect corresponding to the ending period is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

<Processing while the special electric train is closed>
Next, the special power closing process executed in step S2712 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 49) will be described.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, when the interval period has elapsed, the information on the open duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special figure side timer counter. .. Further, "10" is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 84. Further, the special electric power winning device 32 is opened by outputting the drive signal to the special electric power driving unit 32b. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1. As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "6" corresponding to the processing during opening of the special electric power (step S2711).

<Special train end processing>
Next, the special electric power termination process executed in step S2713 of the special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 49) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, when the ending period has elapsed (step S3101: YES), the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is the high-frequency jackpot result, the first If it is a 2 small hit result or a 3rd small hit result (step S3102: YES), "1" is set in the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3103), and the second of the main RAM 84 is set. The high frequency flag is cleared to "0" (step S3104). The first high-frequency flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode as described above, and the second high-frequency flag is the support mode as described above. Is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not is the second high frequency support mode. When the first high frequency flag is set to "1" and the second high frequency flag is cleared to "0", the support mode becomes the first high frequency support mode.

After that, the information of "10" which is the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 (step S3105). The time saving state counter 134 is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuations of the high frequency support mode (first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode) by the main MPU 82. As a result, the first high frequency support mode is maintained until the ten game times, which is the number of times of the first time reduction continuation, is exhausted. In the first high frequency support mode, the special winning device 151 is frequently opened. When the game ball enters the special winning device 151, the small hit result is selected with a high probability, and the small hit result is selected to execute the distribution execution mode. Then, in the distribution execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode is generated when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 of the distribution winning device 161.

Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination process is the first time saving result and the second high frequency support mode is set, the information of "10" which is the first time saving continuation number is set in the time saving state counter 134. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail determination process is the second time saving result and the second high frequency support mode is set, the time saving state counter 134 is set to the second time saving continuation more than the first time saving continuation number. Information of "15" which is the number of times is set. That is, when the second high frequency support mode is set due to the second time saving result, the time saving continues a larger number of times than when the first high frequency support mode is set triggered by the big hit result or the small hit result. The number of times is set. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage that the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes the second time saving result.

On the other hand, when the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a low frequency big hit result or a first small hit result (step S3102: NO), the first high frequency flag and the second high of the main RAM 84 Both of the frequency flags are cleared to "0" (step S3106). Further, the time saving state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3107). As a result, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

When the process of step S3105 or the process of step S3107 is executed, the state specification command transmission process is executed (step S3108). In the transmission process, a state designation command corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 determined by the processes of steps S3102 to S3107 is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93. The sound / light side MPU 93 executes a process for causing the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect corresponding to the content of the received state designation command.

After that, the information of "500" corresponding to the fixed number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S3109). Then, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3110). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S2705).

As described above, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, information on the fixed ceiling number of 500 times is set in the ceiling counter 131. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the result of the winning / failing determination process is a big hit result, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode when the game round is completed, and when the result of the winning / failing determination process is a small hit result. Shifts to the open / close execution mode when the distribution execution mode in which the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 169 occurs ends, not when the game round ends. That is, there are a plurality of types of routes that shift to the open / close execution mode. In this configuration, when the open / close execution mode ends, the ceiling counter 131 is configured to set information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, so that the open / close execution mode is generated regardless of the route. It is possible to consolidate the process of setting the information on the number of fixed ceilings into one process. Therefore, while reducing the program capacity, it is possible to set the information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, in the ceiling counter 131 when the opening / closing execution mode is generated.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a power failure monitoring process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. The power failure monitoring process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

When a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power failure monitoring board 85 (step S3201: YES), the game result is that the current state is in the open / close execution mode and the transition of the open / close execution mode is triggered. Is a low-frequency jackpot result or a first small hit result (step S3202 and step S3203: YES), and the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of "800" corresponding to the number of special ceilings (step S3204). The number of special ceilings is larger than the number of fixed ceilings set in the ceiling counter 131 in step S3109 of the special electric termination process (FIG. 53). On the other hand, when the current state is not the open / close execution mode (step S3202: NO), or even if the current state is the open / close execution mode, the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode is the high frequency jackpot result, the second small. If either the hit result or the third small hit result (step S3202: NO), the process of step S3204 is not executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S3202, a negative determination is made in step S3203, or the process of step S3204 is executed, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3205), and the main RAM 84 The checksum of the above is calculated, the calculated checksum is stored in the main RAM 84 (step S3206), and the output port clearing process is further executed (step S3207). After that, the progress of the process is waited until the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped.

In the configuration in which the fixed ceiling count is set in the ceiling counter 131 when the open / close execution mode ends as in the present embodiment, the open / close execution mode is started when the low-frequency jackpot result is triggered, or the first When the distribution execution mode is generated triggered by the small hit result and the opening / closing execution mode is started by detecting the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 169 in the distribution execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode is set. If the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is performed when the operating power supply is stopped and the operating power supply is restarted, the set value is set. In the update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119), the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress is cleared as in the first embodiment, whereas the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game will be restarted in a situation where the number of remaining ceilings is small, while gaining the benefit of the opening / closing execution mode until the supply of the operating power is stopped. In particular, when the open / close execution mode triggered by the low-frequency jackpot result or the first small hit result is executed, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode, so that the low-frequency jackpot result or the first small hit result or the first small hit result. Even if the above-mentioned fraudulent act is performed in the open / close execution mode triggered by the hit result, no disadvantage occurs to the fraudulent person in relation to the support mode. On the other hand, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the open / close execution mode triggered by the low-frequency big hit result or the first small hit result, the ceiling counter 131 before the supply of operating power is stopped. Information of "800" corresponding to the number of special ceilings is set in. This makes it possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent activities.

Furthermore, when the above fraudulent activity is performed, the number of special ceilings, which is a number larger than the number of fixed ceilings set when the opening / closing execution mode ends, is set in the ceiling counter 131. Therefore, if the above-mentioned fraudulent activity is committed, a penalty can be given to it.

On the other hand, even in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation", and "setting confirmation operation" is executed, and the gaming machine main body 12 When the supply of the operating power is started in the open state, the ceiling counter 131 is set with the information of "500", which is the fixed number of ceilings, in step S114 in the main process (FIG. 13). As a result, if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the open / close execution mode triggered by the low-frequency jackpot result or the first small hit result, even though the above-mentioned fraudulent activity has not been performed. , The operating power is supplied in a situation where the game hall administrator does not execute any of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation", and "setting confirmation operation" and the game machine main body 12 is in the open state. By performing the operation of starting the operation, it is possible to set the information of "500", which is the fixed number of ceilings, in the ceiling counter 131 as in the case where the open / close execution mode ends.

<7th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the mode of selecting the variable display period of the game times is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a process during specific determination in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

When the value of the timer counter on the special figure side is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S3301: YES), and the game result of this game is a jackpot result (step S3302: YES). ), The information corresponding to the opening period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special drawing side (step S3303), and the opening command is transmitted to the MPU 93 on the sound light side (step S3304). When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the opening command, the effect corresponding to the opening period is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

After that, information on the fixed ceiling number of 500 times is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S3305). That is, when the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the open / close execution mode is started, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131. In the case of a configuration in which the fixed ceiling count is set in the ceiling counter 131 during the open / close execution mode or when the open / close execution mode ends, instead of when the open / close execution mode is started, the operation is performed after the open / close execution mode is started. If a fraudulent act is performed so that the set value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the power supply is stopped and the operating power supply is restarted, the set value update process (step S117) is performed. In step S117) or the RAM clearing process (step S119), the information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress is cleared as described above, whereas the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained, so that the operating power is supplied. While gaining the benefit of the open / close execution mode until is stopped, there is a risk that the game will be restarted in a situation where the number of remaining ceilings is small. On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be neutralized.

After that, the game count counter provided in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3306). The game count counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the number of times the game has been executed, which was started after the open / close execution mode has ended, has reached the reference number. The reference number of times is the number of times that the last digit of the number of times the game is executed becomes the reference number. "7" is set as the reference number. Therefore, the number of executions of the game times started after the opening / closing execution mode ends is "7", "17", "27", "37", "47", "57", "67", "77", The number of times the game is executed, such as "87", "97", "107", etc., in which the last digit is "7", which is started after the open / close execution mode is finished, is the reference number of times. It becomes. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S3307). As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "3" corresponding to the special electric power start processing (step S609).

When the game result of the current game times is not the jackpot result (step S3302: NO), the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 is executed (step S3308). The content of the process is the same as the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 in the first embodiment. After that, the setting process for the time saving result is executed (step S3309). The content of the process is the same as the setting process (FIG. 25) for the time saving result in the first embodiment. After that, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed (step S3310). The content of the process is the same as the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 in the first embodiment. After that, the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 is executed (step S3311). The content of the process is the same as the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high-probability state counter 133 in the first embodiment. After that, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3312). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S606).

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying a variable display period in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

First, the value of the game count counter of the main RAM 84 is added by 1 (step S3401). That is, the game count counter is cleared to "0" in step S3306 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 55) when the open / close execution mode is started, and is displayed in a variable manner every time the game is started regardless of the game state. 1 is added in step S3401 in the period specifying process (FIG. 56). In addition, the value of the game count counter is either when the transition to the second high-frequency support mode occurs triggered by the time reduction result or when the transition to the second high-frequency support mode occurs triggered by the ceiling time reduction. However, it is not updated including clearing "0". As a result, the main MPU 82 can measure the number of game times executed after the open / close execution mode is terminated by using the game number counter. Even when the set value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed in the main process (FIG. 13) when the supply of operating power is started, the game count counter of the main RAM 84 is also executed. Is cleared to "0". As a result, if the set value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the main side until the open / close execution mode is newly generated. The MPU 82 can measure the number of game times executed after the start of supply of operating power by using the game number counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter of the main RAM 84 is the reference count (step S3402). As already explained, the reference number is the number of times that the last digit of the number of times the game is executed becomes the reference number (specifically, "7"). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3402, it is determined whether or not the jackpot result has been selected in the winning / failing determination process of the current game round (step S3403).

When the jackpot result is selected (step S3403: YES), the table for the jackpot result is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S3404). In the situation where the variation display period selection process is executed in step S3411 with reference to the jackpot result table, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is collated with the jackpot result table. , Read out the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode. There are a plurality of types of variable display periods of the reach display mode, but any of the variable display periods of the reach display mode is longer than the variable display period when the reach display does not occur. When the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is selected, the reach display is surely generated by the symbol display device 41 as in the first embodiment.

If the jackpot result is not selected (step S3403: NO), the non-reach table is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S3405). In the situation where the variation display period selection process is executed in step S3411 with reference to the reach non-occurrence table, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is collated with the reach non-occurrence table. As a result, the information of the variable display period in the mode in which the reach display does not occur is read out. There are a plurality of types of variable display periods in which the reach display does not occur, but any of the plurality of types of variable display periods is shorter than the variable display period when the reach display occurs. When the information of the variable display period in the mode in which the reach display does not occur is selected, the reach display is surely not generated in the symbol display device 41 as in the first embodiment.

When a negative determination is made in step S3402 and "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3406: YES), the table group for high probability is changed from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. (Step S3407). The mode of selecting the variable display period when the table group for high probability is referred to is the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, when "1" is not set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3406: NO), "1" is set in either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84. If it is set (step S3408: YES), the table group for high frequency support is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S3409). The mode of selecting the variable display period when the table group for high frequency support is referred to is the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, when "1" is not set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3406: NO), "1" is set in both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84. Is not set (step S3408: NO), the table group for low frequency support is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S3410). The mode of selecting the variable display period when the table group for low frequency support is referred to is the same as that of the first embodiment.

When the process of step S3404, the process of step S3405, the process of step S3407, the process of step S3409, or the process of step S3410 is executed, the variable display period selection process is performed with reference to the table group read in any of these processes. Is executed (step S3411). The content of the selection process has already been described. Then, the information of the fluctuation display period selected in step S3411 is set in the special figure side timer counter of the main RAM 84 (step S3412). The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter on the special figure side is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

According to the above configuration, in the game round in which the number of executions after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the reference number of times, the reach display does not occur on the symbol display device 41 unless a big hit result is obtained. In this case, in the reference number of game times, the occurrence of the jackpot result is confirmed when the reach display occurs. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect for the game times in the symbol display device 41 in relation to the number of times the game times are executed.

The game count counter for measuring the reference number of times is cleared to "0" when the open / close execution mode is executed, and when the second high frequency support mode occurs triggered by the time saving result and when the ceiling time is shortened. "0" is not cleared in any case when the second high frequency support mode occurs. As a result, even if the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction result or the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs after the opening / closing execution mode ends, after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is possible to make the reach display occur only when a big hit result is obtained in the game times in which the number of executions is the reference number of times. Therefore, the game times, which is the reference number of times, is easy for the player to understand.

The symbol display device 41 may display the number of times the game has been executed since the opening / closing execution mode has ended. In this case, the display of the number of executions of the game times on the symbol display device 41 is when the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction result occurs or when the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs. Do not clear "0" in any of the above. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the game times, which is the reference number of times.

<8th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the subtraction processing of the time saving state counter 134 executed by the main MPU 82 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3501). When "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S3501: YES), the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 is terminated without executing the processes after step S3502. In the high-probability state, the support mode becomes the first high-frequency support mode, but since the end trigger of the high-probability state is specified by using the high-probability state counter 133 as already explained, the high-probability flag is set to "1". If is set, the process for subtracting the value of the time saving state counter 134 is not executed.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag and "1" is set in the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3502: YES), that is, the low probability mode and the first high. In the frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 (step S3503), and the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S3504: YES). , The first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3505). As a result, the first high-frequency support mode ends and the low-frequency support mode is set. That is, the time saving state ends and the normal game state is set.

After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S3506). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has ended is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. Upon receiving the state designation command, the sound / light side MPU 93 ends the execution of the effect corresponding to the time saving state in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and produces an effect corresponding to the normal gaming state. Let's get started.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag and "1" is set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3507: YES), that is, the low probability mode and the second high In the frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 (step S3508), and the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S3509: YES). , The second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3510). As a result, the second high-frequency support mode ends and the low-frequency support mode is set. That is, the time saving state ends and the normal game state is set. In addition, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S3511). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has ended is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. Upon receiving the state designation command, the sound / light side MPU 93 ends the execution of the effect corresponding to the time saving state in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and produces an effect corresponding to the normal gaming state. Let's get started.

After that, the set processing of the variable selection state counter 132 is executed (step S3512). In this case, information of 50 times, which is a predetermined switching reference number, is set in the fluctuation selection state counter 132 of the main RAM 84. Even in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the game round is digested once in a situation where the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high probability mode, the variable selection state counter 132 at the end of the game round The value is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented by 1 in a situation where the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes “0”, the main RAM 84 "1" is set in the reach high frequency status flag of. When the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the variation display period identification process is performed as in the first embodiment (FIG. 21). The variable display period of the game times is selected by referring to the table group for high reach frequency.

In other words, if the game times of the predetermined switching reference number are exhausted in the low probability mode after either the time saving state triggered by the time saving result or the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving is completed, low frequency support is provided. In the mode, the reach high frequency state in which the table group for high reach frequency is referenced is set. Then, in the high reach state, the reach display is selected when the result is different from the situation in which the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are in the same as in the first embodiment and the reach is not in the high frequency state. In addition to increasing the probability of being reached, the variable display period when the reach display is selected tends to be longer than in the situation where the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are used and the reach display is not in the high frequency state. Therefore, if the game times of the predetermined switching reference number are exhausted after either the time saving state triggered by the time saving result or the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving is completed, the reach high frequency state occurs. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In the short time state, the digestion efficiency of the game times is high, whereas in the high reach state, the digestion efficiency of the game times is low. In this case, it is possible to prevent the digestion efficiency of the game times from becoming excessively high by causing the reach high frequency state to occur after the time saving state is completed.

When the time saving state ends, the reach high frequency state does not occur immediately, but when the game times of the predetermined switching reference number are exhausted after the time saving state ends, the reach high frequency state is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the digestion efficiency of the game from suddenly changing from a high state to a low state. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while not giving the player a sense of discomfort.

<9th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration when the time saving result or the ceiling time saving occurs in the time saving state is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a setting process for a time saving result in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

When the game result of the current game times is a time saving result (step S3601: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3602). Then, when "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S3602: YES), the setting process for the time saving result is terminated without executing the processes after step S3603. That is, even if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) is selected in the winning / failing determination process of the game times executed in the situation of the high probability mode, the second high frequency support is triggered by the time saving result. The time saving result is invalidated without setting the mode.

Here, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), as described above, the setting process (FIG. 58) for the time saving result is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. As a result, in the final game round in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. When the value of the high-probability state counter 133 becomes "0", the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 58) is executed before the high-probability flag and the first high-frequency flag are cleared to "0". Become. Then, when the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 58) is executed at that timing, the high probability flag is still set to "1", so that the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is set. Is not done. Therefore, in the game times in which the hit / fail determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time saving result. Further, in the process of determining the special figure (FIG. 22), such an effect is executed in the process of executing the setting process (FIG. 58) for the time saving result before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. It can be realized by setting.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag (step S3602: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3603). That is, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the first high frequency support mode. When the support mode is not the first high frequency support mode (step S3603: NO), the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3604), and the support mode is the first high frequency support mode. If there is (step S3603: YES), the process of step S3604 is not executed. As a result, when the time saving result is obtained in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode are maintained, and the time saving result is obtained in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode. If this happens, the low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode are maintained, and if the time-saving result is obtained in the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, the low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode are set.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3603 or when the process of step S3604 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current time saving result is the first time saving result (step S3605). When the time saving result this time is the first time saving result (step S3605: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is "100" or more corresponding to the number of times of the first time saving continuation. (Step S3606). When the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is less than the value of the first time reduction continuation number (step S3606: NO), the information of "100" corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 (step S3607). ..

After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S3608). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time saving state has been started or the first time saving continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93.

If the process of step S3608 is executed after the process of step S3607 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is not the time-saving state, the state specification command indicates that the time-saving state of the first time-saving continuation number is started. Contains information. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 execute an effect indicating that the time reduction state of the first time reduction continuation number is started. Execute the process to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, the combination of the first time saving symbols ("1, 2, 3") is stopped and displayed. Then, after these stop results are stopped and displayed, the symbol display device 41 displays an image showing that the time saving state occurs and an image showing the first time saving continuation number. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. The display of the image showing that the time saving state occurs in the secured area and the image showing the number of times of the first time saving continuation is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size when the display of the image ends.

If the process of step S3608 is executed after the process of step S3607 is executed in the situation where the current game state is the time saving state, it indicates that the first time saving continuation number has been reset to the state specification command. Contains information. When the sound light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the effect indicating that the first time reduction continuation number has been reset is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Execute the process to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, the combination of the first time-saving generated symbols (“1 ・ 2 ・ 3”), and the combination of the second time-saving generated symbols (“3”).・ 4.1 ”) and the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols, which is a combination of symbols other than the out-of-reach symbol combination, is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the confirmation display over the final stop period is completed, an image showing that the time saving continuation number in the time saving state is actually reset and an image showing the first time saving continuation number are displayed. Is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. In the secured area, the display of the image showing that the time saving continuation number in the time saving state has been reset and the image showing the reset first time saving continuation number is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size when the display of the image ends.

When the current time saving result is the second time saving result (step S3605: NO), the time saving state counter 134 is provided with the information of "150" corresponding to the second time saving continuation number regardless of the current value of the time saving state counter 134. Set (step S3609). After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S3610). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time saving state has been started or the second time saving continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93.

If the process of step S3610 is executed after the process of step S3609 is executed in a situation where the current game state is not the time-saving state, the state specification command indicates that the time-saving state of the second time-saving continuation number is started. Contains information. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 execute an effect indicating that the time reduction state of the second time reduction continuation number is started. Execute the process to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, the combination of the second time saving symbols ("3.4.1") is stopped and displayed. Then, after these stop results are stopped and displayed, the symbol display device 41 displays an image showing that the time saving state occurs and an image showing the second time saving continuation number. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. The display of the image showing that the time saving state occurs in the secured area and the image showing the number of times of the second time saving continuation is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size when the display of the image ends.

If the process of step S3610 is executed after the process of step S3609 is executed in the situation where the current game state is the time saving state, it indicates that the second time saving continuation number has been reset to the state specification command. Contains information. When the sound light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the effect indicating that the second time reduction continuation number has been reset is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Execute the process to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, the combination of the first time-saving generated symbols (“1 ・ 2 ・ 3”), and the combination of the second time-saving generated symbols (“3”).・ 4.1 ”) and the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols, which is a combination of symbols other than the out-of-reach symbol combination, is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the confirmation display over the final stop period is completed, an image showing that the time saving continuation number in the time saving state is actually reset and an image showing the second time saving continuation number are displayed. Is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. In the secured area, the display of the image showing that the time saving continuation number in the time saving state has been reset and the image showing the reset second time saving continuation number is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size when the display of the image ends.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3701). Then, when "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S3701: YES), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S3702. That is, in the game times executed in the high probability mode, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted, so that the ceiling time is shortened. Nor.

Here, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the subtraction process (FIG. 59) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133 as described above. As a result, in the final game round in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. When the value of the high-probability state counter 133 becomes "0", the subtraction process (FIG. 59) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the high-probability flag and the first high-frequency flag are cleared to "0". Become. When the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 59) is executed at that timing, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted because the high probability flag is still set to "1". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being executed in the game times in which the hit / fail determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode. Further, in the process of determining the special figure (FIG. 22), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 59) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24). It can be realized by setting.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag (step S3701: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S3702). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S3702: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S3703. Similar to the first embodiment, the process of setting information in the ceiling counter 131 is a situation in which none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation", and "setting confirmation operation" is executed, and the gaming machine main body. Step S114 when the supply of the operating power is started in the state where 12 is in the open state, step S122 when the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs when the supply of the operating power is started, and the opening / closing execution are executed. Only in step S1005 when the mode is started, after the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0", the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" unless any of the above processes is executed. .. On the other hand, the ceiling time reduction occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented by 1 and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" in a situation where the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more. In this case, if the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" as described above (step S3702: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S3703. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0", and a time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs, and the game times of the number of times of the time saving continuation are digested without the big hit result occurring in the time saving state. When the time reduction state ends and the game state becomes the normal game state, the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction does not occur even if the digestion of the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur is repeated thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessive time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S3702: YES), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 (step S3703), and whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the 1 subtraction is "0". (Step S3704). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S3704: YES), the second high frequency flag is set to "1" regardless of whether the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1". 1 ”is set (step S3705). As a result, when the ceiling time is shortened in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are maintained, and the ceiling time is shortened in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In some cases, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are set. The low-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode occur after the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low-probability result is completed, and when 100 game times, which is the number of continuations of the first time reduction, are exhausted. Since the first high-frequency support mode ends, the ceiling time reduction that occurs when 500 game times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is exhausted in the low-probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends, is the first high-frequency support mode. It does not occur in the situation.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is "100" or more corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number (step S3706). When the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is less than the value of the first time reduction continuation number (step S3706: NO), the information of "100" corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 (step S3707). ..

After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S3708). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time saving state has been started or the first time saving continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93.

If the process of step S3708 is executed after the process of step S3707 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is not the time saving state, the state specification command indicates that the time saving state of the first time saving continuation number is started. Contains information. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 execute an effect indicating that the time reduction state of the first time reduction continuation number is started. Execute the process to make it. Since the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs in the game round in which neither the jackpot result nor the time saving result occurs, the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41 combine the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, the first time saving. A combination of out-of-design symbols (including a combination of out-of-reach symbols) that is a combination of symbols other than the combination of generated symbols ("1 ・ 2 ・ 3") and the combination of the second time-saving generated symbols ("3.4.1"). Is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the confirmation display over the final stop period is completed, an image showing that a time saving state is generated triggered by the ceiling time saving and an image showing the number of times of the first time saving continuation are displayed. .. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. The display of the image showing that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs in the secured area and the image showing the number of times of the first time saving continuation is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size when the display of the image ends.

If the process of step S3708 is executed after the process of step S3707 is executed in the situation where the current gaming state is the time saving state, it indicates that the first time saving continuation number has been reset to the state specification command. Contains information. When the sound light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the effect indicating that the first time reduction continuation number has been reset is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Execute the process to make it. Since the resetting of the first time reduction continuation number triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs in the game times in which neither the jackpot result nor the time reduction result occurs, the symbols corresponding to the jackpot results in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41 Combination of symbols other than the combination of the first time-saving symbols ("1 ・ 2 ・ 3") and the combination of the second time-saving symbols ("3.4.1"). (Including combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the confirmation display over the final stop period is completed, the image showing that the time saving state is generated triggered by the ceiling time saving and the first time saving continuation number are reset. The image shown is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. The display of the image showing that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs in the secured area and the image showing that the first time saving continuation number is reset is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size when the display of the image ends.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3706 or the process of step S3708 is executed, the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3709). As a result, when the ceiling time reduction occurs, the reach high frequency state ends regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode is set triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

Here, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the ceiling counter 131 subtraction process (FIG. 59) is executed after the time saving result setting process (FIG. 58) is executed, and the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted. In the process (FIG. 59), even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 is "0", if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is "100" or more, the processes of steps S3707 and S3708 are not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first time reduction continuation number from being reset due to the ceiling time reduction in the game times that resulted in the first time reduction result or the second time reduction result. As a result, it is possible to prevent the resetting of the time reduction continuation number triggered by the time reduction result and the resetting of the time reduction continuation number triggered by the ceiling time reduction from being executed in duplicate. In particular, if the second time reduction continuation number is reset triggered by the second time reduction result and then the first time reduction continuation number is reset triggered by the ceiling time reduction, the time reduction continuation number will decrease. With the above configuration, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring.

Next, the subsequent gaming state when the time saving result or the ceiling time saving occurs in the time saving state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 60. FIG. 60 (a) shows a period in which the open / close execution mode is set, FIG. 60 (b) shows a period in which “1” is set in the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84, and FIG. 60 (c) shows a main period. The period in which "1" is set in the second high frequency flag of the side RAM 84 is shown, FIG. 60 (d) shows the state of the time saving state counter 134, and FIG. 60 (e) shows the timing when the first time saving result occurs. 60 (f) shows the timing when the second time reduction result occurs, and FIG. 60 (g) shows the timing when the ceiling time reduction occurs.

First, a case where the second time saving result occurs in the middle of the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 60 (e) at the timing of t1, when the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes the first time saving result and the game round in which the hit / fail determination process is executed ends, it is shown in FIG. 60 (c). As shown in FIG. 60 (d), "1" is set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84, and "100" information corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60 (d). NS. As a result, the time saving state of the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode is set, and the first time saving continuation number is set as the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state. Then, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 60 (d) by repeatedly executing the game times that do not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

After that, when the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 1 or more and the timing of t2 is the second high frequency support mode, the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes the second time saving result as shown in FIG. 60 (f). When the game round in which the hit / fail determination process is executed ends, the information of "150" corresponding to the second time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60 (d). As a result, in the middle of the time saving state, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state increases from the number of times less than the number of times of the first time saving continuation to the number of times of the second time saving continuation.

Next, a case where a ceiling time reduction occurs in the middle of the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, but the profit due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction is not given will be described.

As shown in FIG. 60 (f) at the timing of t3, when the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes the second time saving result and the game round in which the hit / fail determination process is executed ends, it is shown in FIG. 60 (c). As shown in FIG. 60 (d), "1" is set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84, and "150" information corresponding to the second time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60 (d). NS. As a result, the time saving state of the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode is set, and the second time saving continuation number is set as the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state. Then, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 60 (d) by repeatedly executing the game times that do not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (g), the ceiling time reduction occurs at the timing of t4 when the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is 1 or more and the second high frequency support mode is t4. In this case, the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is larger than the first time reduction continuation number set when the ceiling time reduction occurs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60 (d), the value of the time saving state counter 134 is maintained as it is. Even if the ceiling time reduction occurs in the middle of the time reduction state, the remaining number of continuations at that time in the time reduction state is larger than the first time reduction continuation number set triggered by the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction. The occurrence of ceiling time reduction is invalidated.

Next, a case where a ceiling time reduction occurs in the middle of the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode and a profit is given by the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction will be described.

As shown in FIG. 60 (e) at the timing of t5, when the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes the first time saving result and the game round in which the hit / fail determination process is executed ends, it is shown in FIG. 60 (c). As shown in FIG. 60 (d), "1" is set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84, and "100" information corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60 (d). NS. As a result, the time saving state of the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode is set, and the first time saving continuation number is set as the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state. Then, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 60 (d) by repeatedly executing the game times that do not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (g), the ceiling time reduction occurs at the timing of t6 when the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is 1 or more and the second high frequency support mode is t6. In this case, the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is smaller than the first time reduction continuation number set when the ceiling time reduction occurs. Therefore, at the timing of t6 when the ceiling time reduction occurs, the information of "100" corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60 (d). As a result, in the middle of the time saving state, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state increases from the number of times less than the number of times of the first time saving continuation to the number of times of the first time saving continuation.

Next, a case where the first time saving result occurs in the middle of the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode will be described.

When the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result is terminated as shown in FIG. 60 (a) at the timing of t7, the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "" as shown in FIG. 60 (b). 1 ”is set, and as shown in FIG. 60 (d), the information of“ 100 ”corresponding to the number of continuations of the first time reduction is set in the time reduction state counter 134. As a result, the time saving state of the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode is set, and the first time saving continuation number is set as the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state. Then, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 60 (d) by repeatedly executing the game times that do not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

After that, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 1 or more, and the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes the first time saving result as shown in FIG. 60 (e) at the timing of t8 which is the first high frequency support mode. In this case, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is smaller than the number of times of the first time saving continuation set when the first time saving result is generated. Therefore, when the game round in which the result of the hit / fail determination process is the first time saving result ends, the time saving state counter 134 receives information of "100" corresponding to the first time saving continuation number as shown in FIG. 60 (d). Set. As a result, in the middle of the time saving state, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state increases from the number of times less than the number of times of the first time saving continuation to the number of times of the first time saving continuation. In addition, the support mode in the time-saving state is not changed to the second high-frequency support mode, but the first high-frequency support mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second high-frequency support mode, is maintained. With the occurrence of the time saving result, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state in the first high frequency support mode is set to the first time saving continuation number.

Next, a case where the second time saving result occurs in the middle of the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode will be described.

When the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result is terminated as shown in FIG. 60 (a) at the timing of t9, the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "" as shown in FIG. 60 (b). 1 ”is set, and as shown in FIG. 60 (d), the information of“ 100 ”corresponding to the number of continuations of the first time reduction is set in the time reduction state counter 134. As a result, the time saving state of the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode is set, and the first time saving continuation number is set as the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state. Then, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 60 (d) by repeatedly executing the game times that do not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

After that, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 1 or more, and at the timing of t10, which is the first high frequency support mode, the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes the second time saving result as shown in FIG. 60 (f). The number of times of the second time reduction continuation set when the second time reduction result occurs is larger than the number of times of the first time reduction continuation of the time reduction state set when the open / close execution mode ends with the 5R low probability result. be. Therefore, when the game round in which the result of the hit / fail determination process is the second time saving result ends, the time saving state counter 134 receives the information of "150" corresponding to the second time saving continuation number as shown in FIG. 60 (d). Set. As a result, in the middle of the time saving state, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state increases from the number of times less than the number of times of the first time saving continuation to the number of times of the second time saving continuation. In addition, the support mode in the time-saving state is not changed to the second high-frequency support mode, but the first high-frequency support mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second high-frequency support mode, is maintained. With the occurrence of the time saving result, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state in the first high frequency support mode is set to the second time saving continuation number.

With the above configuration, when a time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, it shifts to the time saving state of the time saving continuation number corresponding to the type of the time saving result. As a result, based on the result of the hit / fail determination process in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, it is possible to generate a situation in which the transition to the time saving state occurs without going through the open / close execution mode.

When the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is reset to 100 times, which is the number of times of the first time saving continuation, and the low probability mode and the first high school are set. Frequency support mode continues. Further, when the second time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is set to 150 times, which is the second time saving continuation number, and the low probability mode and the first time are set. High frequency support mode continues. As a result, when a time saving result occurs in the first high frequency support mode, the first high frequency support mode in which the second operating port 34 is more likely to be opened than in the second high frequency support mode is continued until then. A situation occurs in which the number of remaining continuations of the time saving state is larger than that. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of generating the time saving result in the time saving state.

When the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 100 times or more, which is the number of times of the first time saving continuation, the occurrence of the first time saving result this time The low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue without making new settings for the time saving state. Further, when the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is less than 100 times, which is the number of times of the first time saving continuation, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is The low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue in a state where the first time reduction continuation number is set to 100 times. Further, when the second time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second time saving mode and the second time saving state counter 134 are set to 150 times which is the second time saving continuation number. High frequency support mode continues. As a result, when a time saving result occurs in the second high frequency support mode, a situation may occur in which the remaining number of times of the time saving state is longer than before while continuing the second high frequency support mode. .. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of generating the time saving result in the time saving state.

When a time saving result occurs in the time saving state, the larger number of the remaining number of times of the current time saving state and the number of times of the time saving continuation that can be set by the newly generated time saving result is the remaining number of times in the subsequent time saving state. It will be the number of continuations. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of generating a time saving result in the time saving state.

When the ceiling time is shortened in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the process shifts to the time reduction state of the first time reduction continuation number. As a result, in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, it is possible to generate a situation in which the transition to the time saving state occurs without going through the opening / closing execution mode based on the digestion of the game times of the number of ceilings.

When the ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, if the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is 100 times or more, which is the first time reduction continuation number, the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction this time causes a new time reduction state. The low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode continue without any setting. Further, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, if the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is less than 100 times, which is the first time reduction continuation number, the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is the first. The low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue in a state where the time reduction continuation number is set to 100 times. That is, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the time reduction state, the larger number of the remaining number of continuations of the current time reduction state and the time reduction continuation number that can be set by the newly generated ceiling time reduction is the subsequent time reduction state. It will be the remaining number of continuations. As a result, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the second high frequency support mode, a situation may occur in which the remaining number of continuations of the time reduction state is larger than before, so that the ceiling time reduction may occur in the time reduction state. It is possible to increase the degree of advantage.

<10th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the game area PA provided on the game board 24 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 61 is a front view of the game board 24 for explaining the configuration of the game area PA in the present embodiment.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. The guide rail is configured as. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

Similar to the first embodiment, the game board 24 has a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, and a general drawing unit 38. Is provided. Further, a special winning device 151 is provided in place of the second operating port 34 in the first embodiment. The configuration of the special winning device 151 is the same as that of the sixth embodiment.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball is entered into any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the special winning device 151, a predetermined number of game media can be used by the player. The payout of the game ball is executed. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, 10 game balls are paid out when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, and 15 when a ball is entered into the special electric winning device 32. When the payout of one game ball is executed and the ball is entered into the first operating port 33, the payout of three game balls is executed, and when the ball is entered into the special winning device 151, the ball is paid out. One game ball is paid out. The number of prize balls is arbitrary, and the number of prize balls in the first operating port 33 and the special winning device 151 may be the same.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that does not enter various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 36 projecting forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area where the game ball launched into the game area PA can flow down is partitioned. Specifically, in the game area PA, the upper region PA1 which is an region above the predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 and the upper region PA1 which is continuously below the variable display unit 36 and the variable display unit 36. The left region PA2, which is the left region, the right region PA3, which is a region to the right of the variable display unit 36 and is continuous below the upper region PA1, and the left region PA2 and the right region PA3, respectively. On the other hand, it is continuously divided below the variable display unit 36 into a lower region PA4 which is a region below the variable display unit 36.

As the first launch operation, the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount, so that the game ball is moved to the left of the center position in the lateral direction in the upper region PA1. Start to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the left region PA2 → the lower region PA4. On the other hand, as the second launch operation, the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, so that the upper region PA1 is on the right side of the center position in the lateral direction. The game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the right region PA3 → the lower region PA4. That is, by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the launch operation device 28, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2 of the left side area PA2 and the right side area PA3, and the right side area. The game can be performed so that the game ball flows down the PA3. By the way, when the launch operation device 28 is operated with the maximum rotation amount, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the right region PA3 → the lower region PA4.

The first operating port 33 is installed in the lower region PA4. The first operating port 33 is opened upward, and no member such as an opening / closing member for preventing the game ball from entering the first operating port 33 is provided. Then, in the situation where the game ball is launched in the same mode, the winning probability to the first operating port 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operating port 33 is always capable of entering a game ball that flows down the game area PA toward the first operating port 33. Further, the first operating port 33 is arranged directly below the stage portion 36b formed in the variable display unit 36, and is a game ball that has flowed into the stage portion 36b via the guidance passage formed in the variable display unit 36. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the center of the stage portion 36b in the lateral direction to the outside of the variable display unit 36 can easily win a prize in the first operating port 33.

As described above, the first operating port 33 is provided in the lower region PA4, but on the upstream side of the first operating port 33 toward the right region PA3, a game ball flowing down the right region PA3 is the first. A regulation nail 24c is provided so as not to reach the 1 actuating port 33. Further, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage portion 36b is provided for the left side region PA2, and is not provided for the right side region PA3. With these configurations, when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, the first operating port 33 can be won, but the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. When the launch operation device 28 is operated so as to do so, it is impossible to win a prize in the first operating port 33. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball can play in the right area PA3 because the regulation nail 24c is not provided or the entrance of the guide passage to the stage portion 36b is provided with respect to the right area PA3. Even when the launch operation device 28 is operated so as to flow down, the first operating port 33 may be configured to be able to win a prize.

The special winning device 151 is installed in the right area PA3. That is, the special winning device 151 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the launch operation device so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. If 28 is operated, a prize can be won.

A through gate 35 is provided above the special winning device 151 in the right region PA3. That is, the through gate 35 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. If is operated, a prize can be won. The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. Further, a special winning device 151 is provided vertically below the through gate 35, and a special electric winning device 32 is provided on the downstream side of the special winning device 151 in the right region PA3. Therefore, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the special winning device 151 or the special electric winning device 32.

The right region PA3 in which the special winning device 151 and the through gate 35 are centrally arranged is defined by the side wall 36f whose left side is bulging in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 in the variable display unit 36. The right side is provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13, and is defined by a regulation wall protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. The right side region PA3 is set to have a narrower lateral dimension than the lower region PA4, and the lateral dimension is such that it is impossible to arrange the ball entry devices of the game balls in the lateral direction at the same height position. It has become. As a result, it is possible to limit the flow trajectory of the game ball flowing down the right side region PA3 to a predetermined range, and it is easy for the game ball to enter the special winning device 151 and the through gate 35.

The arrangement mode of the plurality of nails 24b on the upstream side of the through gate 35 in the right region PA3 is set to guide the game ball flowing down the right region PA3 to the through gate 35. As a result, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA3 can easily enter the through gate 35, and the special winning device 151 can be easily entered as the ball easily enters the through gate 35.

The guidance unit 152 of the special prize device 151 is switched from the non-guidance state to the guidance state based on the winning of the through gate 35, so that the special prize device 151 is changed from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the winning of the through gate 35 is used as a trigger to perform the normal drawing pass / fail determination process, and the normal drawing unit 38 provided in the lower left corner of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass. A variable display of the pattern is performed on the figure display unit 38a. Then, when the result of the normal map pass / fail determination process is the electric service open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the normal electric open state. In the normal power open state, the guidance unit 152 is in the guidance state in a predetermined mode, so that the special winning device 151 is in the open state in the predetermined mode.

Even in this embodiment, a low-frequency support mode, a first high-frequency support mode, and a second high-frequency support mode are set as support modes. The probability of winning an open prize, the mode of selecting the duration of the variation display times in the general map display unit 38a, and the mode of selecting the stop result in the general map display unit 38a are the same as those in the first embodiment. Further, the mode in which the special winning device 151 is opened (opening continuation period, number of times of opening, maximum number of winnings, interval period) when the general electric power is opened in each support mode is described in each of the first embodiments. This is the same as the mode (opening continuation period, number of times of opening, maximum number of winnings, interval period) in which the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened when the general electric power is opened in the support mode.

In the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the special winning device 151 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is higher than that of the special winning device 151, but in the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode, the first operating port The probability of winning the special winning device 151 is higher than that of 33. Then, when a prize is awarded to the special winning device 151, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the player holds too many balls. You can play the game without reducing it.

The winning / failing determination process is performed based on the occurrence of a prize in the first operating port 33 or the special winning device 151. Then, the result of the hit / fail determination process is clarified through the display effect in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36. The special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display unit 37a and a second special figure display unit 37b as in the first embodiment. In the first special figure display unit 37a, a change display of the pattern is performed by performing a hit / fail determination process on the first hold information acquired by the occurrence of a prize in the first operation port 33. Then, the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the hit / fail determination process is displayed. In this case, as the determination result of the hit / fail determination process, there are a jackpot result, a time saving result, and a missed result as in the first embodiment, but the content of the stop result of the first special figure display unit 37a is the jackpot result. There is a difference between the time saving result and the out-of-time result. The display of the stop result on the first special figure display unit 37a is maintained until the next game round is started and a new pattern variation display is started on the first special figure display unit 37a. In addition, the second special figure display unit 37b performs a hit / fail determination process on the second hold information acquired by the occurrence of a prize in the special winning device 151, so that the pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Then, the result corresponding to the determination result of the hit / fail determination process is displayed. In this case, as the determination result of the hit / fail determination process, there are a jackpot result, a time saving result, and a missed result as in the first embodiment, but the content of the stop result of the second special figure display unit 37b is the jackpot result. There is a difference between the time saving result and the out-of-time result. The display of the stop result on the second special figure display unit 37b is maintained until the next game round is started and the new pattern variation display is started on the second special figure display unit 37b.

In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure holding display unit 37c is provided at a position adjacent to the first special figure display unit 37a. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the first operating port 33 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display unit 37c. Further, in the special figure unit 37, a second special figure holding display unit 37d is provided at a position adjacent to the second special figure display unit 37b. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the special winning device 151 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the second special figure reservation display unit 37d.

The display range of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. Further, the entire display range of the first special figure display unit 37a, the second special figure display unit 37b, the first special figure reservation display unit 37c, and the second special figure reservation display unit 37d is also the display surface of the symbol display device 41. It is a narrower range than. As a result, the player's attention to the symbol display device 41 is higher than that of the first special figure display unit 37a, the second special figure display unit 37b, the first special figure hold display unit 37c, and the second special figure hold display unit 37d. It becomes possible to increase.

When the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b performs variable display of the pattern, that is, when the game round is executed, the symbol display device 41 performs a display effect accordingly. When the effect for game rounds is executed in the symbol display device 41, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the first hold display area 42a, the second hold display area 42b, and the state suggestion area 43 are displayed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Set. Further, in the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect for the game round, but also the display effect in the open / close execution mode that shifts to after the big hit result is performed.

When a jackpot result is selected in the winning / failing determination process executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the special winning device 151, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode after the game times corresponding to the jackpot result are completed. In the open / close execution mode, the special electric winning device 32 can be won. The special electric winning device 32 is provided at a position below the special winning device 151 in the right region PA3. That is, the special electric winning device 32 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the launch operation device 32 causes the game ball to flow down the right area PA3. If 28 is operated, a prize can be won.

The special electric winning device 32 includes a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and also includes an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in either the closed state or the open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and when a jackpot result is selected in the winning / failing determination process, the opening / closing door 32a can be switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize. ing. It should be noted that, although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which winning is less likely to occur than in the open state. Further, the execution content of the open / close execution mode is the same as that of the first embodiment.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 82 in the present embodiment.

Similar to the first embodiment, the present embodiment also includes a hit random number counter C1, a type random number counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a random number initial value counter CINI, a variable type counter CS, and a general electric random number counter C4. The contents of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, the variable type counter CS and the general electric random number counter C4, and the contents of the processing using these counters C1 to C4, CINI, CS It is the same as the first embodiment. Further, when the through gate 35 is won, the numerical information of the normal number counter C4 is stored in the normal figure holding area 84c, and the configuration of the normal figure holding area 84c is the same as that of the first embodiment. Is.

Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is the first special feature of the main RAM 84 as in the first embodiment when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33. It is stored in the holding area 111. Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 causes a prize in the second operating port 34 in the first embodiment when a prize is generated in the special prize device 151. It is stored in the second special figure holding area 112 of the main RAM 84 in the same manner as in the case of the above.

The execution area 192 for the special drawing includes an execution area 192a for the first special drawing and an execution area 192b for the second special drawing. The execution area 192a for the first special figure is an area in which the first hold information to be subjected to the hit / fail judgment process, the distribution judgment process, etc. is stored when the variation display is started on the first special figure display unit 37a. be. The execution area 192b for the second special figure is an area in which the second hold information to be subjected to the hit / fail judgment process, the distribution judgment process, etc. is stored when the variation display is started on the second special figure display unit 37b. be. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a is started, the first hold information stored in the first area 111a of the first special figure hold area 111 is executed for the first special figure. It will be shifted to area 192a. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display unit 37b is started, the second hold information stored in the first area 112a of the second special figure hold area 112 is transferred to the execution area 192b for the second special figure. Be shifted.

In the present embodiment, at least a part of the period of the game times on the first special figure display unit 37a and at least a part of the period of the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b can overlap. That is, even while the game times are being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b can be started, and the game times are executed on the second special figure display unit 37b. The game rotation in the first special figure display unit 37a can be started even in the middle of the game.

When the hit / fail determination process is executed for the first hold information, the first pass / fail table 121 at the time of low probability is referred to in the low probability mode in the low probability mode, and the hit / fail table 121 in the low probability mode is referred to in the low probability mode, as in the first embodiment. For example, the winning / failing table 123 at the time of high probability is referred to. Further, when the hit / fail determination process is executed for the second hold information, the second hit / miss table 122 at the time of low probability is referred to in the low probability mode in the low probability mode as in the first embodiment, and the high probability mode is used. If so, the winning / failing table 123 at the time of high probability is referred to. Further, when the jackpot result is selected in the hit / fail determination process for the first hold information, the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure is referred to as in the first embodiment. When the minute determination process is executed and the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process for the first reserved information, the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure is referred to as in the first embodiment. The distribution determination process for shortening the time is executed. Further, when the jackpot result is selected in the hit / fail determination process for the second hold information, the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure is referred to as in the first embodiment, and the jackpot distribution is performed. When the minute determination process is executed and the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process for the second reserved information, the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure is referred to in the same manner as in the first embodiment. The distribution determination process for shortening the time is executed.

In the present embodiment, as the special figure special electric control process, the first special figure special electric control process corresponding to the first hold information and the second special figure special electric control process corresponding to the second hold information are set. These processes will be described below.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the first special figure special electric control process executed by the main MPU 82, and FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the second special figure special electric control process executed by the main MPU 82. Since the processing configurations of the first special figure special electric control process and the second special figure special electric control process are similar, the corresponding processing configurations will be described.

In the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), first, the acquisition process of the first hold information is executed (step S3801). Further, in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), first, the second reserved information acquisition process is executed (step S3901).

In the first holding information acquisition process, when the first operating port 33 has won a prize and the number of the first holding information stored in the first special figure holding area 111 is less than the upper limit storage number. , The hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are used as the first hold information, and the first hold information in the first area 111a to the fourth area 111d of the first special figure hold area 111 is stored. Store in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that have not been used. When the first hold information is acquired, the data setting for updating the display contents of the first special figure hold display unit 37c in accordance with the increase in the number of the first hold information this time is set. conduct. In addition, a first hold command indicating that the first hold information has increased is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first hold command to the display side MPU 103 to increase the number of hold information for displaying the number of first hold information in the first hold display area 42a of the symbol display device 41. To change according to.

In the second reserved information acquisition process, when the special winning device 151 has been awarded and the number of the second reserved information stored in the second special figure reserved area 112 is less than the upper limit stored number, The hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are used as the second hold information, and the second hold information in the first area 112a to the fourth area 112d of the second special figure hold area 112 is stored. Store in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that do not exist. When the second hold information is acquired, the data setting for updating the display contents of the second special figure hold display unit 37d in accordance with the increase in the number of the second hold information this time is set. conduct. In addition, a second hold command indicating that the second hold information has increased is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received second hold command to the display side MPU 103 to increase the number of hold information for displaying the number of second hold information in the second hold display area 42b of the symbol display device 41. To change according to.

In the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63) and the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), after the hold information acquisition process (step S3801 or step S3901) is executed, the information is stored in the main ROM 83. Read the special figure special electric address table (step S3802, step S3902). In the special figure special electric address table, the start of a program for executing the processing corresponding to the numerical information of the first special figure special electric counter provided in the main RAM 84 and the second special electric special electric counter provided in the main RAM 84. The address is set. The first special figure special electric counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63) by the main MPU 82. The second special figure special electric counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64) by the main MPU 82. The value of each special figure special electric counter corresponds to the start address, and when the value of each special figure special electric counter is "0", the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S3805, step S3905) is executed, and each When the value of the special figure special electric counter is "1", the special figure changing process (step S3806, step S3906) is executed, and when the value of each special figure special electric counter is "2", the special figure is confirmed. The middle process (step S3807, step S3907) is executed, and when the value of each special figure special electric counter is "3", the special electric start process (step S3808, step S3908) is executed, and the value of each special figure special electric counter is executed. When is "4", the special electric power opening process (step S3809, step S3909) is executed, and when the value of each special figure special electric power counter is "5", the special electric power closing process (step S3810, step S3910) is executed. ) Is executed, and when the value of each special electric power counter is "6", the special electric power end processing (step S3811, step S3911) is executed.

In the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63) and the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), after reading the special figure special electric address table (step S3802, step S3902), the corresponding special figure special electric counter The start address corresponding to the information is acquired from the special figure special electric address table (step S3803, step S3903), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S3804, step S3904). Hereinafter, the special figure variation start process (step S3805, step S3905), the special figure variation process (step S3806, step S3906), and the special figure determination process (step S3807, step S3907) will be described. The special electric power start process (step S3808, step S3908), the special electric power opening process (step S3809, step S3909), and the special electric power closing process (step S3810, step S3910) are described in steps S609 to S611 in the first embodiment. It is the same. Further, in the special electric power termination process (step S3811, step S3911), when the high probability state counter 133 is not provided in the main RAM 84 and the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability result or the 10R high probability result ends. The special electric termination process in the first embodiment is described in the above, except that the high-probability mode and the high-probability state of the first high-probability support mode are continued until the next game round that results in a big hit. The same process as in FIG. 23 is executed.

<Special figure fluctuation start processing>
First, the special figure variation start processing of step S3805 and step S3905 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 65.

First, it is determined whether or not the process for the jackpot state is executed on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) this time (step S4001). As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the game times are executed in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game times can be executed in the other. In this case, if step S4001 is executed and the process for the jackpot state is executed on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) this time, the processes after step S4002 are executed. The start of a new game is restricted without. As a result, in the situation where the open / close execution mode is executed triggered by the game times in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game times in the other are not newly started. Be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the open / close execution mode. If this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), it is determined in step S4001 whether or not the value of the second special figure special electric counter is 3 or more, and 3 or more. In this case, the processing after step S4002 is not executed, and if this time is the special figure fluctuation start processing in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is 3 or more. In step S4001, it is determined whether or not the counter is equal to or not, and if it is 3 or more, the processing after step S4002 is not executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4001, it is determined whether or not the corresponding number of pending items is one or more (step S4002). If this time is the special figure fluctuation start processing in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), it is determined whether or not one or more first reserved information is stored in the first special figure holding area 111, and this time In the case of the special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), it is determined whether or not one or more second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4002, the data setting process is executed (step S4003). In the data setting process, if this time is the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), the data stored in the first area 111a of the first special figure holding area 111 is transferred to the execution area 192a for the first special figure. Moving. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area 111 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 111a to 111d to the lower area side, and the second area 111b → the first area 111a, the third area 111c → the third. After the data in each area is shifted such as 2 area 111b, 4th area 111d → 3rd area 111c, the 4th area 111d is cleared to “0”. In this case, the display content of the first special figure hold display unit 37c in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the first hold information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, a command indicating that the first hold information in the first special figure hold area 111 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. By transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 103, the sound light side MPU 93 responds to the decrease in the number of hold information by displaying the number of first hold information in the first hold display area 42a of the symbol display device 41. Let me change it.

In the data setting process, if this time is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), the data stored in the first area 112a of the second special figure holding area 112 is transferred to the execution area 192b for the second special figure. Moving. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 112 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 112a to 112d to the lower area side, and the second area 112b → the first area 112a and the third area 112c → the third area 112c. After the data in each area is shifted such as 2 area 112b, 4th area 112d → 3rd area 112c, the 4th area 112d is cleared to “0”. In this case, the display content of the second special figure hold display unit 37d in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the second hold information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, a command indicating that the second hold information in the second special figure hold area 112 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. By transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 103, the sound light side MPU 93 responds to the decrease in the number of hold information by displaying the number of second hold information in the second hold display area 42b of the symbol display device 41. Let me change it.

After the data setting process is executed, the game round is executed on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) this time, and the hold information that triggered the start of the game round is the jackpot result. (Step S4004). If a negative determination is made in step S4004, a hit / fail determination process is executed (step S4005). In the winning / failing determination process, if the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the start target of the game round is the first hold information, the first winning / failing table 121 at the time of low probability is read from the main ROM 83, and the winning / failing lottery mode has a low probability. If the mode is the mode and the start target of the game round is the second hold information, the second hit / miss table 122 at the time of low probability is read from the main ROM 83, and if the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the start target of the game round is the first. Whether it is the 1 hold information or the 2nd hold information, the pass / fail table 123 at the time of high probability is read from the main ROM 83. After reading the pass / fail table, the pass / fail judgment is made from the hold information stored in the execution area 192a for the first special figure and the execution area 192b for the second special figure, which is the start target of the current game round. Information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the winning random number counter C1 is read, and it is determined which game result in the winning / failing table the read numerical information corresponds to.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is the jackpot result (step S4006: YES), the jackpot distribution determination process is executed (step S4007). In the jackpot distribution determination process, if the start target of the game round is the first hold information, the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure is read from the main ROM 83, and the start target of the game round is the second hold information. If so, the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure is read out. Then, from the hold information stored on the side of the execution area 192a for the first special figure and the execution area 192b for the second special figure, which is the start target of the current game round, the information for the distribution determination, that is, the type random number By reading the numerical information acquired from the counter C2 and referring to the distribution table, it is specified which type of jackpot result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After executing the big hit distribution determination process, "1" is set in the flag of the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of the big hit result specified in the big hit result determination process (step S4008). After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S4009). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which is the start target of the game round, is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance for the jackpot result stop. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of jackpot result. In step S4009, information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in step S4008 is stored in the main RAM 84. It should be noted that the stop mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of stop modes of the pattern may be set for at least a part of the jackpot results.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time saving result (step S4010: YES), the time saving distribution determination process is executed (step S4011). In the time-saving distribution determination process, if the start target of the game round is the first hold information, the time-shortening distribution table 127 for the first special figure is read from the main ROM 83, and the start target of the game round is the second hold information. If so, the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special drawing is read out. Then, from the hold information stored on the side of the execution area 192a for the first special figure and the execution area 192b for the second special figure, which is the start target of the current game round, the information for the distribution determination, that is, the type random number By reading the numerical information acquired from the counter C2 and referring to the distribution table, it is specified which kind of time saving result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After executing the time saving determination process, the flag of the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of the time saving result specified in the time saving determination process is set to "1" (step S4012). After that, the stop result setting process for the time saving result is executed (step S4013). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which is the start target of the game round, is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance for the time saving result stop. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In the stop result table for the time saving result, the type of the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the time saving result. In step S4013, information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of time saving result specified in step S4012 is stored in the main RAM 84. It should be noted that the stop mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each time saving result, or a plurality of types of stop modes of the pattern may be set for at least a part of the time saving results. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in step S4013 is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is neither the jackpot result nor the time saving result (step S4010: NO), the stop result setting process for the missed result is executed (step S4014). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b in this game is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result and the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the time saving result. It is one type common to the figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b.

On the other hand, when an affirmative judgment is made in step S4004, that is, the game round is being executed on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) this time, and the hold that triggered the start of the game round is held. When the information corresponds to the jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the missed result already described is executed without executing the hit / fail determination process (step S4014). That is, in the pachinko machine 10, even if the game round is being executed in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game round can be started in the other. However, if the hold information that triggered the start of the already executed game round corresponds to one of the jackpot results, the hold information that triggered the start of the newly executed game round will be used. Regardless of whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot result, it will be a game time corresponding to the off result. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game times corresponding to the jackpot results from being executed in duplicate. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the start of a new game round is prevented when the game round corresponding to the jackpot result has already been executed, the hold information for which the game round is to be started is also acquired. Regardless of this, it may become clear that the game times currently being executed are the game times corresponding to the jackpot result when a new game time is not started, but the game times corresponding to the jackpot result have already been executed. Even if this is done, it is possible to prevent such an event from occurring by configuring the configuration so that a new game round can be started.

When the processing of step S4009, the processing of step S4013, or the processing of step S4014 is executed, the time saving state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is provided with the condition that the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 1 or more (step S4015: YES). The value is subtracted by 1 (step S4016). Then, when the value of the time saving state counter 134 after 1 subtraction is "0" (step S4017: YES), the special feature of this time is among the first time saving end flag and the second time saving end flag provided in the main RAM 84. Fig. “1” is set in the time saving end flag on the side corresponding to the special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) (step S4018). The first time reduction end flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the time reduction state should be ended and the normal game state should be entered when the game round on the first special figure display unit 37a is completed. be. The second time reduction end flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the time reduction state should be ended and the normal game state should be entered when the game round on the second special figure display unit 37b is completed. be.

When a negative determination is made in step S4015, a negative determination is made in step S4017, or the process of step S4018 is executed, a specific process of the variable display period is executed (step S4019). The process for specifying the variable display period will be described later. After that, the variation command and the type command corresponding to the game times to be started this time are transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S4020). The change command includes the information of the change display period specified in step S4019, and the game times to be started is set to either the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. Contains information that indicates whether it is supported. The type command includes information indicating whether the game times to be started this time correspond to the jackpot result, the time saving result, or the missed result, and when it corresponds to the jackpot result. Contains information indicating which type of jackpot result it is, and if it corresponds to a time saving result, it contains information indicating which type of time saving result it is.

In the low-frequency support mode, the sound-light side MPU 93 receives the variation command and the type command indicating that the first hold information is the start target of the game round, and the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. While the variable display of the symbol in the above is started and the effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbol is performed by the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65, it is shown that the second hold information is the start target of the game round. Even if the variation command and the type command are received, the variation display of the symbols in the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 and the corresponding effects in the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 are not executed. Therefore, when the game round triggered by the first hold information is executed in the low-frequency support mode, the first special symbol display unit 37a performs variable display of the symbol and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. When the game round triggered by the second hold information is executed in the low frequency support mode, the fluctuation display of the symbol is performed on the second special symbol display unit 37b. On the other hand, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, the fluctuation display of the symbol is not performed.

In addition, when a display area divided into small sections is set on the outer edge side of the display surface of the symbol display device 41 and the game round triggered by the second hold information is executed in the low frequency support mode, the display area is used. A blinking display or a color switching display may be performed. In addition, when a big hit result occurs in the game round triggered by the second hold information in the low frequency support mode, the symbol display device 41 announces the occurrence of the big hit result at the timing when the game round ends. If a time saving result occurs in the game round triggered by the second hold information in the low frequency support mode, the symbol display device 41 notifies the occurrence of the time saving result at the timing when the game round ends. Is done.

In the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the sound-light side MPU 93 has a symbol when it receives a variation command and a type command indicating that the second hold information is the start target of the game round. While the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 are used to start the variable display of the symbols in the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 of the display device 41 and to perform the effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbol, the first hold information is the game time. Even if a variation command and a type command indicating that the start target is received, the variation display of the symbols in the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 and the corresponding effects in the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 are displayed. Do not let it run. Therefore, when the game round triggered by the first hold information is executed in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the first special figure display unit 37a, while the pattern is displayed in a variable manner. In the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, the fluctuation display of the symbol is not performed, whereas in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the game times triggered by the second hold information are performed. When executed, the second special symbol display unit 37b displays the variation of the symbol, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 displays the variation of the symbol.

In addition, a display area divided into small sections is set on the outer edge side of the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the game round triggered by the first hold information is executed in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode. If so, a blinking display or a color switching display may be performed in the display area. In addition, when a big hit result occurs in the game round triggered by the first hold information in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the symbol display device 41 displays the timing when the game round ends. An effect is performed to announce the occurrence of the jackpot result, and if a time saving result occurs in the game times triggered by the first hold information in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the game times are changed. At the end timing, the symbol display device 41 performs an effect of notifying the occurrence of the time saving result.

After that, the variable display of the pattern is started in the display unit of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, which is the start target of the current game round (step S4021). If the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is added by 1, and this process is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63). If it corresponds to FIG. 64), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S4022).

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a variable display period specifying process executed in step S4019.

When "1" is not set in both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4101: NO), that is, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the game times this time. It is determined whether or not the start target of is the first pending information (step S4102). When the start target of the game round this time is the first hold information (step S4102: YES), the table group for the normal fluctuation period is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S4103). Then, the variable display period selection process is executed using the table group for the normal variable period (step S4104), and the information of the variable display period selected in the selected process is provided in the main RAM 84. It is set in the timer counter on the special drawing side (step S4105). The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter on the first special figure side is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

In the situation where the selection process of the variation display period in step S4104 is executed with reference to the table group for the normal variation period, if a big hit result occurs in this game round, or the result of the hit / fail determination process is out of order. If the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information that is being executed at the same time corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display and the out-of-reach display occurs in this game, the fluctuation type counter at that time. By collating the numerical information of CS with the reach-corresponding table in the table group for the normal variable period, the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is read out.

When a time saving result occurs in this game, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is collated with the table corresponding to the time saving result in the table group for the normal fluctuation period, so that the variation display corresponding to the time saving result is displayed. Read the period information. Multiple types of information on the variable display period corresponding to the time saving result are set, and it corresponds to the fact that the reach display occurs longer than the shortest period on the special figure side regardless of the variable display period corresponding to the time saving result. The period is shorter than the variable display period. Specifically, 10 seconds, 11 seconds, 12 seconds, and 13 seconds are set as the variation display period corresponding to the time saving result, and the period corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS is the period of this game. Selected as the variable display period of times.

If the jackpot result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round and the off-reach display does not occur, the game starts in a situation where three or more first hold information is stored in the first special figure hold area 111. If the game times have been played, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special drawing side is read out as the variation display period of the game times this time. As a result, in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to improve the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the first hold information.

On the other hand, in the case where the jackpot result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round and the off-reach display does not occur, the first hold information is the execution target of the game round and one in the first special figure hold area 111 or In the case of a game round started in a situation where two first hold information is stored, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is applied to the table corresponding to the complete deviation result in the table group for the normal fluctuation period. By collating with each other, the information of the variable display period corresponding to the complete deviation result is read out. Multiple types of information on the variable display period for complete deviation results are set, and any variable display period for complete deviation results is longer than the shortest period on the special map side, and the variable display period for short-time results is long. And the period is shorter than the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of reach display. Specifically, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, and 8 seconds are set as the fluctuation display period corresponding to the complete deviation result, and the period corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS is this time. It is selected as the variable display period of the game times.

In the case of the low frequency support mode (step S4101: NO), when the start target of the current game round is the second hold information (step S4102: NO), the special figure is set as the variable display period of the current game round. Information on the longest period (specifically, 10 minutes) on the side is set in the second special figure side timer counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S4106). The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter on the second special figure side is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

As described above, in the low frequency support mode, if the first hold information is the start target of the game times, the change display period of the game times is selected by referring to the table group for the normal fluctuation period. If the second hold information is the target for starting the game round, the longest period (specifically, 10 minutes) on the special map side is selected as the variable display period of the game round regardless of the game result of the game round. .. The longest period on the special map side is longer than any of the variable display periods selected by referring to the table group for the normal variable period. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player operates the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the left side region PA2 to play the game.

When "1" is set in either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4101: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency. In the support mode, it is determined whether or not the start target of the current game round is the first hold information (step S4107). When the start target of the current game round is the first hold information (step S4107: YES), the long-term (specifically, 2 minutes) information on the special figure side is mainly used as the variable display period of the current game round. It is set in the first special figure side timer counter of the side RAM 84 (step S4108).

In the case of the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode (step S4101: YES) and the start target of the current game round is the second hold information (step S4107: NO), a short period of time. The table group for fluctuation is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S4109). Then, the variation display period selection process is executed using the table group for short-term variation (step S4110), and the information of the variation display period selected in the selection process is input to the second special figure side of the main RAM 84. It is set in the timer counter (step S4111).

In the situation where the selection process of the variation display period in step S4110 is executed with reference to the table group for short-term variation, if a big hit result occurs in this game round, or the result of the hit / fail determination process is out of order. If the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information that is being executed at the same time corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display and the out-of-reach display occurs in this game round, the fluctuation type counter at that time. By collating the numerical information of CS with the reach-corresponding table in the table group for short-term variation, the information of the variation display period of the reach display mode is read out.

If the jackpot result does not occur and the reach display does not occur in this game, the game is started in a situation where two or more second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112. If it is a time, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special drawing side is read out as the fluctuation display period of the game time this time. As a result, in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, it is possible to increase the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the second hold information. In addition, even if a time saving result occurs in this game round, if the game round is started in a situation where two or more second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112. The information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read out.

On the other hand, in this game round, when the jackpot result does not occur and the off-reach display does not occur, the game round started in the situation where one second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112. In the case of, the information of the middle period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special drawing side is read out as the variation display period of the game times this time. As a result, it is possible to guarantee the situation in which the second hold information is acquired in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. Further, even if a time saving result occurs in this game round, if the game round is started in a situation where one second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112, the special figure is special. The information for the middle period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the drawing side is read out.

As described above, in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, if the second hold information is the target for starting the game round, the variation display of the game round is referred to with reference to the table group for short-term fluctuation. While the period is selected, if the first hold information is the start target of the game round, the game is played for a long period of time (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special map side regardless of the game result of the game round. Selected as the variable display period of times. The long term on the special map side is longer than the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special map side selected in the game round of the off result in which the reach display does not occur triggered by the second hold information. be. Therefore, in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the player operates the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the right region PA3 to play the game.

<Processing during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S3806 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63) and step S3906 of the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64) will be described.

When the variable display period of the current game times on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled has not passed and the display content of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is updated, the special figure is displayed. Data is set for updating the display contents of the display units 37a and 37b. As a result, the display contents of the patterns on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled are updated to the display contents in the following order.

The mode at the start of the variable display of the pattern on the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the update mode of the variable display of the pattern are performed in a certain mode regardless of the result of the hit / miss determination process and the result of the distribution determination process. , It is performed in a certain manner regardless of the content of the effect for the game round in the symbol display device 41. For example, when a predetermined plurality of update timings occur, the display content of the pattern goes around once and the display pattern in which the display order is a fixed order is repeatedly performed, and when the variable display period elapses, the display pattern is concerned. Regardless of the order in which the game is displayed, the stop result determined at the start of the game is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, when the variable display period has elapsed, the final stop command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The final stop command includes information corresponding to the side of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b on which the variable display period has elapsed. After that, the information on the stop mode of the pattern of the special figure display units 37a and 37b stored in the main RAM 84 at the start of the game round, which is the target of ending this time, is read out. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the state where the pattern corresponding to the game result of the current game is displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled.

After that, the information of the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter corresponding to the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. As a result, the measurement of the final stop period is started. After that, if this process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is added by 1, and this process is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63). If it corresponds to FIG. 64), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is added by 1.

<Processing during special drawing confirmation>
Next, refer to the flowchart of FIG. 67 for the special figure finalizing process executed in step S3807 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63) and step S3907 of the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64). I will explain while.

When the final stop period has passed (step S4201: YES) and the game result of the current game round is a jackpot result (step S4202: YES), the special figure special electric control process of this time (FIG. 63, FIG. By determining whether or not the value of the special figure special electric counter on the side that does not correspond to FIG. 64) is "0", the special figure on the side that does not correspond to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64). It is determined whether or not the game times are being executed on the display units 37a and 37b (step S4203). When the value of the special figure special electric counter on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63, 64) is not "0" (step S4203: NO), the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63, FIG. The variation display of the pattern on the special figure display units 37a and 37b on the side that does not correspond to FIG. 64) is terminated in a state where the disengagement result is stopped and displayed (step S4204). Then, the special figure special electric counter on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) is cleared to "0" (step S4205). As a result, in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is executed on both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the variable display of one of the patterns is stopped, resulting in a big hit result and the opening / closing execution mode is set. If it occurs, the variable display of the other pattern is forcibly terminated with the result being stopped and displayed.

When a negative determination is made in step S4203 or when the process of step S4205 is executed, the information corresponding to the opening period (specifically, 5 seconds) corresponds to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) of this time. It is set in the timer counter on the side of the sound (step S4206), and the opening command is transmitted to the MPU 93 on the sound light side (step S4207). When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the opening command, the effect corresponding to the opening period is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

After that, information on the fixed ceiling number of 500 times is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S4208). That is, when the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the open / close execution mode is started, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131. In the case of a configuration in which the fixed ceiling count is set in the ceiling counter 131 during the open / close execution mode or when the open / close execution mode ends, instead of when the open / close execution mode is started, the operation is performed after the open / close execution mode is started. If a fraudulent act is performed so that the set value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the power supply is stopped and the operating power supply is restarted, the set value update process (step S117) is performed. In step S117) or the RAM clearing process (step S119), the information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress is cleared as described above, whereas the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained, so that the operating power is supplied. While gaining the benefit of the open / close execution mode until is stopped, there is a risk that the game will be restarted in a situation where the number of remaining ceilings is small. On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be neutralized.

After that, if this process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is added by 1, and this process is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63). If it corresponds to FIG. 64), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S4209).

If the game result of the current game is not a jackpot result (step S4202: NO), the end determination process of the time saving state is executed in step S4210, the setting process for the time saving result is executed in step S4211, and step S4212. The subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed at. After that, if this process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), the first special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0", and this process is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63). If it corresponds to FIG. 64), the second special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S4213).

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the end determination process of the time saving state executed in step S4210 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 67).

First, in the main RAM 84, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the time saving end flag corresponding to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) this time (step S4301). That is, if the current process corresponds to the first special electric power control process (FIG. 63), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first time reduction end flag of the main RAM 84, and this time. If the process corresponds to the second special electric power control process (FIG. 64), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second time reduction end flag of the main RAM 84.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4301, the time saving end flag corresponding to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) is cleared to "0" (step S4302). After that, both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 are cleared to "0" (step S4303). As a result, the time saving state ends and the normal game state is set.

Even while the game times are being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b can be started, and the game times are executed on the second special figure display unit 37b. In the configuration in which the game rounds on the first special figure display unit 37a can be started even while the game is in progress, the time saving state is when the end-corresponding game rounds started in the situation where the remaining number of continuations is one is completed. finish. In this case, even if the game times started after the end-corresponding game times are started and end before the end-corresponding game times, the time saving state continues and ends when the end-corresponding game times are completed. .. On the other hand, in the time-saving state (that is, the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode), if the game is a game in which the second hold information is executed, the game is played with reference to the table group for short-term fluctuation. While the variable display period of the times is selected, the long period (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special drawing side is uniquely selected in the game times in which the first hold information is the execution target. Then, in the time saving state, basically, by operating the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the right side region PA3, the game times with the second hold information as the execution target are repeatedly executed, and the time saving state is achieved. By operating the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the left side region PA2 so that the first hold information becomes the execution target of the game times when the remaining number of continuations of is one. It is possible to make the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state the game times for which the first hold information is executed. Then, when the end-corresponding game round is started with the first hold information as the execution target, the end-corresponding game round is executed for a long period of time (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special drawing side. While the game round corresponding to the end is being executed, the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3 so that the game round with the second hold information as the execution target is repeatedly executed. By doing so, it is possible to substantially increase the number of times the time saving state is continued.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a setting process for the time saving result executed in step S4211 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 67).

When the game result of the current game times is a time saving result (step S4401: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4402). Then, when "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S4402: YES), the setting process for this time saving result is terminated without executing the processes after step S4403. That is, even if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) is selected in the winning / failing determination process of the game times executed in the situation of the high probability mode, the second high frequency support is triggered by the time saving result. The time saving result is invalidated without setting the mode.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag (step S4402: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4403). That is, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the first high frequency support mode. When the support mode is not the first high frequency support mode (step S4403: NO), the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4404), and the support mode is the first high frequency support mode. If there is (step S4403: YES), the process of step S4404 is not executed. As a result, when the time saving result is obtained in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode are maintained, and the time saving result is obtained in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode. If this happens, the low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode are maintained, and if the time-saving result is obtained in the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, the low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode are set.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4403 or the process of step S4404 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current time saving result is the first time saving result (step S4405). When the time saving result this time is the first time saving result (step S4405: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is "100" or more corresponding to the number of times of the first time saving continuation. (Step S4406). When the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is less than the value of the first time reduction continuation number (step S4406: NO), the information of "100" corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 (step S4407). ..

After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S4408). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time saving state has been started or the first time saving continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93.

If the processing of step S4408 is executed after the processing of step S4407 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is not the time saving state, the state specification command indicates that the time saving state of the first time saving continuation number is started. Contains information. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 execute an effect indicating that the time reduction state of the first time reduction continuation number is started. Execute the process to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, the combination of the first time saving symbols ("1, 2, 3") is stopped and displayed. Then, after these stop results are stopped and displayed, the symbol display device 41 displays an image showing that the time saving state occurs and an image showing the first time saving continuation number. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. The display of the image showing that the time saving state occurs in the secured area and the image showing the number of times of the first time saving continuation is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size when the display of the image ends.

If the process of step S4408 is executed after the process of step S4407 is executed in the situation where the current game state is the time saving state, it indicates that the first time saving continuation number has been reset to the state specification command. Contains information. When the sound light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the effect indicating that the first time reduction continuation number has been reset is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Execute the process to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, the combination of the first time-saving generated symbols (“1 ・ 2 ・ 3”), and the combination of the second time-saving generated symbols (“3”).・ 4.1 ”) and the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols, which is a combination of symbols other than the out-of-reach symbol combination, is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the confirmation display over the final stop period is completed, an image showing that the time saving continuation number in the time saving state is actually reset and an image showing the first time saving continuation number are displayed. Is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. In the secured area, the display of the image showing that the time saving continuation number in the time saving state has been reset and the image showing the reset first time saving continuation number is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size when the display of the image ends.

When the current time saving result is the second time saving result (step S4405: NO), the time saving state counter 134 is provided with the information of "150" corresponding to the second time saving continuation number regardless of the current value of the time saving state counter 134. Set (step S4409). After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S4410). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time saving state has been started or the second time saving continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93.

If the process of step S4410 is executed after the process of step S4409 is executed in a situation where the current game state is not the time-saving state, the state specification command indicates that the time-saving state of the second time-saving continuation number is started. Contains information. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 execute an effect indicating that the time reduction state of the second time reduction continuation number is started. Execute the process to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, the combination of the second time saving symbols ("3.4.1") is stopped and displayed. Then, after these stop results are stopped and displayed, the symbol display device 41 displays an image showing that the time saving state occurs and an image showing the second time saving continuation number. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. The display of the image showing that the time saving state occurs in the secured area and the image showing the number of times of the second time saving continuation is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size when the display of the image ends.

If the process of step S4410 is executed after the process of step S4409 is executed in the situation where the current game state is the time saving state, it indicates that the second time saving continuation number has been reset to the state specification command. Contains information. When the sound light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the effect indicating that the second time reduction continuation number has been reset is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Execute the process to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, the combination of the first time-saving generated symbols (“1 ・ 2 ・ 3”), and the combination of the second time-saving generated symbols (“3”).・ 4.1 ”) and the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols, which is a combination of symbols other than the out-of-reach symbol combination, is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the confirmation display over the final stop period is completed, an image showing that the time saving continuation number in the time saving state is actually reset and an image showing the second time saving continuation number are displayed. Is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. In the secured area, the display of the image showing that the time saving continuation number in the time saving state has been reset and the image showing the reset second time saving continuation number is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size when the display of the image ends.

When the process of step S4408 or the process of step S4410 is executed, each of the first time reduction end flag and the second time reduction end flag provided in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S4411). As a result, the second hold information is executed while the game times corresponding to the end in the time-saving state are being executed for a long period (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special figure side with the first hold information as the execution target. If a time saving result occurs in the game times, the remaining number of times of the time saving state is extended. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage that the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state are executed with the first reserved information as the execution target.

With the above configuration, when a time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, it shifts to the time saving state of the time saving continuation number corresponding to the type of the time saving result. As a result, based on the result of the hit / fail determination process in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, it is possible to generate a situation in which the transition to the time saving state occurs without going through the open / close execution mode.

When the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is reset to 100 times, which is the number of times of the first time saving continuation, and the low probability mode and the first high school are set. Frequency support mode continues. Further, when the second time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is set to 150 times, which is the second time saving continuation number, and the low probability mode and the first time are set. High frequency support mode continues. As a result, when a time saving result occurs in the first high frequency support mode, the first high frequency support mode in which the second operating port 34 is more likely to be opened than in the second high frequency support mode is continued until then. A situation occurs in which the number of remaining continuations of the time saving state is larger than that. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of generating the time saving result in the time saving state.

When the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 100 times or more, which is the number of times of the first time saving continuation, the occurrence of the first time saving result this time The low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue without making new settings for the time saving state. Further, when the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is less than 100 times, which is the number of times of the first time saving continuation, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is The low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue in a state where the first time reduction continuation number is set to 100 times. Further, when the second time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second time saving mode and the second time saving state counter 134 are set to 150 times which is the second time saving continuation number. High frequency support mode continues. As a result, when a time saving result occurs in the second high frequency support mode, a situation may occur in which the remaining number of times of the time saving state is longer than before while continuing the second high frequency support mode. .. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of generating the time saving result in the time saving state.

When a time saving result occurs in the time saving state, the larger number of the remaining number of times of the current time saving state and the number of times of the time saving continuation that can be set by the newly generated time saving result is the remaining number of times in the subsequent time saving state. It will be the number of continuations. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of generating a time saving result in the time saving state.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 executed in step S4213 of the process during determination of the special figure (FIG. 67).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4501). Then, when "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S4501: YES), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S4502. That is, in the game times executed in the high probability mode, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted, so that the ceiling time is shortened. Nor.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag (step S4501: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S4502). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S4502: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S4503. Similar to the first embodiment, the process of setting information in the ceiling counter 131 is a situation in which none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation", and "setting confirmation operation" is executed, and the gaming machine main body. Step S114 when the supply of the operating power is started in the state where 12 is in the open state, step S122 when the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs when the supply of the operating power is started, and the opening / closing execution are executed. Only in step S4208 when the mode is started, after the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0", the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" unless any of the above processes is executed. .. On the other hand, the ceiling time reduction occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented by 1 and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" in a situation where the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more. In this case, if the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" as described above (step S4502: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S4503. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0", and a time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs, and the game times of the number of times of the time saving continuation are digested without the big hit result occurring in the time saving state. When the time reduction state ends and the game state becomes the normal game state, the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction does not occur even if the digestion of the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur is repeated thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessive time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S4502: YES), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 (step S4503), and whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the subtraction is 1 is "0". (Step S4504). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S4504: YES), the second high frequency flag is set to "1" regardless of whether the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1". 1 ”is set (step S4505). As a result, when the ceiling time is shortened in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are maintained, and the ceiling time is shortened in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In some cases, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are set. The low-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode occur after the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low-probability result is completed, and when 100 game times, which is the number of continuations of the first time reduction, are exhausted. Since the first high-frequency support mode ends, the ceiling time reduction that occurs when 500 game times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is exhausted in the low-probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends, is the first high-frequency support mode. It does not occur in the situation.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is "100" or more corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number (step S4506). When the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is less than the value of the first time reduction continuation number (step S4506: NO), the information of "100" corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 (step S4507). ..

After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S4508). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time saving state has been started or the first time saving continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93.

If the processing of step S4508 is executed after the processing of step S4507 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is not the time saving state, the state specification command indicates that the time saving state of the first time saving continuation number is started. Contains information. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 execute an effect indicating that the time reduction state of the first time reduction continuation number is started. Execute the process to make it. Since the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs in the game round in which neither the jackpot result nor the time saving result occurs, the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41 combine the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, the first time saving. A combination of out-of-design symbols (including a combination of out-of-reach symbols) that is a combination of symbols other than the combination of generated symbols ("1 ・ 2 ・ 3") and the combination of the second time-saving generated symbols ("3.4.1"). Is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the confirmation display over the final stop period is completed, an image showing that a time saving state is generated triggered by the ceiling time saving and an image showing the number of times of the first time saving continuation are displayed. .. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. The display of the image showing that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs in the secured area and the image showing the number of times of the first time saving continuation is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size when the display of the image ends.

If the process of step S4508 is executed after the process of step S4507 is executed in the situation where the current game state is the time saving state, it indicates that the first time saving continuation number has been reset to the state specification command. Contains information. When the sound light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the effect indicating that the first time reduction continuation number has been reset is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Execute the process to make it. Since the resetting of the first time reduction continuation number triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs in the game times in which neither the jackpot result nor the time reduction result occurs, the symbols corresponding to the jackpot results in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41 Combination of symbols other than the combination of the first time-saving symbols ("1 ・ 2 ・ 3") and the combination of the second time-saving symbols ("3.4.1"). (Including combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the confirmation display over the final stop period is completed, the image showing that the time saving state is generated triggered by the ceiling time saving and the first time saving continuation number are reset. The image shown is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. The display of the image showing that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs in the secured area and the image showing that the first time saving continuation number is reset is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size when the display of the image ends.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4506 or the process of step S4508 is executed, each of the first time reduction end flag and the second time reduction end flag provided in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S4509). As a result, the second hold information is executed while the game times corresponding to the end in the time-saving state are being executed for a long period (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special figure side with the first hold information as the execution target. If a time saving result occurs in the game times, the remaining number of times of the time saving state is extended. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage that the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state are executed with the first reserved information as the execution target.

Here, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 67), the ceiling counter 131 subtraction process (FIG. 70) is executed after the time saving result setting process (FIG. 69) is executed, and the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted. In the process (FIG. 70), even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 is "0", if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is "100" or more, the processes of steps S4507 and S4508 are not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first time reduction continuation number from being reset due to the ceiling time reduction in the game times that resulted in the first time reduction result or the second time reduction result. As a result, it is possible to prevent the resetting of the time reduction continuation number triggered by the time reduction result and the resetting of the time reduction continuation number triggered by the ceiling time reduction from being executed in duplicate. In particular, if the second time reduction continuation number is reset triggered by the second time reduction result and then the first time reduction continuation number is reset triggered by the ceiling time reduction, the time reduction continuation number will decrease. With the above configuration, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring.

With the above configuration, when the ceiling time is shortened in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the time is shifted to the time reduction state of the first time reduction continuation number. As a result, in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, it is possible to generate a situation in which the transition to the time saving state occurs without going through the opening / closing execution mode based on the digestion of the game times of the number of ceilings.

When the ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, if the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is 100 times or more, which is the first time reduction continuation number, the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction this time causes a new time reduction state. The low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode continue without any setting. Further, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, if the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is less than 100 times, which is the first time reduction continuation number, the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is the first. The low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode continue in a state where the time reduction continuation number is set to 100 times. That is, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the time reduction state, the larger number of the remaining number of continuations of the current time reduction state and the time reduction continuation number that can be set by the newly generated ceiling time reduction is the subsequent time reduction state. It will be the remaining number of continuations. As a result, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the second high frequency support mode, a situation may occur in which the remaining number of continuations of the time reduction state is larger than before, so that the ceiling time reduction may occur in the time reduction state. It is possible to increase the degree of advantage.

Next, the left-handed notification process executed by the sound-light side MPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 71. The left-handed notification process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds).

When it is not the high probability mode (step S4601: NO) but the high frequency support mode (first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode) (step S4602: YES), the current high frequency support mode is started. It is determined whether or not the number of game times executed after that is the notification reference number (step S4603). The notification reference number is when the remaining number of continuations of the high frequency support mode (that is, the time saving state) is five. These five times are set as the number of times of the value obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of holding information of the second holding information in the second special figure holding area 112.

The left-handed notification process is executed in step S4603 (step S4604). In the left-handed notification process, a process for displaying the left-handed notification image on the symbol display device 41 is executed. As a left-handed notification image, an image that allows the player to recognize that the game ball should be launched by aiming at the left area PA2 so that the execution target of the game times 5 times after the current situation is the first hold information. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to urge the player to perform the firing operation so that the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state are executed with the first hold information as the execution target.

Next, a state in which the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state are executed with the first hold information as the execution target will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 72. FIG. 72 (a) shows the period during which the time is shortened, FIG. 72 (b) shows the period during which the game round for which the first hold information is executed is executed, and FIG. 72 (c) shows the second hold information. 72 (d) shows the period in which "1" is set in the first time reduction end flag of the main RAM 84, and FIG. 72 (e) shows the period during which the game times for execution are executed. The occurrence timing of the time reduction result is shown, and FIG. 72 (f) shows the occurrence timing of the ceiling time reduction.

First, a case will be described in which the end-corresponding game times in the time-saving state are executed with the first hold information as the execution target, and neither the time-saving result nor the ceiling time-saving occurs in the middle of the end-corresponding game times.

As shown in FIG. 72 (a), at the timing of t1 which is the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the game round in which the first hold information is the execution target is started. The variable display period of the game times is 2 minutes, which is a long period on the special map side. Since the game round is started in a situation where the remaining number of times of the time saving state is one, it is a game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, and as shown in FIG. 72 (d) at the timing of the t1. "1" is set in the first time saving end flag of the main RAM 84. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the timing of t2, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, the timing of t5, and t6, which are the situations in which the end-corresponding game times with the first hold information as the execution target are being executed. At each of the plurality of timings including the timing of, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the game times for which the second hold information is to be executed are executed. In this case, since each of the plurality of timings including the timings of t2 to t6 is in a time-saving state as shown in FIG. 72 (a), each of the plurality of timings including the timings of t2 to t6 For the game times started with, the fluctuation display period of the game times is determined by referring to the table group for short-term fluctuation. Each of these game rounds is started in a situation where two or more second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112, and neither the jackpot result nor the missed reach display occurs. The variable display period is the shortest period on the special map side (specifically, 3 seconds).

After that, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the end-corresponding game round for executing the first hold information ends. In this case, since "1" is set in the first time saving end flag of the main RAM 84 as shown in FIG. 72 (d), the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode, and the time saving as shown in FIG. 72 (a). The state ends.

As described above, the game times for which the first hold information is to be executed are executed as the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state, and in the game times corresponding to the end, the variation display period of the game times is a long period on the special figure side (specifically). Is 2 minutes). Then, in the game times corresponding to the end, about 30 game times have been generated triggered by the second hold information, which is the shortest variable display period. As a result, in the current time saving state, the game times of the first time saving continuation number and the second time saving continuation number are executed about 30 times more than the continuation number of the set target.

Next, a case will be described in which the end-corresponding game times in the time-saving state are executed with the first hold information as the execution target, and the time-saving result occurs in the middle of the end-corresponding game times.

As shown in FIG. 72 (a), at the timing of t8, which is a time saving state, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the game round for executing the first hold information is started. The variable display period of the game times is 2 minutes, which is a long period on the special map side. Since the game round is started in a situation where the remaining number of times of the time saving state is one, it is a game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, and as shown in FIG. 72 (d) at the timing of the t8. "1" is set in the first time saving end flag of the main RAM 84.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t13, and t14, which are the situations in which the end-corresponding game times with the first hold information as the execution target are being executed. At each of the plurality of timings including the timing of, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the game times for which the second hold information is to be executed are executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), each of the plurality of timings including the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14 is in a time-saving state. For the game times started at each of a plurality of timings including the timing, the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t13 and the timing of t14, the variation display period of the game times is determined by referring to the table group for short-term variation. Will be done. Each of these game rounds is started in a situation where two or more second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112, and neither the jackpot result nor the missed reach display occurs. The variable display period is the shortest period on the special map side (specifically, 3 seconds).

Of the respective game times of the plurality of timings including the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14, the game times of the timing of t11 are determined as shown in FIG. 72 (e). The result of processing is the time saving result. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 72 (d), the first time saving end flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" at the timing of t12 when the game round ends, and if it is the first time saving result, the time saving state counter 134 The first time reduction continuation number is reset to, and if the second time reduction result is obtained, the second time reduction continuation number is reset to the time reduction state counter 134. Therefore, the time saving state is extended.

After that, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the end-corresponding game round for executing the first hold information ends. However, since the first time saving end flag is cleared to "0" at the timing of t12 and the time saving state is extended, the time saving state does not end at the timing of t14.

As described above, the game times for which the first hold information is to be executed are executed as the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state, and in the game times corresponding to the end, the variation display period of the game times is a long period on the special figure side (specifically). Is 2 minutes). Then, the time saving state is extended by generating a time saving result in the game time of the execution target for the second hold information executed in the game time corresponding to the end. By executing the game times for which the first hold information is to be executed as the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state, it is possible to give the benefit of extending the time saving state.

Next, a case will be described in which the end-corresponding game times in the time-saving state are executed with the first hold information as the execution target, and the ceiling time is shortened in the middle of the end-corresponding game times.

As shown in FIG. 72 (a), at the timing of t15, which is a time saving state, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the game round for executing the first hold information is started. The variable display period of the game times is 2 minutes, which is a long period on the special map side. Since the game round is started in a situation where the remaining number of times of the time saving state is one, it is a game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, and as shown in FIG. 72 (d) at the timing of the t15. "1" is set in the first time saving end flag of the main RAM 84.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the timing of t16, the timing of t17, the timing of t18, the timing of t19, and t21, which are the situations in which the end-corresponding game times with the first hold information as the execution target are being executed. At each of the plurality of timings including the timing of, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the game times for which the second hold information is to be executed are executed. In this case, since each of the plurality of timings including the timing of t16, the timing of t17, the timing of t18, the timing of t19, and the timing of t21 is in a time-saving state as shown in FIG. 72 (a), these t16 For the game times started at each of a plurality of timings including the timing, the timing of t17, the timing of t18, the timing of t19, and the timing of t21, the variation display period of the game times is determined by referring to the table group for short-term variation. Will be done. Each of these game rounds is started in a situation where two or more second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112, and neither the jackpot result nor the missed reach display occurs. The variable display period is the shortest period on the special map side (specifically, 3 seconds).

Of the multiple timings including the timing of t16, the timing of t17, the timing of t18, the timing of t19, and the timing of t21, the timing of t20, which is the timing at which the timing of t19 ends, is subtracted by 1. Later, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0", and as shown in FIG. 72 (f), the ceiling time is shortened. At the timing of t20, as shown in FIG. 72 (d), the first time reduction end flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to “0”, and the time reduction state counter 134 is reset to the first time reduction continuation number. Therefore, the time saving state is extended.

After that, at the timing of t21, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the end-corresponding game round for executing the first hold information ends. However, since the first time saving end flag is cleared to "0" at the timing of t20 and the time saving state is extended, the time saving state does not end at the timing of t21.

As described above, the game times for which the first hold information is to be executed are executed as the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state, and in the game times corresponding to the end, the variation display period of the game times is a long period on the special figure side (specifically). Is 2 minutes). Then, the second hold information executed in the game time corresponding to the end is triggered by the game time to be executed, and the ceiling time is shortened, so that the time saving state is extended. By executing the game times for which the first hold information is to be executed as the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state, it is possible to give the benefit of extending the time saving state.

<11th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the specific processing of the variable display period executed by the main MPU 82 is different from that of the tenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the tenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the tenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying a variable display period in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

When "1" is not set in both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4701: NO), that is, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, steps S4702-step. The process of S4706 is executed. These steps S4702 to S4706 are the same as steps S4102 to S4106 in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 66) in the tenth embodiment. That is, in the low frequency support mode, if the first hold information is the start target of the game times, the change display period of the game times is selected by referring to the table group for the normal fluctuation period. If the second hold information is the target for starting the game round, the longest period (specifically, 10 minutes) on the special drawing side is selected as the variable display period of the game round regardless of the game result of the game round. The longest period on the special map side is longer than any of the variable display periods selected by referring to the table group for the normal variable period. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player operates the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the left side region PA2 to play the game.

When "1" is set in either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4701: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency. In the support mode, it is determined whether or not the start target of the current game round is the first hold information (step S4707). When the start target of the game round this time is the first hold information (step S4707: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first time reduction end flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4708). That is, it is determined whether or not the game times for which the first hold information of this time is the execution target is the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state. When "1" is set in the first time reduction end flag (step S4708: YES), the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special drawing side is displayed as the variation display period of the game times this time. When the timer counter on the first special figure side of the main RAM 84 is set (step S4709) and "1" is not set in the first time reduction end flag (step S4708: NO), the fluctuation display of the game times this time is displayed. As the period, long-term (specifically, 2 minutes) information on the special figure side is set in the first special figure side timer counter of the main RAM 84 (step S4710).

In the case of the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode (step S4701: YES) and the start target of the current game round is the second hold information (step S4707: NO), step S4711 -The process of step S4713 is executed. These steps S471 to S4713 are the same as steps S4109 to S4111 in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 66) in the tenth embodiment.

As described above, when the game times triggered by the first hold information are executed as game times other than the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state, the special figure is set as the variable display period of the game times triggered by the first hold information. A long term (specifically 2 minutes) on the side is selected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the first hold information in the time saving state. On the other hand, when the game round triggered by the first hold information is started as the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, the shortest period on the special figure side as the variable display period of the game round triggered by the first hold information. (Specifically, 3 seconds) is selected. The shortest period on the special figure side is a period selected as a variable display period of the game times in which the reach display does not occur, which is the game times triggered by the second hold information in the time saving state. As a result, when the game time triggered by the first hold information becomes the game time corresponding to the end in the time saving state, the game triggered by the second hold information in the situation where the game time corresponding to the end is executed. It is possible to prevent the times from being executed repeatedly.

In addition, when the game time corresponding to the end in the time saving state becomes the game time triggered by the first hold information, and if a big hit result occurs in the game time, the shortest duration of the game time on the special figure side is set. A period longer than the period may be selected. For example, the medium period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special drawing side may be selected, or the long period (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special drawing side may be selected. Further, using the jackpot table included in the short-term fluctuation table group read in step S4711 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time, the fluctuation display period corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is determined by lottery. It may be a determined configuration. As a result, even if the end-corresponding game times in the time-saving state becomes the game times triggered by the first hold information, it is possible to secure a certain period until the jackpot result occurs.

<12th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the specific processing of the variable display period executed by the main MPU 82 is different from that of the tenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the tenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the tenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying a variable display period in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

When "1" is not set in both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4801: NO), that is, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, steps S4802-step. The process of S4806 is executed. These steps S4802 to S4806 are the same as steps S4102 to S4106 in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 66) in the tenth embodiment. That is, in the low frequency support mode, if the first hold information is the start target of the game times, the change display period of the game times is selected by referring to the table group for the normal fluctuation period. If the second hold information is the target for starting the game round, the longest period (specifically, 10 minutes) on the special drawing side is selected as the variable display period of the game round regardless of the game result of the game round. The longest period on the special map side is longer than any of the variable display periods selected by referring to the table group for the normal variable period. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player operates the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the left side region PA2 to play the game.

When "1" is set in either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4801: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency. In the support mode, it is determined whether or not the start target of the current game round is the first hold information (step S4807). When the start target of the game round this time is the first hold information (step S4807: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first time reduction end flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4808). That is, it is determined whether or not the game times for which the first hold information of this time is the execution target is the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state.

When "1" is set in the first time saving end flag (step S4808: YES), the table group for the end timing is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S4809). Then, the variable display period selection process is executed using the table group for the end timing (step S4810), and the information of the variable display period selected in the selection process is input to the first special figure side timer of the main RAM 84. It is set in the counter (step S4811).

In the situation where the variable display period selection process in step S4810 is executed with reference to the table group for the end timing, if a jackpot result or a time saving result occurs in this game round, the shortest period on the special figure side (specifically). The information is read out for 3 seconds). Even in this embodiment, in the sound light side MPU 93, in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the second hold information is the start target of the game round, as in the tenth embodiment. When a variation command and a type command indicating that the symbol is displayed are received, the variation display of the symbols in the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 is started, and the effect corresponding to the variation display of the symbol is displayed. Even if the change command and the type command indicating that the first hold information is the start target of the game round are received by the speaker unit 65, the symbols in the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 are displayed. The variable display and the corresponding display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 do not execute the effect. In addition, when a jackpot result occurs in a game round triggered by the first hold information in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the symbol display device 41 displays the timing when the game round ends. An effect is performed to announce the occurrence of a jackpot result, and if a time-saving result occurs in a game round triggered by the first hold information in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the game round is announced. At the end timing, the symbol display device 41 performs an effect of notifying the occurrence of the time saving result. If both the jackpot result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS at that time is ended. By collating with the table corresponding to the end timing in the table group for timing, the information of the variable display period corresponding to the end is read out. As the information of the variation display period corresponding to the end, the shortest period of 3 seconds on the special map side, the medium period of 10 seconds on the special map side, and the long term of 2 minutes on the special map side are set. In the table corresponding to the end timing, the shortest period on the special map side is selected with a probability of 1/3, the middle period on the special map side is selected with a probability of 1/3, and the length of the special map side is selected with a probability of 1/3. The period is set to be selected.

If "1" is not set in the first time reduction end flag (step S4808: NO), long-term (specifically, 2 minutes) information on the special map side is displayed as the variation display period of this game. , Set to the first special figure side timer counter of the main RAM 84 (step S4812).

In the case of the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode (step S4801: YES) and the start target of the current game round is the second hold information (step S4807: NO), step S4813. ~ The process of step S4815 is executed. These steps S4813 to S4815 are the same as steps S4109 to S4111 in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 66) in the tenth embodiment.

As described above, when the game times triggered by the first hold information are executed as game times other than the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state, the special figure is set as the variable display period of the game times triggered by the first hold information. A long term (specifically 2 minutes) on the side is selected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the first hold information in the time saving state. On the other hand, when the game round triggered by the first hold information is started as the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, the shortest period on the special figure side as the variable display period of the game round triggered by the first hold information. (Specifically, 3 seconds), a medium period on the special map side (specifically, 10 seconds), or a long period on the special map side (specifically, 2 minutes) are selected by lottery. When the shortest period on the special figure side is selected, the game times corresponding to the end corresponding to the first hold information are executed repeatedly, and the game times triggered by the second hold information may be repeatedly executed. If the middle period on the special map side is selected, the game times corresponding to the end are executed with the first hold information as a trigger, and the game times with the second hold information as a trigger are executed a small number of times. Then, when a long period of time on the special drawing side is selected, the game times corresponding to the end corresponding to the first hold information are executed, and the game times triggered by the second hold information are repeated many times. .. As a result, when the game times corresponding to the end are executed with the first hold information as a trigger, the player expects that a longer variable display period is selected, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of each of the above embodiments. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other (for example, a combination of the first embodiment, the seventh embodiment and the tenth embodiment, a sixth embodiment, and the eighth embodiment). A combination of the embodiment and the ninth embodiment), the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined with each other, and the following configurations of the other embodiments may be applied individually or in combination.

(1) The subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is not limited to the configuration in which the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed after the setting process for the time saving result is executed in the specific finalizing process in each of the above embodiments. May be configured in which the setting process for the time saving result is executed after is executed. In this case, if the time reduction result is selected in the hit / fail judgment process in the game times in which the time reduction state can be set and the ceiling time reduction occurs in which the value of the ceiling counter 131 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", the ceiling time reduction is performed. The setting of the time saving state triggered by the time saving result has priority over the setting of the time saving state triggered by the time saving result. Therefore, the number of time reduction continuations set in the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction is set in the number of times equal to or greater than the time reduction continuation number set in the time reduction state triggered by the time reduction result or in the time reduction state triggered by the time reduction result. It is preferable that the number of times is larger than the number of times of shortening the time.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the first time saving result and the second time saving result are set as the time saving result, but only one of the first time saving result and the second time saving result is set. May be good. In addition, a configuration in which three or more types of time saving results are set may be used. In this case, the number of time reduction continuations set in the time reduction state triggered by the time reduction result is set in the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction regardless of the type of time reduction result as in each of the above embodiments. The number of continuations may be greater than or equal to the number of continuations, and at least for some of the time reduction results, the number of times of shortening of time may be less than the number of times of continuation of time reduction set in the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the number of time reduction continuations set in the time reduction state triggered by the time reduction result may be less than or equal to the number of time reduction continuations set in the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction. The number of times may be less than the number of times of continuation of time reduction set in the time reduction state triggered by.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, in the time saving state triggered by the time saving result, the first high frequency support mode may be set instead of the second high frequency support mode. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode is set in the time-saving state triggered by the jackpot result or the time-saving result, and the second high-frequency support mode is set in the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the first high-frequency support mode may be set instead of the second high-frequency support mode in the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time reduction. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode is set in the time-saving state triggered by the jackpot result or the ceiling time reduction, and the second high-frequency support mode is set in the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the first high frequency support mode is set in the time saving state triggered by one of the first time saving result and the second time saving result, and the second high frequency support mode is set in the time saving state triggered by the other. It may be configured as follows. This makes it possible to set the high frequency support mode according to the type of time saving result.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the probability of winning the electric service opening is different between the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode in the judgment of whether or not the normal figure is correct. However, in addition to or in place of the probability, other execution modes may be different. For example, one of the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode may have a configuration in which the duration of the variable display times on the normal figure display unit 38a is longer than that of the other, and the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode and the second One of the high-frequency support modes may have a configuration in which the average duration of the fluctuation display times on the normal map display unit 38a is longer than that of the other, and one of the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode may be used. The second operating port 34 or the special winning device 151 may be opened more often than the other in the open state of the general electric power, and one of the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode may be more frequently than the other. However, the total period during which the second operating port 34 or the special winning device 151 is open in the open state of the general electric power may be long. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode may be configured to be more advantageous than the second high-frequency support mode in any of the execution modes, and the second high-frequency support mode may be used in any of the execution modes. May be more advantageous than the first high-frequency support mode, and for some execution modes, the first high-frequency support mode is more advantageous than the second high-frequency support mode, and the remaining execution modes. The second high-frequency support mode may be more advantageous than the first high-frequency support mode.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the time saving state of the second high frequency support mode is generated regardless of whether the time saving result occurs or the ceiling time saving occurs, but the configuration is limited to this. For example, when a time saving result occurs, the time saving state of the first high frequency support mode occurs, whereas when a ceiling time saving occurs, the time saving state of the second high frequency support mode occurs. Also, when a time saving result occurs, the time saving state of the second high frequency support mode occurs, whereas when the ceiling time saving occurs, the time saving state of the first high frequency support mode occurs. Often, when a time saving result occurs, the time saving state of the first high frequency support mode occurs, whereas when a ceiling time saving occurs, a high probability state may occur, and the time saving result occurs. In this case, the time saving state of the second high frequency support mode may occur, whereas the high probability state may occur when the ceiling time saving occurs.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, when the time saving result is obtained in the pass / fail determination process and the time saving state occurs, it is notified that the time saving state is generated by the stop result of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop result corresponding to the time saving result is stopped and displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 in the middle of the variable display period of the game times, and then the game times are changed. Until the end timing, the notification may be executed so that the player can recognize that the time saving state triggered by the time saving result is started. However, in the case of this configuration, since it is necessary to specify whether or not a time saving state is generated triggered by the time saving result at the stage of determining the effect for the game times, the setting process for the time saving results is the start of the game times. Need to be executed from time to time.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, when a time saving state occurs triggered by a ceiling time saving, the notification that the time saving state occurs is not executed depending on the stop result of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the middle of the variable display period of the game times, the stop result corresponding to the ceiling time reduction is stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, and then the game times are displayed. Until the end timing, the notification may be executed so that the player can recognize that the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction is started. However, in the case of this configuration, since it is necessary to specify whether or not a time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs at the stage of determining the effect for the game round, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 starts the game round. Need to be executed from time to time.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, when the time saving result is obtained in the hit / fail judgment process and the game round in which the hit / fail judgment process is executed is completed, the start of a new game round in the time saving state triggered by the time saving result is immediately started. Although the configuration is allowed, it is not limited to this, and when a time saving state occurs due to a time saving result, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) is set when the game times resulting in the time saving result are completed. ) May be configured to prevent the start of a new game round. In this case, using the predetermined period, it is possible to execute the notification for making the player recognizable that the time saving state is started triggered by the time saving result.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, when the game times in which the ceiling time is shortened are completed, the start of a new game time in the time shortened state triggered by the ceiling time reduction is immediately allowed, but the configuration is limited to this. If a time reduction condition occurs due to the ceiling time reduction, a new game rotation will be started for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) when the game rotation that has become the ceiling time reduction is completed. It may be configured to be blocked. In this case, using the predetermined period, it is possible to execute a notification for the player to be able to recognize that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving is started.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, when the game round is completed, the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134, the subtraction process of the variation selection state counter 132, the setting process for the time saving result, and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 are executed. However, these processes may be executed after the pass / fail determination process is executed and before the specific process of the variable display period is executed. In this case, since it is possible to specify whether or not the ceiling time reduction occurs before executing the specification processing of the variable display period, it corresponds to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction as a result of stopping the special figure display units 37a and 37b. The stop result may be selected, or the stop result corresponding to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction may be selected as the stop result in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, both the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 and the setting process for the time saving result are executed at the end of the game round, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state counter 134 is not limited to this. The subtraction process may be executed at the start of the game round, and the setting process for the time saving result may be executed at the end of the game round.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, both the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 are executed at the end of the game round, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state counter 134 is not limited to this. The subtraction process of the above may be executed at the start of the game round, and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 may be executed at the end of the game round.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the time saving state is configured to end when the game times of a predetermined time saving continuation number are exhausted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ending lottery process executed in the time saving state is not limited to this. When the result of the end lottery is reached, the time saving state may be terminated. In this case, if the end lottery process is executed and the end lottery result is obtained, the process of ending the time saving state is executed before the setting process for the time saving result and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131. May be good. As a result, it becomes possible to start a new time saving state triggered by the time saving result or the ceiling time saving in the game times when the time saving state is completed.

(17) In the first embodiment and the like, both the setting process for the time saving result and the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 are executed at the end of the game round, but the present invention is not limited to this. The setting process for the time saving result may be executed at the start of the game round, and the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 may be executed at the end of the game round.

(18) In the first embodiment and the like, both the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 and the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 are executed at the end of the game round, but the present invention is not limited to this. The subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 may be executed at the start of the game round, and the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 may be executed at the end of the game round.

(19) In each of the above embodiments, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted even if the game is executed in the high probability state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even in the high probability state. The value of the ceiling counter 131 may be subtracted when the game times are executed. In this case, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 may become "0" in the high probability state, but in this case, it is preferable to invalidate the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction and continue the high probability state.

(20) In each of the above embodiments, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted when the game is executed even in the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state is not limited to this. Even if the game times are executed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 may not be subtracted.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, a numerical value such as a fixed number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 when a predetermined trigger occurs, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented by 1 when the game is executed. The time saving state is generated when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ceiling counter 131 is set to "" when a predetermined opportunity occurs. When "0" is cleared and the game round is executed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is added by 1, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the addition becomes a value corresponding to the occurrence trigger such as the fixed number of ceilings. It may be configured to generate a time saving state.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the hit random number counter C1 is used to determine whether or not to generate a time saving result in the hit random number counter C1. May be configured to determine whether or not to generate a time saving result by another determination process using another random number counter. In this case, in the third embodiment, it may be configured to determine whether or not to generate a time saving result in the fall determination process using the fall random number counter C5.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the type random number counter C2 is used to determine the type of the time saving result, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a random number counter different from the type random number counter C2 is used. It may be configured to determine the type of time saving result. Further, instead of deciding whether or not to generate a time saving result in the winning / failing determination process using the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot result, the first time saving result, and the first hitting result in the winning / failing determination process using the winning random number counter C1. It may be configured to determine whether to generate a two-time reduction result or an out-of-time result.

(24) In the first embodiment, when an information abnormality in the main RAM 84 occurs, the ceiling counter 131 is configured to set information corresponding to the same number of fixed ceilings as when the open / close execution mode occurs. The present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the number of times less than the fixed number of ceilings when the open / close execution mode occurs may be set. Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the set value update process is executed when the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the ceiling counter 131 corresponds to the same fixed number of ceilings as when the open / close execution mode occurs. Although the configuration is such that information is set, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that information corresponding to the number of times less than the number of fixed ceilings when the open / close execution mode occurs is set.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0", the ceiling counter 131 is set to the ceiling counter 131 when an information abnormality occurs in the configuration in which the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs. The configuration is such that the information on the number of ceilings is set, but the configuration is not limited to this, and an information abnormality occurs in a configuration in which a high probability state occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after 1 subtraction becomes "0". Information on the number of ceilings may be set in the ceiling counter 131 when it occurs, and an information error occurs in a configuration in which the open / close execution mode occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction becomes "0". In this case, the ceiling counter 131 may be configured to set information on the number of ceilings.

(26) In the first embodiment or the like, when the set value update process is executed, the information on the number of ceilings is not set in the ceiling counter 131, but when the set value update process is executed, the ceiling The counter 131 may be configured to set information on the number of ceilings. This makes it possible to set the ceiling count information in the ceiling counter 131 when the set value is changed.

(27) In each of the above embodiments, the ceiling counter 131 is not set with information on the number of ceilings when the RAM clear process is executed. However, when the RAM clear process is executed, the number of ceilings is not set in the ceiling counter 131. It may be configured to set the information of. This makes it possible to set the ceiling count information in the ceiling counter 131 when the main RAM 84 is cleared.

(28) In each of the above embodiments, when the setting change operation, the setting confirmation operation, and the RAM clear operation are not performed and the operating power supply is started in the situation where the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state. The ceiling counter 131 is configured to set information corresponding to the fixed number of ceilings, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the situation, information corresponding to a larger number of times than the fixed number of ceilings may be set. In this situation, the information corresponding to the number of times less than the number of fixed ceilings may be set. Further, when the operation power supply is started in the situation where the setting change operation, the setting confirmation operation, and the RAM clear operation are not performed and the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the ceiling is fixed to the ceiling counter 131. The information corresponding to the number of times may be set, the information corresponding to the number of times larger than the fixed ceiling number may be set, or the information corresponding to the number of times less than the fixed ceiling number may be set. .. Further, when the supply of operating power is started while the dedicated operation button is being operated, the ceiling counter 131 may be configured to set the information corresponding to the fixed number of ceilings, which is larger than the fixed number of ceilings. The corresponding information may be set, or the information corresponding to the number of times less than the fixed ceiling number may be set.

(29) In the first embodiment or the like, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set with the information corresponding to the number of ceilings in the process during the determination of the special figure, but the configuration is limited to this. It may be configured to set the information corresponding to the number of ceilings in the ceiling counter 131 at the timing in the middle of the opening period, and the ceiling counter 131 may be set at the timing immediately before the first round game in the open / close execution mode is started. The configuration may be such that information corresponding to the number of ceilings is set. Even in these cases, it is possible to set the information corresponding to the number of ceilings in the ceiling counter 131 when the open / close execution mode is started.

(30) In the sixth embodiment, when it is confirmed that the ending period has passed by the special electric power ending process, the ceiling counter 131 is configured to set the information corresponding to the number of ceilings, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the ceiling counter 131 may be configured to set information corresponding to the number of ceilings at the timing when the last round game in the open / close execution mode is completed, and the number of ceilings may be set in the ceiling counter 131 immediately before the ending period starts. The information corresponding to the number of times of ceiling may be set in the ceiling counter 131 at the timing in the middle of the ending period.

(31) In the sixth embodiment, when it is specified in the power failure monitoring process that the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the low-frequency big hit result or the first small hit result, the number of times is larger than the number of fixed ceilings. The configuration is such that the information corresponding to a certain number of special ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the above situation, the information corresponding to the fixed number of ceilings may be set in the ceiling counter 131. Often, in the above situation, the ceiling counter 131 may be configured to set information corresponding to a number of times less than the fixed number of ceilings. Further, in the power failure monitoring process, even if the trigger is not the low frequency big hit result or the first small hit result in the open / close execution mode, the ceiling counter 131 may be configured to set the information corresponding to the number of ceilings.

(32) In the first embodiment or the like, when the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", the reach frequency state is high and the reach display is likely to occur. The configuration is not limited, and when the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", an effect indicating that the ceiling time reduction is approaching may be performed. By selecting a variable display period different from the case where the reach display occurs and the case where the result is completely off, the variable display period of the game times in this state is selected from the information of the variable display period, and the sound light side MPU93 Can identify that it is in a state where an effect indicating that the ceiling time is approaching is to be executed.

(33) In the first embodiment or the like, when the information on the number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 triggered by the open / close execution mode, the information corresponding to the reference number of period switching is set in the variable selection state counter 132, but the operation is performed. When the information on the number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 in the main process when the power supply is started, the information corresponding to the reference number of period switching is not set in the variable selection state counter 132. When the information on the number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 in the main process when the supply of operating power is started, the information corresponding to the period switching reference number is set in the variable selection state counter 132. May be configured to set. That is, when the information on the number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131, the information corresponding to the period switching reference number may be set in the variable selection state counter 132 at all times. In this case, if there are a plurality of types of ceiling counts set in the ceiling counter 131, information corresponding to a predetermined number of times less than the ceiling count is set in the variable selection state counter 132. Regardless of which number of ceilings is set, it is possible to achieve a high reach frequency state in the game times before the predetermined number of times the ceiling time is shortened.

(34) In the first embodiment or the like, even if the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", the reach high frequency state does not occur when the time is shortened. However, the configuration may be such that the reach frequency is high even in the time saving state. When the reach frequency is high in the short time state, the probability that the reach display will occur in the game times that result in the loss increases, and the variable display period for a long period is selected in the game times in which the jackpot result or the loss reach display occurs. Although the probability of being played is high, the shortest period on the special map side will be selected in the game times of the out-of-game result where the reach display does not occur.

(35) In the seventh embodiment, when the value of the game count counter of the main RAM 84 becomes the reference number of times, the jackpot result does not occur in any of the game states, and the reach display does not occur in the game times. Although the configuration is such that the control is executed, the configuration is not limited to this, and even if the reference number is reached in the high probability state, the control may not be performed, and the reference number is reached in the time saving state. Even if the control is not performed, the control may not be performed.

(36) In the seventh embodiment, when the value of the game count counter of the main RAM 84 becomes the reference number, the control that the reach display does not occur in the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur only in that game time is executed. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the reach display occurs in the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur from the game times that became the reference number to the game times that are a specific number of times (for example, 3 times). It may be configured so that the control that does not perform is executed.

(37) In the seventh embodiment, the control that the reach display does not occur is executed in the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur every time the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the reference number. The configuration is not limited to this, and the reach display is displayed in the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur every time the number of game times executed after the open / close execution mode or the time saving state ends becomes the reference number. The control that does not occur may be executed, and the control that the reach display does not occur is executed in the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur every time the number of game times executed after the time saving state ends becomes the reference number. It may be configured as such.

(38) In the eighth embodiment, the variable selection state counter 132 corresponds to the predetermined number of switching reference times regardless of whether the time saving state triggered by the time saving result or the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving is completed. Information is set, and when the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", the reach high frequency state is set, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the fluctuation selection state counter 132 is not limited to this. The process of setting the information corresponding to the predetermined number of switching reference times is executed when the time saving state triggered by the time saving result ends, but is not executed when the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving ends. However, it may be executed when the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving ends, but not executed when the time saving state triggered by the time saving result ends.

(39) In the ninth embodiment, when a time reduction result or a ceiling time reduction occurs in the time reduction state, the larger number of the remaining number of continuations in the current time reduction state and the time reduction continuation number corresponding to the new time reduction state. The number of times is set to be the remaining number of continuations in the subsequent time saving state, but it is not limited to this, and is less than the remaining number of continuations in the current time saving state and the number of time saving continuations corresponding to the new time saving state. The number of times on the side may be the remaining number of continuations in the subsequent time reduction state, and the number of time reduction continuations corresponding to the new time reduction state is the remaining number of continuations in the subsequent time reduction state regardless of the remaining number of continuations in the current time reduction state. The configuration may be the number of continuations, and the number of results obtained by adding the number of continuations corresponding to the new time reduction to the remaining number of continuations in the current time reduction state is the remaining number of continuations in the subsequent time reduction state. May be good.

(40) In the ninth embodiment, when a time reduction result or a ceiling time reduction occurs in the time reduction state in the first high frequency support mode, the remaining number of continuations of the time reduction state is the first time reduction continuation number or the second time reduction continuation number. Although it can be set to, the configuration is such that the time saving state, which is the first high frequency support mode, continues, but it is not limited to this, and the remaining number of times of the time saving state is the first time saving continuation number or the second time saving continuation. It may be configured to be set to the number of times and to be in the time saving state which is the second high frequency support mode.

(41) In each of the above embodiments, when a time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process in a high probability state or the like and the time saving result is invalidated, the non-reach out-of-reach symbol is displayed in the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. The combination of the above is stopped and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the combination of the out-of-reach symbols may be stopped and displayed. Even in this case, it is difficult for the player to recognize from the stop results in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that the time saving result has been invalidated.

(42) In each of the above embodiments, when a time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process in a high probability state or the like and the time saving result is invalidated, the non-reach out-of-reach symbol is displayed in the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. The combination of is stopped and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the time saving result is invalidated, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are stopped as in the case where the time saving result is not invalidated. As a result, the combination of the first time saving symbols or the combination of the second time saving symbols may be stopped and displayed.

(43) In each of the above embodiments, when the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process and the time saving result is invalidated in a high probability state or the like, the case where the time saving result is the first time saving result and the case where the time saving result is the second time saving result. However, the display content of the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 is different, but the present invention is not limited to this. In any case of the result, the display content of the state suggestion area 43 may be the same.

(44) In the tenth to twelfth embodiments, the hold that triggered the start of the game round until the game round that triggered the value of the time saving state counter 134 after 1 subtraction to become "0" is completed. The configuration is such that the time saving state does not end even if the game round triggered by the hold information on the side different from the information ends, but the time saving state is not limited to this, and the time saving state counter 134 after 1 subtraction in the time saving state If the specific game times started before the predetermined game times that triggered the value to become "0" are continued, the specific game times will be performed even if the predetermined game times are completed. The configuration may be such that the time saving state is continued until the end. When the predetermined game time is a game time triggered by the second hold information and the specific game time is a game time triggered by the first hold information, the tenth embodiment or the twelfth embodiment is the first. 1 When a long period on the special drawing side is selected as the variable display period of the game times triggered by the hold information, even after the above-mentioned predetermined game times triggered by the second hold information are completed, the above By the time the specific game round is completed, it is possible to repeatedly digest the game round triggered by the second hold information.

(45) In the tenth to twelfth embodiments, when the fluctuation display period of the game times is determined by referring to the table group for short-term fluctuations in the game times triggered by the second hold information in the time saving state. Even if the result of the hit / fail determination process of the game round is a time-saving result, the variable display period is determined in the same manner as the game round of the off result in which the reach display does not occur, but the configuration is limited to this. There is no such thing, and when the fluctuation display period of the game time is determined by referring to the table group for short-term fluctuation in the game time triggered by the second hold information, the result of the hit / fail judgment processing of the game time is shortened. If it is a result, the variable display period may be determined in a manner different from that of the game times of the off-result in which the reach display does not occur. As a result, when the time saving result occurs in the time saving state, the mode of determining the variation display period of the game times can be set to the corresponding mode.

(46) In the first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments described above, as a result of the hit / fail determination process of the main MPU 82, a small hit result exists in addition to the big hit result, the time saving result and the missed result. May be. The small hit result is a win / fail result that does not trigger a shift to the open / close execution mode, but does not trigger a shift to the win / fail lottery mode or the support mode. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once or twice in a short period of time (for example, 1 second). The number of balls to be entered is about 1 to 3. Even if the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the small hit result, it is preferable not to set the number of ceilings in the ceiling counter 131 and the number of times in the variable selection state counter 132. As a result, it is possible to generate a ceiling time reduction and a high reach frequency state based on the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result.

(47) When the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 in the case where the time reduction result is obtained in each of the above embodiments, the second high frequency support mode is set or not set with the time reduction result as a trigger. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 in the case of a time saving result is triggered by the time saving result, and the second high frequency support mode is set. The configuration may be the same depending on whether it is set or not. For example, when the first time saving result is obtained, the blue color is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43 regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode is set with the first time saving result as a trigger, and the second time saving result is obtained. When a result is obtained, green may be stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43 regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode is set triggered by the second time saving result.

(48) Display control based on the command output from the main control device 71 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 101 is controlled by the voice emission control device 91 based on the command output from the main control device 71. The device 101 may be configured to control the voice emission control device 91. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 91 and the display control device 101 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 71, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 71. Further, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 71 to the voice emission control device 91 and the configuration of the command output from the voice emission control device 91 to the display control device 101 are also arbitrary.

(49) The device for executing the effect for the game round is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the effect for the game round is executed by the operation of the movable decorative member. However, the effect for game rounds may be executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or the effect for game rounds may be executed by a combination of all or a part of each of the above modes. good.

(50) Another type of pachinko machine different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines that generate a right when they enter and become a big hit, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrange ball machines, and game machines such as sparrow balls.

In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the gaming machine body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. Game times control means (first to eighth embodiments) that control game times execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that game rotation operation is executed in game times. (Function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change process, and special figure determination process) of the main MPU 82 in
When it is specified that a predetermined start trigger (time reduction result, ceiling time reduction) has occurred in the game round, the predetermined game state (low probability mode and second high frequency support mode, time reduction state) is started and the said. A predetermined start process that does not start the predetermined game state when it is specified that a predetermined start opportunity has not occurred (a setting process for a time saving result or a ceiling executed by the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments). Predetermined start execution means for executing the subtraction process of the counter 131 (a function of executing the setting process for the time saving result of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments, the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments). Function to execute the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131)
When it is specified that a predetermined end trigger (the value of the time saving state counter 134 after 1 subtraction becomes "0") has occurred in the game round, the predetermined game state is terminated and the predetermined end trigger is reached. Is executed (subtraction processing of the time saving state counter 134 executed by the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) that does not end the predetermined gaming state when it is specified that Predetermined end execution means (a function of executing the subtraction process of the time reduction state counter 134 of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) and
With
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined start process is executed after the predetermined end process is executed in one game round.

According to the feature A1, it is specified that the predetermined game state is started when the predetermined start trigger is specified in the predetermined start process, and the predetermined end trigger is generated in the predetermined end process. In that case, the predetermined game state ends. Therefore, the player who expects to be in the predetermined game state expects that a predetermined start opportunity will occur if the player is not in the predetermined game state, and if the player is in the predetermined game state. Expects that a predetermined termination opportunity does not occur. In this case, the predetermined start process is executed after the predetermined end process is executed in one game round. As a result, when both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end processing is executed first in the game round to end the current predetermined game state. , The predetermined game state is restarted by executing the predetermined start process later in the game times. Therefore, it is possible to continue the predetermined game state even in the game times when the predetermined end trigger occurs. Further, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect by a simple configuration in which the execution order of the processes in one game is the order in which the predetermined start process is executed after the execution of the predetermined end process.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined start executing means invalidates the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger in the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature A2, since the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalid in the predetermined game state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from being newly started in the middle of the predetermined game state. In this case, if both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end processing is executed first in the game round, so that the current predetermined game state is terminated. Later, in the game round, the predetermined game state is restarted by executing the predetermined start process later. As a result, in a configuration in which the predetermined game state is not newly started in the middle of the predetermined game state, when both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined start is started. It is possible to treat the occurrence of an opportunity as effective and to allow a situation in which a predetermined gaming state continues for a long time.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein both the predetermined end processing and the predetermined start processing are executed after the game rotation operation in the game rotation execution means is completed in the game rotation.

According to the feature A3, since both the predetermined end process and the predetermined start process are executed after the game turn operation is completed, these processes advance the process for starting the game turn operation and the game turn operation. It will be executed in the situation where the processing for this is not executed, and the processing load can be distributed. Further, even in such a configuration in which the processing load is distributed, the configuration of the above feature A1 is provided, and the predetermined start processing is executed after the predetermined end processing is executed in one game round, so that the predetermined start processing is executed once. When both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in the game round, the predetermined end processing is executed first in the game round to end the current predetermined game state, and then the predetermined start trigger is later in the game round. When the process is executed, the predetermined gaming state is restarted.

Feature A4. A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed is provided.
The number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means, is the predetermined number of triggers (the number of fixed ceilings in the first to fourth, seventh, and eighth embodiments, and the number of first ceilings or the first ceiling in the fifth embodiment. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that the predetermined start trigger occurs when the number of ceilings is reached, or the number of fixed ceilings or the number of special ceilings in the sixth embodiment).

According to the feature A4, in a configuration in which a predetermined gaming state is generated based on the execution of a predetermined number of game rounds, the configuration of the above feature A1 is provided, and a predetermined end process is executed in one game round. Since the predetermined start process is executed later, if both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end process is executed first in the game round, so that the current predetermined game is executed. After the state is completed, the predetermined game state is restarted by executing the predetermined start process in the game times. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that a predetermined game state will occur when the game times of a predetermined number of times have been executed.

Feature A5. Predetermined lottery means (main side MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) for executing a predetermined lottery process (acquisition process of pending information and pass / fail determination process executed by the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) (Function to execute the acquisition process of the pending information and the pass / fail judgment process)
The game time control means controls the game time execution means so as to obtain an operation result corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined start trigger occurs when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a predetermined lottery result (time saving result).

According to the feature A5, in a configuration in which a predetermined game state is generated based on the result of the predetermined lottery process being the predetermined lottery result, the configuration of the above feature A1 is provided, and the predetermined end process is executed in one game round. Since the predetermined start process is executed after this, if both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end process is executed first in the game round, which is the current situation. After the predetermined game state is completed, the predetermined game state is restarted by executing the predetermined start process later in the game times. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that a predetermined gaming state will occur when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result.

Feature A6. A specific measuring means (time reduction state counter 134) for measuring the number of times the game is executed in the predetermined game state is provided.
A feature characterized in that the predetermined end trigger occurs when the number of executions of the game times measured by the specific measuring means becomes the specified number of triggers (the number of continuations of the first time reduction and the number of continuations of the second time reduction). The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A5.

According to the feature A6, since the predetermined game state is terminated based on the number of times the game times executed in the predetermined game state is the specific number of triggers, the trigger for the end of the predetermined game state is clear to the player. It becomes.

Feature A7.1 When both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in the game round, the number of game rounds executed in the predetermined game state before the predetermined end process is executed and the number of times of the game round. The total number of times of the game times executed in the predetermined game state after the predetermined start process is executed is set when the game state is changed from the game state other than the predetermined game state to the predetermined game state. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the number of times the predetermined gaming state can be continued is greater than the number of times the game can be continued.

According to the feature A7, when both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the configuration of the above feature A1 is provided, and the predetermined start processing is executed after the predetermined end processing is executed in one game round. Since the processing is executed, if both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end processing is executed first in the game round to end the current predetermined game state. After that, the predetermined game state is restarted by executing the predetermined start process later in the game times. When such an event occurs, the number of game times executed in the predetermined game state before the predetermined end process is executed and the number of game times executed in the predetermined game state after the predetermined start process is executed. The total number of times with the number of times may be larger than the number of times that the predetermined gaming state can be continued, which is set when the predetermined gaming state is changed from the gaming state that is not the predetermined gaming state. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage that both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round.

Feature A8. Predetermined ball entry means on which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter (second operating port 34 in the first, fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments, special winning device 151 in the sixth embodiment). When,
Acquisition means for acquiring special information (second hold information) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (steps in the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments). A function of executing the process of S709, a function of executing the process of step S2806 in the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment), and
With the grant determination means (function for executing the validity determination processing of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. ,
A privilege to give a privilege (open / close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (big hit result) assuming that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Granting means (a function of executing the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, the special electric closing processing, and the special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments).
The predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal power control process of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between the closed state and the open state. ,
With
In each game round, the game round control means starts the game round operation and ends the game round operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game round. It is intended to allow the diversion operation to be performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball-entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to the feature A8, when the special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which the player is given a privilege, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state when the player is in the predetermined game state than when the player is in the separate game state. Therefore, the player is expected to be in the predetermined gaming state and to continue the predetermined gaming state for a long time. In this case, since the configuration of the above feature A1 is provided and the predetermined start process is executed after the predetermined end process is executed in one game round, both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger are executed in one game round. When is generated, the predetermined game state is changed by executing the predetermined start process later in the game after the current predetermined game state is completed by executing the predetermined end process first in the game times. It will be started again. Therefore, if a predetermined end trigger occurs, the player expects that the predetermined start trigger will occur in the game times in which the predetermined end trigger occurs.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features A1 to A8, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, and features M1 to M4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature A group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area and a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery to shift to a special game state, or a predetermined entry ball It is known that a game ball enters the club to shift to a special game state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to preferably execute a process for advancing the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Game times control means (first, fourth, fifth) that controls game times execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that game rotation operation is executed in game times. , Function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change process, and special figure determination process of the main MPU 82 in the 7th to 9th embodiments)
When it is specified that a specific end trigger (the value of the high probability state counter 133 after 1 subtraction becomes "0") has occurred in the game times, the specific game state (high probability state) is terminated. , The specific end process that does not end the specific game state when it is specified that the specific end trigger has not occurred (in the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments). Subtraction processing of the high probability state counter 133 of the main MPU 82 in the specific end execution means (first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) for executing the execution high probability state counter 133 subtraction processing). Function to execute) and
When it is specified that a predetermined start trigger (time reduction result, ceiling time reduction) has occurred in the game round, the predetermined game state (low probability mode and second high frequency support mode, time reduction state) is started, and the corresponding game state is started. A predetermined start process (executed by the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) that does not start the predetermined game state when it is specified that the predetermined start trigger has not occurred. Setting process for time saving result or setting process for time saving result of main MPU 82 in the predetermined start execution means (first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) for executing the setting process for the time saving result or the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131. A function to execute the process, a function to execute the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 of the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments), and
With
The predetermined start executing means is for preventing the predetermined start trigger from occurring when the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state, or the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state. In that case, the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game round.

According to the feature B1, it is specified that the specific game state is terminated when the specific end trigger is specified in the specific end process, and the predetermined start trigger is generated in the predetermined start process. In that case, since the predetermined game state is started, the player who expects to be in the specific game state expects that the specific end trigger does not occur in the specific game state, and the player who expects to be in the predetermined game state. Expects that a predetermined start trigger occurs in a gaming state that is not a predetermined gaming state.

In this case, if the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state, the predetermined start trigger does not occur, or if the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state, the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger becomes invalid. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined gaming states from being duplicated in the specific gaming state.

Further, since the specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game time, even if the specific game time ends, the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state. If the predetermined start trigger does not occur, or if the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state, the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger becomes invalid. As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined gaming state from occurring in the gaming rounds started in the specific gaming state even in the last gaming round in the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the giving of profits to the player from becoming excessive. Further, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect by a simple configuration in which the execution order of the processes in one game is the order in which the specific end process is executed after the execution of the predetermined start process.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature B2, since the specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state, the player can use the configuration in which the predetermined gaming state does not occur in the game times executed in the specific gaming state. It is possible not to give a big disadvantage.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein both the specific end process and the predetermined start process are executed after the game turn operation in the game turn execution means is completed in the game turn.

According to the feature B3, since both the specific end process and the predetermined start process are executed after the game turn operation is completed, these processes advance the process for starting the game turn operation and the game turn operation. It will be executed in the situation where the processing for this is not executed, and the processing load can be distributed. Further, even in such a configuration in which the processing load is distributed, the configuration of the above feature B1 is provided, and when the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state, the predetermined start trigger does not occur, or the predetermined start is determined in the specific game state. In a configuration in which the occurrence of a predetermined start trigger is invalidated when the start process is executed, the specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game round, so that a profit is given to the player. Can be prevented from becoming excessive.

Feature B4. Predetermined lottery means (first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments of the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments of the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments, where the main MPU 82 executes the reserved information acquisition process and the pass / fail determination process). It is provided with a function of executing the holding information acquisition process and the pass / fail determination process of the main MPU 82 in the fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments).
The game time control means controls the game time execution means so as to obtain an operation result corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process.
The configuration is such that the predetermined start trigger occurs when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result (time saving result).
The predetermined start executing means has any one of features B1 to B3 characterized in that when the predetermined start process is executed in the specific gaming state, the generation of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated. Described gaming machine.

According to the feature B4, in the configuration in which the predetermined game state is generated based on the result of the predetermined lottery process, the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state with the configuration of the feature B1. In this case, in a configuration in which the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalid, the specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game round, so that the profit is excessively given to the player. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

Feature B5. A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed is provided.
As the predetermined start process, the predetermined start execution means updates the number of times the game times are executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means when the game times are executed (first, fourth). , Step S1503 executed by the main MPU 82 in the fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments, step S3703) executed by the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, and measured by the predetermined measuring means. When the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of triggers (the number of fixed ceilings in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments), the predetermined start trigger is generated as the predetermined game. Start execution process for starting the state (step S1506 executed by the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments, and executed by the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment. Step S3705) is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the number-of-times updating process is not executed in the specific gaming state.

According to feature B5, in a configuration in which a predetermined game state is generated based on the execution of a predetermined number of game times, even if the game number is executed in the specific game state, it is measured by the predetermined measuring means. The number update process for updating the number of times the game has been executed is not executed. As a result, in the specific gaming state, not only the predetermined gaming state does not occur, but also the number of times updating process that brings the predetermined gaming state closer to the occurrence can be prevented from being executed. In this case, since the configuration of the above feature B1 is provided and the specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game round, the predetermined game state is executed even in the game round in which the specific game state ends. It is possible to prevent the update process from being executed the number of times that the occurrence of

Feature B6. In the acquisition means (first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments, the main MPU 82 is used to acquire special information (first hold information, second hold information) based on the acquisition opportunity. (Function to execute the processing of step S704 and step S709) and
The grant determination means (the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Function to execute the pass / fail judgment process) and
A privilege to give a privilege (open / close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (big hit result) assuming that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Granting means (functions of executing the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, the special electric closing processing, and the special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments).
With
In each game round, the game round control means starts the game round operation and ends the game round operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game round. It is intended to allow the diversion operation to be performed.
The specific gaming state is described in any one of features B1 to B5, which is a gaming state in which the result of the grant determination is more likely to be the grant correspondence result than the separate gaming state (normal gaming state). Gaming machine.

According to the feature B6, in the specific game state, the probability that the result of the grant determination becomes the grant correspondence result is high, so that the specific game state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

Feature B7. Predetermined ball entry means (first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments, second actuation port 34) through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
Acquisition means (main side in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) for acquiring special information (second hold information) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means. (Function to execute the process of step S709 in MPU82) and
The grant determination means (the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Function to execute the pass / fail judgment process) and
A privilege to give a privilege (open / close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (big hit result) assuming that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Granting means (functions of executing the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, the special electric closing processing, and the special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments).
The predetermined ball entry control means (the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments of the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments in which the predetermined ball entry means can be switched between the closed state and the open state) (Function to execute electric control processing) and
With
In each game round, the game round control means starts the game round operation and ends the game round operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game round. It is intended to allow the diversion operation to be performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball-entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to the feature B7, when the special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which the player is given a privilege, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state when the player is in the predetermined game state than when the player is in the separate game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to feature B7, wherein the specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature B8, the specific gaming state is more advantageous than the predetermined gaming state in terms of the ease with which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a great disadvantage even if the predetermined game state does not occur in the game times executed in the specific game state.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B8, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, and features M1 to M4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. The game turn control means (main side MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that controls the game turn execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that the game turn operation is executed in the game turn. Function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change process, and special figure decision process),
A state storage means (start high accuracy flag of the main RAM 84) for storing information on the game state when the game round is started, and
When it is specified that a predetermined start trigger (time reduction result, ceiling time reduction) has occurred after the game rotation operation is completed, the predetermined game state (low probability mode and second high frequency support mode) is the time reduction state. ) Is started, and when it is specified that the predetermined start trigger has not occurred, the predetermined start process (setting for the time saving result executed by the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that does not start the predetermined game state is started. Predetermined start execution means for executing processing or subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 (a function of executing the setting processing for the time saving result of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, the ceiling counter of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment). Function to execute the subtraction process of 131) and
With
The predetermined start execution means executes the predetermined start process in a situation where specific state information is stored in the state storage means (a situation in which "1" is set in the start high probability flag of the main RAM 84). In this case, the gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined start trigger is prevented from occurring or the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated.

According to the feature C1, the predetermined game state is started when the predetermined start trigger is specified in the predetermined start process, so that the player who expects to be in the predetermined game state is in the predetermined game state. It is expected that a predetermined start opportunity will occur in a game state that is not. Further, since the predetermined start process is executed after the game rounding operation is completed, the predetermined start process is executed in a situation where the process for starting the game rounding operation and the process for advancing the game rounding operation are not executed. This makes it possible to distribute the processing load.

In this case, when the predetermined start process is executed in the situation where the specific state information is stored in the state storage means, the predetermined start trigger is prevented from occurring or the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game states from being duplicated in the game state that triggers the storage of the specific state information. In addition, the state storage means stores information on the game state when the game round is started. As a result, in a configuration in which the predetermined start process is executed after the game round operation is completed, the game state when the game round is started is a game state that triggers the storage of specific state information, and is predetermined in the game round. Even if the end condition of the game state is satisfied before the start process is executed, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring in the game times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring in the game times in which the profit of the game state that triggers the storage of the specific state information is given, and the profit is excessively given to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

Feature C2. The state storage means stores the specific state information when the game state when the game round is started is a specific game state (high probability state).
When it is specified that the specific end trigger (the value of the high probability state counter 133 after 1 subtraction becomes "0") has occurred after the game rotation operation is completed. A specific end process (executed by the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that does not end the specific game state when the specific game state (high probability state) is terminated and it is specified that the specific end trigger has not occurred. It is characterized by having a specific end execution means (a function of executing the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) for executing the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133. Features The gaming machine according to C1.

According to the feature C2, since the specific game state is terminated when it is specified that the specific end trigger has occurred in the specific end process, the player who expects to be in the specific game state is in the specific game state. It is expected that the specific termination opportunity will not occur in. Further, since the specific end process is executed after the game rounding operation is completed, the specific end process is executed in a situation where the process for starting the game rounding operation and the process for advancing the game rounding operation are not executed. This makes it possible to distribute the processing load.

In this case, both the specific end process and the predetermined start process are executed after the game rounding operation is completed. Then, depending on the execution order of the specific end process and the predetermined start process, the predetermined start process may be executed after the game state is not the specific game state even if the game times are started in the specific game state. .. On the other hand, in the game rounds having the configuration of the above feature C1 and started in the specific game round, the specific state information is stored in the information storage means when the game round is started, and the specific state is stored in the state storage means. When the predetermined start process is executed in the situation where the information is stored, the predetermined start trigger is prevented from occurring or the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated. Therefore, regardless of the execution order of the specific end process and the predetermined start process, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring in the game times started in the specific game state.

Feature C3. The state storage means stores the specific state information when the game state when the game round is started is a specific game state (high probability state).
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature C3, since the specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state, the player can use the configuration in which the predetermined gaming state does not occur in the game times started in the specific gaming state. It is possible not to give a big disadvantage.

Feature C4. Acquisition means for acquiring special information (first hold information, second hold information) based on the occurrence of an acquisition opportunity (in the second embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S704 and S709 in the main MPU 82). When,
Grant determination means (function for executing the validity determination process of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information (win / fail determination process), and
A privilege to give a privilege (open / close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (big hit result) assuming that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Granting means (a function of executing the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, the special electric closing processing, and the special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment),
With
In each game round, the game round control means starts the game round operation and ends the game round operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game round. It is intended to allow the diversion operation to be performed.
The gaming machine according to feature C2 or C3, wherein the specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the result of the grant determination is more likely to be the grant correspondence result than the separate gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to the feature C4, in the specific game state, the probability that the result of the grant determination becomes the grant correspondence result is high, so that the specific game state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

Feature C5. Predetermined lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery process (acquisition process of hold information and pass / fail determination process executed by the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) (acquisition process of hold information of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) And a function to execute the pass / fail judgment process)
The game time control means controls the game time execution means so as to obtain an operation result corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process.
The configuration is such that the predetermined start trigger occurs when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result (time saving result).
The predetermined start executing means is characterized in that when the predetermined start process is executed in a situation where the specific state information is stored in the state storage means, the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated. Features The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C4.

According to the feature C5, in a configuration in which a predetermined gaming state is generated based on the result of the predetermined lottery process being the predetermined lottery result, the game state when the game rotation is started with the configuration of the above feature C1. If the information is stored in the state storage means and the predetermined start process is executed in the situation where the specific state information is stored in the state storage means, the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated, so that the game round starts. Even if the game state in the case of being played is a game state that triggers the storage of specific state information and the end condition of the game state is satisfied before the predetermined start process is executed in the game time, the game time is concerned. It is possible to prevent a predetermined gaming state from occurring in the game.

Feature C6. A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed is provided.
As the predetermined start process, the predetermined start execution means updates the number of times the game times are executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means when the game times are executed (second embodiment). Step S2103) executed by the main MPU 82 in the above, and when the number of times the game is executed measured by the predetermined measuring means becomes the predetermined number of triggers (the number of fixed ceilings in the second embodiment). The start execution process (step S2106 executed by the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) for starting the predetermined game state as the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein when the specific state information is stored in the state storage means, the number-of-times update process is not executed.

According to the feature C6, in the configuration in which the predetermined game state is generated based on the execution of the game times of the predetermined number of triggers, the game times are executed when the specific state information is stored in the state storage means. Even so, the number update process for updating the number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means, is not executed. As a result, in the gaming state that triggers the storage of the specific state information, it is possible not only that the predetermined gaming state does not occur, but also that the update process of the number of times that the occurrence of the predetermined gaming state approaches is not executed. In this case, the configuration of the above feature C1 is provided, and the information of the game state when the game round is started is stored in the state storage means, and the predetermined start is performed in the situation where the specific state information is stored in the state storage means. When the process is executed, the number update process for updating the number of times the game is executed measured by the predetermined measuring means is not executed, so that the game state that triggers the storage of the specific state information ends. It is possible to prevent the update process from being executed the number of times that the occurrence of the predetermined gaming state approaches even if it is the number of times.

Feature C7. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34 in the second embodiment) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
With the acquisition means for acquiring special information (second hold information) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S709 in the main MPU 82). ,
Grant determination means (function for executing the validity determination process of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information (win / fail determination process), and
A privilege to give a privilege (open / close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (big hit result) assuming that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Granting means (a function of executing the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, the special electric closing processing, and the special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment),
The predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal power control process of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between the closed state and the open state, and
With
In each game time, the game time control means starts the game time operation and ends the game time operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, as one game time. It is intended to enable the game rounding operation to be performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball-entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to the feature C7, when the special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which the player is given a privilege, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state when the player is in the predetermined game state than when the player is in the separate game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

Feature C8. The state storage means stores the specific state information when the game state when the game round is started is a specific game state (high probability state).
The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature C8, the specific gaming state is more advantageous than the predetermined gaming state in terms of the ease with which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a great disadvantage even if the predetermined game state does not occur in the game times executed in the specific game state.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C8, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, and features M1 to M4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the feature B group and the feature C group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area and a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery to shift to a special game state, or a predetermined entry ball It is known that a game ball enters the club to shift to a special game state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to preferably give a profit to a player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. The game turn control means (main side in the third embodiment) that controls the game turn execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that the game turn operation is executed in the game turn. Function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change process, and special figure determination process of MPU82),
A specific lottery that executes a specific end lottery process (a fall determination process executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) that determines whether or not to end the specific game state in the specific game state (high probability state). Means (a function of executing the fall determination process of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) and
Predetermined lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery process (acquisition process of hold information and pass / fail determination process executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) (acquisition process of hold information of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) And the function to execute the pass / fail judgment process),
A predetermined privilege granting means (main in the third embodiment) for granting a predetermined privilege (second high frequency support mode) to a player based on the result of the predetermined lottery process being a predetermined lottery result (time saving result). (A function to execute the setting process for the time saving result of the side MPU 82) and
With
The specific lottery means is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific end lottery process is executed before the predetermined lottery process is executed in one game round.

According to the feature D1, when the lottery result for ending the specific game state is obtained in the specific end lottery process, the specific game state is terminated, and the predetermined privilege is a game based on the predetermined lottery result in the predetermined lottery process. Since it is given to the person, the player who expects to be in the specific game state expects that the lottery result for ending the specific game state will not be obtained in the specific end lottery process in the specific game state, and the predetermined privilege is given. The player who expects to do so expects that the predetermined lottery result will be obtained in the predetermined lottery process. In this case, the specific end lottery process is executed before the predetermined lottery process is executed in one game round. As a result, when the lottery result of the specific end lottery process is the lottery result for ending the specific game state in the game times in the specific game state, the predetermined lottery process is executed after the lottery result for ending the specific game state is obtained. Therefore, in the game times when the specific game state ends, it is possible to execute the predetermined lottery process in the situation where the specific game state ends. Therefore, the lottery process can be preferably performed.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the predetermined lottery means differs in an execution mode of the predetermined lottery process depending on whether or not it is in the specific gaming state.

According to the feature D2, since the execution mode of the predetermined lottery process differs depending on whether or not the predetermined game state is executed, the player pays attention to the game state at the timing when the predetermined lottery process is executed. In this case, if the lottery result of the specific end lottery process is the lottery result for ending the specific game state in the game times in the specific game state, the lottery result for ending the specific game state is provided. Since the predetermined lottery process is executed after this, in the game times when the specific game state ends, the predetermined lottery process is executed in the situation where the specific game state ends. Therefore, in the predetermined lottery process, it is possible to treat the game times at which the specific game state ends as a game times that are not in the specific game state.

Feature D3. Based on the result of the specific end lottery process being the end result (fall result), the specific end process for ending the specific game state (step S2208 executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment). (A function of executing the process of step S2208 of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment).
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein when the result of the specific end lottery process is the end result, the specific end process is executed before the predetermined lottery process is executed.

According to the feature D3, when the result of the specific end lottery process is the end result in the game times in the specific game times, the specific game state can be terminated before the predetermined lottery process is executed in the game times. It will be possible.

Feature D4. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided in the game area where the game ball flows down and switchable between an open state and a closed state,
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching the variable entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is set to the open state (special electric start processing, special electric opening processing, and special electric power of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment). Function to execute processing during closure) and
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery process being the special lottery result (big hit result), the special transition means (first) for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed. (Function of executing the special electric start processing of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

According to the feature D4, the result of the predetermined lottery process is the result of the predetermined lottery process in the configuration in which the special game state in which the variable ball entry control for the variable ball entry means is executed based on the result of the predetermined lottery process is the special lottery result. A predetermined privilege is given based on the result of a predetermined lottery. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not to grant the predetermined privilege by using the configuration of the predetermined lottery process that determines whether or not to generate the special gaming state.

Feature D5. The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein the specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the result of the predetermined lottery process is more likely to be the special lottery result than the separate gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to the feature D5, since the probability that the special gaming state occurs is high in the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, in the game times having the configuration of the above feature D1 and the result of the specific lottery process ending the specific game state, the predetermined lottery process is executed after the specific game state is completed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of game times in which the predetermined lottery process is executed in the specific game state.

Feature D6. Specific update means (type random number counter C2) for updating numerical information,
When the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the special lottery result, the special type lottery process (executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) using the numerical information updated by the specific update means. By executing the process of step S2211), the means for determining the types of benefits (opening / closing execution mode, winning / failing lottery mode, and support mode) that can be given to the player (step S2211 of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment). Function to execute processing) and
When the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result, the predetermined type lottery process (executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) using the numerical information updated by the specific update means. By executing the process of step S2217), a means for determining the type of the predetermined privilege that can be given to the player (a function of executing the process of step S2217 of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) and
The gaming machine according to the feature D4 or D5, which comprises the above-mentioned feature D4 or D5.

According to the feature D6, when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a special lottery result, the privilege of the type selected by the special type lottery process is given, so that it is possible to diversify the granting mode of the privilege. Will be. Further, when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined lottery result, the predetermined privilege of the type selected by the predetermined type lottery process is granted, so that it is possible to diversify the mode of granting the predetermined privilege. .. In this case, in the configuration in which the numerical information of the specific update means is used in the special type lottery process, the numerical information of the specific update means is also used in the predetermined type lottery process. As a result, it is possible to determine the type of predetermined privilege to be given when the predetermined lottery result is obtained by using the configuration for determining the type of the privilege to be given when the special lottery result is obtained.

Feature D7. The predetermined privilege granting means is any one of the features D1 to D6, characterized in that the predetermined privilege is not granted even if the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined lottery result in the specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature D7, even if the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined lottery result in the situation of the specific gaming state, the predetermined privilege is not given, so that the predetermined privilege is not excessively given. It will be possible. In this case, if the lottery result of the specific end lottery process is the lottery result for ending the specific game state in the game times in the specific game state, the lottery result for ending the specific game state is provided. Since the predetermined lottery process is executed after this, in the game times when the specific game state ends, the predetermined lottery process is executed in the situation where the specific game state ends. Therefore, it is possible to give a predetermined privilege at the game times when the specific game state ends.

Feature D8. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
With the acquisition means for acquiring special information (second hold information) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (the function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment). ,
A predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal power control process of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state, and
With
The predetermined lottery means executes the predetermined lottery process based on the acquisition of the special information.
As the granting of the predetermined privilege, the predetermined privilege granting means puts the gaming state into the predetermined gaming state (second high frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in the separate gaming state (normal gaming state). The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, which is characterized by shifting.

According to the feature D8, special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the predetermined lottery process is executed by acquiring the special information. In the configuration described above, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state when the game is in the predetermined game state than when the game is in the separate game state. Therefore, the player is expected to be in the predetermined gaming state and to continue the predetermined gaming state for a long time. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D8, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, and features M1 to M4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature D group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area and a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery to shift to a special game state, or a predetermined entry ball It is known that a game ball enters the club to shift to a special game state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, it is necessary that the lottery process is preferably executed in a gaming machine such as the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Game times control means (first to twelfth embodiments) that control game times execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that game rotation operation is executed in game times. (Function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change process, and special figure determination process) of the main MPU 82 in
A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed, and
When the game times are executed, the number of times updating means for updating the number of times the game times are executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means (in the first, third to eighth embodiments, step S1503 in the main MPU 82). The function of executing the process of step S2103 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2103 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3703 in the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, the tenth to twelfth. In the embodiment of the above, the function of executing the process of step S4503 in the main MPU 82) and
The number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means, is the predetermined number of triggers (the number of fixed ceilings in the first to fourth, sixth to twelfth embodiments, the number of first ceilings in the fifth embodiment, or The process of step S1506 in the main MPU 82 is executed in the predetermined privilege granting means (in the first, third to eighth embodiments) for granting the predetermined privilege (second high frequency support mode) when the number of times of the second ceiling is reached. The function of executing the process of step S2106 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3705 in the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, in the tenth to twelfth embodiments. (Function to execute the process of step S4505 in the main MPU 82) and
When it is specified that an information abnormality has occurred in the predetermined storage means (main side RAM 84) when the supply of the operating power is started, the abnormality response processing (first to third, sixth to twelfth embodiments). Then, an abnormality in which step S121 executed by the main MPU 82, step S2421 executed by the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, and step S2621) executed by the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment are executed. Corresponding means (a function of executing the process of step S121 in the main MPU 82 in the first to third, sixth to twelfth embodiments, and a function of executing the process of step S2421 in the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2621 in the main MPU 82) and
Based on the occurrence of the information abnormality, the information of the predetermined measuring means is a predetermined initial value (“500” in the first to fourth, sixth to twelfth embodiments, and “800” in the fifth embodiment. Step S122 executed by the main MPU 82 in the first to third, sixth to twelfth embodiments, and executed by the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment. Step S2506, in the fifth embodiment, the predetermined setting means for executing the predetermined setting means (step S2622 executed in the main MPU 82) (in the first to third, sixth to twelfth embodiments, the step S122 in the main MPU 82). The function of executing the process, the function of executing the process of step S2506 in the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step S2622 in the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, when the number of executions of the game times measured by the predetermined measurement means reaches the predetermined number of triggers, the predetermined privilege is given, so that the player is notified that the game times are repeatedly executed. It becomes possible to give a predetermined privilege. Further, when the supply of the operating power is started and an information abnormality has occurred in the predetermined storage means, the abnormality handling process is executed, so that it is possible to deal with the occurrence of the information abnormality. In this case, the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value based on the occurrence of the information abnormality. When an information abnormality has occurred, the information of the predetermined measuring means may also be abnormal information, but in such a situation, the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value, so that the predetermined measurement is performed. It is possible to prevent the game from being started with the information of the means being abnormal information.

Feature E2. Means for executing profit-giving processing (win / fail judgment processing) in a mode corresponding to the set value set as the target of use from the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (win / fail judgment in the main MPU 82) Function to execute processing) and
Settable status (setting value update processing) that allows the setting value to be used to be changed based on the predetermined related operation (setting change operation) performed when the supply of operating power is started. Situation generating means (the function of executing the process of step S117 in the main MPU 82 in the first to third, sixth to twelfth embodiments, and the main side in the fifth embodiment). (Function to execute the process of step S2617 in MPU82) and
With
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process in the settable situation.

According to the feature E2, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. You will expect it to be. In this case, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the predetermined initial value in the settable situation, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be maintained in the information before the supply of the operating power is stopped even if the settable situation occurs. It will be possible. In this configuration, the configuration of the above feature E1 is provided, and since the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value based on the occurrence of the information abnormality, the game is started with the information of the predetermined measuring means as the abnormal information. It is possible to prevent it from being stowed.

Feature E3. The abnormality response means stores the abnormality response information (information of "1") in the abnormality response storage area (game stop flag of the main RAM 84) in the abnormality response process.
In this gaming machine, when the settable situation occurs, the means for initializing the abnormality-corresponding storage area (in the first to third, fifth to twelfth embodiments, the set value update process in the main MPU 82 is performed. The gaming machine according to feature E2, which is characterized by having a function of executing RAM clear).

According to the feature E3, in a configuration in which it is necessary to generate a settable state in order to erase the abnormality response information stored based on the occurrence of an information abnormality, the information of the predetermined measuring means is specified in the settable state. When the abnormality response information is stored, the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes the predetermined initial value instead of the initial value of. As a result, the anomaly response storage area may be initialized regardless of whether or not the anomaly response information is stored in the settable status, and processing is executed in the settable status depending on whether or not the anomaly response information is stored. There is no need to make the content different. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load in the configurable situation.

Feature E4. The abnormality response means stores the abnormality response information (information of "1") in the abnormality response storage area (game stop flag of the main RAM 84) in the abnormality response process.
This gaming machine is
Means for executing profit-giving processing (win / fail judgment processing) in a mode corresponding to the set value set as the target of use from the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (win / fail judgment in the main MPU 82) Function to execute processing) and
Settable status (setting value update processing) that can change the set value to be used based on the predetermined related operation (setting change operation) performed when the supply of operating power is started. Situation generating means (function for executing the process of step S2417 of the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment) and
Means for initializing the anomaly-corresponding storage area when the configurable situation occurs (a function of executing the processes of steps S2504 and S2505 of the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment) and
With
The predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process when the settable situation occurs in a situation where the abnormality response information is not stored, and the predetermined setting means is described in a situation where the abnormality response information is stored. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the predetermined setting process is executed when a settable situation occurs.

According to the feature E4, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. You will expect it to be. In addition, it is necessary to generate a settable status in order to delete the abnormality response information stored based on the occurrence of an information abnormality. In this case, if a settable situation occurs in a situation where the abnormality response information is not stored, the information of the predetermined measuring means does not become a predetermined initial value, and the setting is made in the situation where the abnormality response information is stored. When a possible situation occurs, the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value. As a result, when a settable situation occurs, the information of the predetermined measuring means is basically prevented from becoming a predetermined initial value, and when a settable situation occurs in order to delete the abnormality response information, it is adjusted accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to set the information of the predetermined measuring means to a predetermined initial value.

Feature E5. Means (first to first) for executing a predetermined information initialization process for the predetermined storage means based on the specific related operation (RAM clear operation) being performed when the supply of operating power is started. 3. In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S119 in the main MPU 82, in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2419 in the main MPU 82, and in the fifth embodiment, the main The function of executing the process of step S2619 in the side MPU 82) is provided.
Even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not initialized, and the information is not initialized.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process even if the initialization process is executed.

According to the feature E5, in the configuration in which the initialization process of the predetermined information is executed for the predetermined storage means based on the specific related operation being performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the initial stage is described. Even if the conversion process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the predetermined initial value. As a result, even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be maintained in the information before the supply of the operating power is stopped. In this configuration, the configuration of the above feature E1 is provided, and since the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value based on the occurrence of the information abnormality, the game is started with the information of the predetermined measuring means as the abnormal information. It is possible to prevent it from being stowed.

Feature E6. Means for shifting the game state to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player (a function of executing the special electric start processing of the main MPU 82 in the first to fourth, sixth to twelfth embodiments), and
Means for making the information of the predetermined measuring means become the predetermined initial value in the wake of the transition to the special gaming state (steps in the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, eighth, and ninth embodiments). A function of executing the process of S1005, a function of executing the process of step S1905 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2305 in the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment, and a sixth embodiment. In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3109 in the main MPU 82, in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3305 in the main MPU 82, and in the tenth to twelfth embodiments, the function of step S4208 in the main MPU 82. Function to execute processing) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5.

According to the feature E6, in a configuration in which the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value triggered by the transition to the special gaming state, even when an information abnormality occurs when the supply of the operating power is started. The information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value. As a result, when an information abnormality occurs, the number of times the game times required to grant the predetermined privilege are executed, and the number of times the game times required to grant the predetermined privilege after the special game state occurs is executed. It can be the same as the number of times.

Feature E7. Equipped with a means for shifting the game state to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player (a function of executing the special electric start processing in the main MPU 82).
The predetermined privilege granting means specifies based on the information measured by the predetermined measuring means that the number of times the game is executed after the special game state ends is the predetermined number of triggers. If so, the above-mentioned prescribed benefits will be granted.
The number of executions of the game (“800” in the fifth embodiment) required until the number of executions of the game is specified to be the predetermined number of triggers after the predetermined setting process is executed, and the above. It is different from the number of times the game is executed (“500” in the fifth embodiment) required until the number of times the game is executed becomes the predetermined number of triggers after the special game state ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5.

According to the feature E7, in a configuration in which a predetermined privilege is given when the number of executions of the game times executed after the special game state occurs becomes the predetermined number of triggers, the number of times the game is executed after the information abnormality occurs. The number of times the game is executed until it is specified that the number of times the game has reached the predetermined number of times, and the number of times the game is executed after the special game state ends until it is specified that the number of times the game has been executed has reached the predetermined number of times. The number of executions is different. As a result, it is possible to make the number of executions of the game times required until the predetermined privilege is granted different between after the special game state ends and after the information abnormality occurs.

Feature E8. The number of times the game is executed, which is required until the number of times the game is executed after the predetermined setting process is executed, is specified as the number of times the predetermined trigger has been executed, is the number of times the game is executed after the special game state is completed. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the number of executions is larger than the number of executions of the gaming times required until it is specified that the predetermined number of triggers has been reached.

According to the feature E8, the number of times the game is executed until it is specified that the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of triggers after the information abnormality occurs is the number of times the game is executed after the special game state is completed. If the number of executions is larger than the number of executions of the game times required until it is specified that the predetermined number of triggers has been reached, and if an act that causes an information abnormality is performed illegally, the predetermined privilege will be given after that. It is possible to increase the number of times the game is executed before it is granted.

Feature E9. Predetermined ball entry means (in the first to fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments, the second operating port 34, the sixth, tenth to twelfth embodiments) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter. Then, with the special winning device 151),
Acquisition means for acquiring special information (second holding information) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (steps in the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments). A function of executing the process of S709, a function of executing the process of step S2806 in the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S3901 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments). ,
With the grant determination means (function for executing the validity determination processing of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. ,
A privilege to give a privilege (open / close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (big hit result) assuming that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Granting means (a function of executing the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, the special electric closing processing, and the special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments),
The predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal power control process of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between the closed state and the open state. ,
With
In each game time, the game time control means starts the game time operation and ends the game time operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, as one game time. It is intended to enable the game rounding operation to be performed.
As the granting of the predetermined privilege, the predetermined privilege granting means puts the gaming state into the predetermined gaming state (second high-frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball-entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in the separate gaming state (normal gaming state). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, which is characterized by shifting.

According to the feature E9, when the special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which the player is given a privilege, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state when the player is in the predetermined game state than when the player is in the separate game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E9, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, and features M1 to M4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature E group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area and a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery to shift to a special game state, or a predetermined entry ball It is known that a game ball enters the club to shift to a special game state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary that the gaming is preferably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. Game times control means (1st to 5th, 7th -Functions for executing the special figure change start process, the special figure change process, and the special figure determination process of the main MPU 82 in the twelfth embodiment),
A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed, and
When the game times are executed, the number of times updating means for updating the number of times the game times are executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means (in the first, third to fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments). A function of executing the process of step S1503 in the main MPU 82, a function of executing the process of step S2103 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S3703 in the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment. , The function of executing the process of step S4503 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments).
The number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means, is the predetermined number of triggers (the number of fixed ceilings in the first to fourth, seventh to twelfth embodiments, the number of first ceilings in the fifth embodiment, or In the first, third to fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments, the main MPU 82 grants a predetermined privilege (second high-frequency support mode) when the number of times of the second ceiling is reached. The function of executing the process of step S1506, the function of executing the process of step S2106 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3705 in the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, the tenth to tenth. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S4505 in the main MPU 82) and
Special transition means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is advantageous to the player (function for executing the special electric start processing of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh to twelfth embodiments) When,
Predetermined setting process (“500” in the first to fifth, seventh to twelfth embodiments) so that the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a specific initial value (“500” in the first to fifth, seventh to twelfth embodiments) when the special gaming state is started. In the first, fourth, fifth, eighth, and ninth embodiments, the process of step S1005 executed by the main MPU 82, and in the second embodiment, the process of step S1905 executed by the main MPU 82, In the third embodiment, the process of step S2305 executed by the main MPU 82, in the seventh embodiment, the process of step S3305 executed by the main MPU 82, and in the tenth to twelfth embodiments, the main MPU 82 In the first, fourth, fifth, eighth, and ninth embodiments, a function of executing the process of step S1005 in the main MPU 82, the second In the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1905 in the main MPU 82, in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2305 in the main MPU 82, and in the seventh embodiment, the process of step S3305 in the main MPU 82. (Function of executing the process of step S4208 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature F1 It becomes possible to give a predetermined privilege. In addition, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value triggered by the special gaming state, the predetermined privilege is given when the number of executions of the game times executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the predetermined number of triggers. It becomes possible to be granted. In this case, when the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value triggered by the special gaming state, the specific initial value is set when the special gaming state is started. As a result, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be obtained by stopping the supply of the operating power and restarting the supply of the operating power after obtaining a certain amount of profit in the special gaming state and before the end of the special gaming state. Even if a fraudulent act that forcibly terminates the special gaming state while maintaining it is performed, the information of the maintained predetermined measuring means is a specific initial value set when the special gaming state is started. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

Feature F2. Means for executing profit-giving processing (win / fail judgment processing) in a mode corresponding to the set value set as the target of use from the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (win / fail judgment in the main MPU 82) Function to execute processing) and
Settable status (setting value update processing) that can change the set value to be used based on the predetermined related operation (setting change operation) performed when the supply of operating power is started. Situation generating means (the function of executing the process of step S117 in the main MPU 82 in the first to third, seventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main side in the fourth embodiment). A function of executing the process of step S2417 in the MPU 82, a function of executing the process of step S2617 in the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment), and
With
The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process in the settable situation.

According to the feature F2, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. You will expect it to be. In this case, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value in the settable situation, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be maintained in the information before the supply of the operating power is stopped even if the settable situation occurs. It will be possible. In this configuration, the configuration of the above-mentioned feature F1 is provided, and the specific initial value is set when the special gaming state is started. As a result, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be obtained by stopping the supply of the operating power and restarting the supply of the operating power after obtaining a certain amount of profit in the special gaming state and before the end of the special gaming state. Even if a fraudulent act that forcibly terminates the special gaming state while maintaining it is performed, the information of the maintained predetermined measuring means is a specific initial value set when the special gaming state is started. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

Feature F3. A means for executing a predetermined information initialization process for a predetermined storage means (main side RAM 84) based on a specific related operation (RAM clear operation) being performed when the supply of operating power is started (RAM clear operation). In the first to third, seventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S119 in the main MPU 82, in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2419 in the main MPU 82, the fifth. In the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2619 in the main MPU 82) is provided.
Even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not initialized, and the information is not initialized.
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process even if the initialization process is executed.

According to the feature F3, in the configuration in which the initialization process of the predetermined information is executed for the predetermined storage means based on the specific related operation being performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the initial stage is described. Even if the conversion process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value. As a result, even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be maintained in the information before the supply of the operating power is stopped. In this configuration, the configuration of the above-mentioned feature F1 is provided, and the specific initial value is set when the special gaming state is started. As a result, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be obtained by stopping the supply of the operating power and restarting the supply of the operating power after obtaining a certain amount of profit in the special gaming state and before the end of the special gaming state. Even if a fraudulent act that forcibly terminates the special gaming state while maintaining it is performed, the information of the maintained predetermined measuring means is a specific initial value set when the special gaming state is started. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

Feature F4. Means (1st to 5th) for executing profit-giving processing (win / fail determination processing) in a mode corresponding to the setting value set as the target of use from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage. (Function of executing the hit / fail determination process of the main MPU 82 in the 7th to 12th embodiments) and
Settable status (setting value update processing) that can change the set value to be used based on the predetermined related operation (setting change operation) performed when the supply of operating power is started. Situation generating means (the function of executing the process of step S117 in the main MPU 82 in the first to third, seventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main side in the fourth embodiment). A function of executing the process of step S2417 in the MPU 82, a function of executing the process of step S2617 in the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment), and
With
The predetermined setting means has a configuration in which the predetermined setting process is not executed even if the initialization process is executed, and the predetermined setting process is not executed in the configurable situation, and the supply of operating power is started. In this case, a predetermined situation in which both the specific related operation and the predetermined related operation are not performed (in the first to third, seventh to twelfth embodiments, a positive determination is made in step S113 in the main MPU 82). In the fourth embodiment, the affirmative determination is made in step S2413 in the main MPU 82, and in the fifth embodiment, the affirmative determination is made in step S2613 in the main MPU 82). The gaming machine according to feature F3, characterized in that it is executed.

According to the feature F4, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. You will expect it to be. In this case, even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value, and the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value in the settable situation. Therefore, the initialization process is performed. Is executed, not only is it possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measuring means in the information before the supply of the operating power is stopped, but also the information of the predetermined measuring means is supplied of the operating power even if a settable situation occurs. It is possible to maintain the information before the stop. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is started and both the specific related operation and the predetermined related operation are not performed in the predetermined situation, the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value. As a result, even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value, and the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value in the configurable situation. It is possible to set the information of the predetermined measuring means to a specific initial value by setting the predetermined situation when the operation is started.

Feature F5. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided in the game area where the game ball flows down and switchable between an open state and a closed state,
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching the variable entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is set to the open state (special electric power of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh to twelfth embodiments). Function to execute start processing, processing while the special power is open, and processing while the special power is closed),
With
The special transition means shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state after the gaming round in which the operation result of the gaming rotation operation becomes a special result (stop result corresponding to the jackpot result) is completed.
It is a configuration in which the variable ball entry control is executed in the special gaming state.
The predetermined setting means executes the predetermined setting process after the operation result of the game rotation operation becomes the special result and before the variable ball entry control is started in the special game state. Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4.

According to the feature F5, the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value after the operation result of the game rotation operation becomes a special result and before the variable ball entry control is started in the special game state. It becomes possible to do.

Feature F6. Predetermined ball entry means (the second operating port 34 in the first to fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments, and special prize in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter. Device 151) and
Acquisition means for acquiring special information (second holding information) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (steps in the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments). A function of executing the process of S709, a function of executing the process of step S3901 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments), and
Grant determination means (approval determination process of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh to twelfth embodiments) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Function to execute) and
Predetermined ball entry control means (1st to 5th, 7th to 12th embodiments in which the predetermined ball entry means can be switched between a closed state and an open state) Function to execute) and
With
In each game time, the game time control means starts the game time operation and ends the game time operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, as one game time. It is intended to enable the game rounding operation to be performed.
As the granting of the predetermined privilege, the predetermined privilege granting means puts the gaming state into the predetermined gaming state (second high frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in the separate gaming state (normal gaming state). The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, which is characterized by shifting.

According to the feature F6, when the special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which the player is given a privilege, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state when the player is in the predetermined game state than when the player is in the separate game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F6, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, and features M1 to M4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to the above-mentioned feature F group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area and a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery to shift to a special game state, or a predetermined entry ball It is known that a game ball enters the club to shift to a special game state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, it is necessary to appropriately perform the game in the gaming machine as in the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. The game turn control means (main side in the sixth embodiment) that controls the game turn execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that the game turn operation is executed in the game turn. Function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change process, and special figure determination process of MPU82),
A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed, and
A function of updating the number of times the game times are executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means when the game times are executed (the function of executing the process of step S1503 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment). )When,
When the number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means, becomes the predetermined number of triggers (the number of fixed ceilings or the number of special ceilings in the sixth embodiment), the predetermined privilege (second high frequency support mode) is given. Predetermined privilege granting means to be granted (a function of executing the process of step S1506 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) and
A special transition means (a function of executing the special electric start processing of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is advantageous to the player, and
Predetermined setting process (main side MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) so that the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a specific initial value (“500” in the sixth embodiment) when the special gaming state ends. Predetermined setting means for executing the process of step S3109 (function for executing the process of step S3109 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G1, when the number of executions of the game times measured by the predetermined measurement means reaches the predetermined number of triggers, the predetermined privilege is given, so that the player is notified that the game times are repeatedly executed. It becomes possible to give a predetermined privilege. In addition, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value triggered by the special gaming state, the predetermined privilege is given when the number of executions of the game times executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the predetermined number of triggers. It becomes possible to be granted. In this case, when the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value triggered by the special gaming state, the specific initial value is set when the special gaming state ends. As a result, even if there are a plurality of patterns of game situations immediately before the transition to the special game state, the process of setting a specific initial value in the predetermined measuring means triggered by the special game state ends when the special game state ends. It becomes possible to aggregate as processing. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature G2. The special transition means
A means for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state when the gaming round is completed (a function of executing the processes of steps S3002 to S3005 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment).
Means for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state when an event different from the end of the gaming round occurs (a function of executing the distribution process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment), and
The gaming machine according to the feature G1, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature G2, there are a case where the game shifts to the special gaming state after the game round ends, and a case where the special gaming state shifts to the special gaming state when an event different from the end of the game round occurs. This makes it possible to diversify the pattern of transitioning to the special gaming state. In this case, the configuration of the above feature G1 is provided, and a specific initial value is set in the predetermined measuring means when the special gaming state ends, so that there are a plurality of patterns of gaming situations immediately before the transition to the special gaming state. Even so, the process of setting a specific initial value in the predetermined measuring means triggered by the special game state can be aggregated as the process when the special game state ends.

Feature G3. When the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the special gaming state, the information of the predetermined measuring means is different from the specific initial value or the specific initial value after the supply of the operating power is started. Specific setting means (sixth embodiment) for executing the specific setting process (step S3204 executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) for executing the game times in the situation of the value. The gaming machine according to the feature G1 or G2, which comprises the function of executing the process of step S3204 of the main MPU 82 in the above.

In the case of a configuration in which a specific initial value is set in the predetermined measuring means when the special gaming state ends, the operating power of the operating power is set after the special gaming state has gained a certain amount of profit and before the special gaming state ends. It is assumed that the special gaming state is forcibly terminated while the information of the predetermined measuring means is maintained by stopping the supply and restarting the supply of the operating power. On the other hand, according to the feature G3, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the special gaming state, the information of the predetermined measuring means is the specific initial value or the relevant initial value after the supply of the operating power is started. A specific setting process is executed so that the game times are executed in a situation where the initial value is different from the specific initial value. This makes it possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent activities.

Feature G4. When it is specified that the supply of operating power is stopped, a means for executing a power failure processing (power failure monitoring process executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) (main side MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) is executed. (Function to execute power failure monitoring process)
The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein the specific setting means executes the specific setting process in the power failure process when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the special gaming state.

According to the feature G4, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the special gaming state, a specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value is set in the predetermined measuring means in the power failure processing. Compared to the configuration in which the process of setting the initial value for the predetermined measuring means is executed at the start of the supply of the operating power, it is easier to identify whether or not the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the special gaming state. Become.

Feature G5. The number of executions of the game (“500” in the sixth embodiment) required until the number of executions of the game is specified to be the predetermined number of triggers after the predetermined setting process is executed, and the above. It is different from the number of times the game is executed (“800” in the sixth embodiment) required until the number of times the game is executed becomes the predetermined number of triggers after the specific setting process is executed. The gaming machine according to the feature G3 or G4.

According to the feature G5, the number of times the game is executed until it is specified that the number of times the game is executed has reached the predetermined number of times after the end of the special game state, and the number of times the game is executed and the supply of operating power during the special game state are supplied. Even when the game is stopped, the number of times the game is executed is different from the number of times the game is executed until it is specified that the number of times the game has been executed has reached the predetermined number of triggers after the supply of operating power is resumed. As a result, the number of times the game is executed until the predetermined privilege is granted is determined by stopping the supply of operating power after the end of the special game state and in the middle of the special game state, and restarting the supply of operating power. It is possible to make a difference afterwards.

Feature G6. The number of times the game is executed, which is required until the number of times the game is executed becomes the predetermined number of triggers after the specific setting process is executed, is the number of times the game is executed after the predetermined setting process is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G5, wherein the number of times the game is executed is greater than the number of times the game is executed, which is required until it is specified that the number of times the game has been executed has reached the predetermined number of times. ..

According to the feature G6, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the special game state, the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of triggers after the supply of the operating power is restarted. Because the required number of times the game is executed is greater than the number of times the game is executed before the number of times the game is executed is specified to be the predetermined number of triggers after the special game state ends. If an act of stopping the supply of operating power is performed illegally in the middle of a special game state, it is possible to increase the number of times the game is executed before the predetermined privilege is granted thereafter.

Feature G7. Profit-giving process (whether or not it is executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the target of use from the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage. Means for executing the determination process) (a function for executing the pass / fail determination process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) and
Settable status (setting value update processing) that allows the setting value to be used to be changed based on the predetermined related operation (setting change operation) performed when the supply of operating power is started. Situation generating means (function of executing the process of step S117 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) and
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G6, wherein the information of the predetermined measuring means is not changed in the settable state.

According to the feature G7, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. You will expect it to be. In this case, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the initial value in the settable situation, it is possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measuring means in the information before the supply of the operating power is stopped even if the settable situation occurs. Become. In the configuration, when the configuration of the above feature G3 is provided and the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the special gaming state, the information of the predetermined measuring means is the specific initial value or the relevant initial value after the supply of the operating power is started. A specific setting process is executed so that the game times are executed in a situation where the initial value is different from the specific initial value. As a result, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be obtained by stopping the supply of the operating power and restarting the supply of the operating power after obtaining a certain amount of profit in the special gaming state and before the end of the special gaming state. It is possible to neutralize cheating that forcibly terminates the special game state while maintaining it.

Feature G8. A means for executing a predetermined information initialization process for a predetermined storage means (main side RAM 84) based on a specific related operation (RAM clear operation) being performed when the supply of operating power is started (RAM clear operation). The function of executing the process of step S119 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) is provided.
Even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not initialized, and the information is not initialized.
The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G7, wherein the information of the predetermined measuring means is not changed even if the initialization process is executed.

According to the feature G8, in the configuration in which the initialization process of the predetermined information is executed for the predetermined storage means based on the specific related operation being performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the initial stage is described. Even if the conversion process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the initial value. As a result, even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be maintained in the information before the supply of the operating power is stopped. In the configuration, when the configuration of the above feature G3 is provided and the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the special gaming state, the information of the predetermined measuring means is the specific initial value or the relevant initial value after the supply of the operating power is started. A specific setting process is executed so that the game times are executed in a situation where the initial value is different from the specific initial value. As a result, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be obtained by stopping the supply of the operating power and restarting the supply of the operating power after obtaining a certain amount of profit in the special gaming state and before the end of the special gaming state. It is possible to neutralize cheating that forcibly terminates the special game state while maintaining it.

Feature G9. Profit-giving process (whether or not it is executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the target of use from the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage. Means for executing the determination process) (a function for executing the pass / fail determination process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) and
Settable status (setting value update processing) that allows the setting value to be used to be changed based on the predetermined related operation (setting change operation) performed when the supply of operating power is started. Situation generating means (function of executing the process of step S117 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) and
With
The configuration is such that the information of the predetermined measuring means is not changed even if the initialization process is executed, and the information of the predetermined measuring means is not changed in the configurable situation.
In the gaming machine, when the supply of operating power is started, both the specific related operation and the predetermined related operation are not performed in a predetermined situation (affirmative determination in step S113 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment). A means for ensuring that the information of the predetermined measuring means is an initial value different from the specific initial value or the specific initial value (step S114 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment). The gaming machine according to the feature G8, which is characterized by having a function of executing the processing of the above.

According to the feature G9, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. You will expect it to be. In this case, even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the initial value, and the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the initial value in the settable situation, so that the initialization process is executed. Not only is it possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measuring means in the information before the supply of the operating power is stopped, but also the information of the predetermined measuring means is retained in the information before the supply of the operating power is stopped even if a settable situation occurs. Can be maintained. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is started and both the specific related operation and the predetermined related operation are not performed in the predetermined situation, the information of the predetermined measuring means is the specific initial value or the specific initial value. It is set to a different initial value from. As a result, even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the initial value, and the supply of the operating power is started in the configuration in which the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the initial value in the settable situation. In some cases, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be set to a specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value by setting the predetermined situation.

Feature G10. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided in the game area where the game ball flows down and switchable between an open state and a closed state,
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching the variable entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is set to the open state (special electric start processing, special electric opening processing, and special electric power of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment). Function to execute processing during closure) and
With
It is a configuration in which the variable ball entry control is executed in the special gaming state.
Any of the features G1 to G9, wherein the predetermined setting means executes the predetermined setting process after the variable ball entry control in the special gaming state is completed and before the end timing of the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in 1 or 1.

According to the feature G10, it is possible to set the information of the predetermined measuring means to a specific initial value after the variable ball entry control is completed in the special game state and before the end timing of the special game state.

Feature G11. A predetermined ball entry means (special winning device 151 in the sixth embodiment) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
With the acquisition means for acquiring special information (second hold information) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (function of executing the process of step S2806 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment). ,
Grant determination means (main side in the sixth embodiment) for performing grant determination (whether or not the hit / fail determination process executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Function to execute the pass / fail judgment process of MPU82) and
The predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal power control process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between the closed state and the open state, and
With
In each game time, the game time control means starts the game time operation and ends the game time operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, as one game time. It is intended to enable the game rounding operation to be performed.
As the granting of the predetermined privilege, the predetermined privilege granting means puts the gaming state into the predetermined gaming state (second high frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in the separate gaming state (normal gaming state). The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G10, which is characterized by shifting.

According to the feature G11, when the special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which the player is given a privilege, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state when the player is in the predetermined game state than when the player is in the separate game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G11, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, and features M1 to M4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to the above-mentioned feature G group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area and a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery to shift to a special game state, or a predetermined entry ball It is known that a game ball enters the club to shift to a special game state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary that the processing is preferably executed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. Game times control means (1st to 5th, 7th) that control game times execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that game rotation operation is executed in game times. , A function to execute the special figure change start process, the special figure change process, and the special figure determination process of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment),
A period determining means for determining the duration of the game (a function of executing the process of specifying the variable display period of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments).
Specific measuring means for measuring the number of times the game has been executed (variable selection state counter 132 in the first to fifth and ninth embodiments, and a game number counter in the main RAM 84 in the seventh embodiment).
When the game times are executed, the specific update means for updating the number of times the game times are executed measured by the specific measuring means (step S1703 of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth and ninth embodiments). (Function to execute the process of step S3401 of the main MPU 82 in the seventh embodiment) and
The number of times the game is executed, which has been measured by the specific measurement means since the measurement reference trigger (open / close execution mode) is generated, is the specific reference number (500 in the first to fifth and ninth embodiments, the seventh. In the embodiment of the above, the mode changing means (first to fifth) for changing the mode of determining the duration of the game in the period determining means based on the fact that the last digit is "7"). , The function of executing the process of step S1705 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, and the function of executing the process of steps S3402 to S3405 of the main MPU 82 in the seventh embodiment).
Predetermined privilege granting means (time reduction of main MPU 82 in the 1st to 5th, 7th, and 9th embodiments) for granting a predetermined privilege (second high frequency support mode) when a predetermined granting opportunity (time saving result) occurs. Function to execute the setting process for the result) and
With
A gaming machine characterized in that the measurement reference trigger does not occur even if the predetermined grant trigger occurs and the predetermined privilege is granted.

According to the feature H1, since the determination mode of the duration of the game round is changed based on the number of game rounds executed after the measurement reference trigger occurs becomes the specific reference count, the game round is repeated. When it is executed, it is possible to prevent the mode of determining the duration of the game round from being standardized. Further, when the predetermined grant opportunity occurs, the predetermined privilege is granted, so that the player expects the predetermined grant opportunity to occur. In this case, even if the predetermined grant trigger occurs and the predetermined privilege is granted, the measurement reference trigger does not occur. As a result, it is possible to grant a predetermined privilege to the occurrence of a predetermined grant opportunity while not affecting the timing at which the determination mode of the duration of the game round is changed.

Feature H2. Predetermined lottery means (first to fifth, fifth) for executing predetermined lottery processing (acquisition processing of pending information and winning / failing determination processing executed by the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments). A function for executing the hold information acquisition process and the pass / fail determination process of the main MPU 82 in the seventh and ninth embodiments) is provided.
The game time control means controls the game time execution means so as to obtain an operation result corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process.
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the predetermined granting opportunity occurs when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a predetermined lottery result (time saving result).

According to the feature H2, in the configuration in which the predetermined privilege can be given when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result, the timing in which the determination mode of the duration of the game round is changed is not affected. , It is possible to give a predetermined privilege based on the result of a predetermined lottery.

Feature H3. Predetermined ball-entry means (second operating port 34 in the first, fifth, fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments) through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
Steps of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments to acquire special information (second hold information) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means. Function to execute the processing of S709) and
Grant determination means (approval determination process of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Function to execute) and
A privilege to give a privilege (open / close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (big hit result) assuming that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Granting means (functions of executing the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, the special electric closing processing, and the special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments).
Predetermined ball entry control means (1st to 5th, 7th, 9th embodiments in which the predetermined ball entry means can be switched between a closed state and an open state) Function to execute) and
With
In each game time, the game time control means starts the game time operation and ends the game time operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, as one game time. It is intended to enable the game rounding operation to be performed.
As the granting of the predetermined privilege, the predetermined privilege granting means puts the gaming state into the predetermined gaming state (second high frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in the separate gaming state (normal gaming state). The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, which is characterized by being transferred.

According to the feature H3, when the special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which the player is given a privilege, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state when the player is in the predetermined game state than when the player is in the separate game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, the configuration of the above feature H1 is provided, and even if a predetermined grant trigger occurs and a predetermined gaming state occurs, the measurement reference trigger does not occur. As a result, it is possible to generate a transition to a predetermined game state in response to the occurrence of a predetermined grant trigger while not affecting the timing at which the determination mode of the duration of the game times is changed.

Feature H4. A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed, and
When the game times are executed, the number of times updating means for updating the number of times the game times are executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means (in the first, third to fifth, and seventh embodiments, the main MPU 82 The function of executing the process of step S1503 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2103 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step S3703 in the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment).
With
The number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means from the measurement reference trigger, is the predetermined number of triggers (the number of fixed ceilings in the first to fourth, seventh to ninth embodiments, and in the fifth embodiment). When the number of times of the first ceiling or the number of times of the second ceiling is reached, the predetermined privilege (second high frequency support mode) or a privilege different from the predetermined privilege is given.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the specific reference number of times is less than the predetermined number of times by a predetermined number of times.

According to the feature H4, when the number of executions of the game times measured by the predetermined measurement means from the measurement reference opportunity reaches the predetermined number of times, the predetermined privilege or a privilege different from the predetermined privilege is given, so that the game times are repeatedly executed. It is possible to give the player a predetermined privilege or a privilege different from the predetermined privilege in response to the execution. In this case, the specific reference number of times is a predetermined number of times less than the predetermined number of triggers. As a result, the number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measurement means from the measurement reference opportunity, becomes the predetermined number of times, and the game times are performed in the game times that are the predetermined number of times before the predetermined privilege or the privilege different from the predetermined privilege is given. It is possible to make different modes of determining the duration. Therefore, by changing the mode of determining the duration of the game times, it is approaching that the predetermined privilege or a privilege different from the predetermined privilege is given when the number of times the game is executed becomes the predetermined number of triggers. It becomes possible to make the player recognize it. In this case, even if the configuration of the above feature H1 is provided and the predetermined grant trigger occurs and the predetermined privilege is granted, the measurement reference trigger does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the granting of the predetermined privilege due to the occurrence of the predetermined grant opportunity from affecting the game content as described above.

Feature H5. The mode changing means is based on the fact that the number of times the game has been executed, which has been measured by the specific measurement means since the occurrence of the measurement reference trigger, becomes the specific reference number, and the game times in the period determination means. The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein when the mode of determining the duration of the game is changed, the average period of the duration of the game is made longer than before.

According to the feature H5, the number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measurement means from the measurement reference opportunity, becomes the predetermined number of times, and in the game times before the predetermined privilege or the privilege different from the predetermined privilege is given. Since the average duration of the game times is longer than before, the digestion efficiency of the game times is reduced before the predetermined benefits or different benefits are granted when the number of times the game is executed becomes the predetermined number of triggers. It is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given in a short period of time. In this case, even if the configuration of the above feature H1 is provided and the predetermined grant trigger occurs and the predetermined privilege is granted, the measurement reference trigger does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the granting of the predetermined privilege due to the occurrence of the predetermined grant opportunity from affecting the game content as described above.

Feature H6. Multiple types of the specific reference times are set, and
In the mode changing means, every time the number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the specific measurement means after the measurement reference trigger occurs, becomes the specific reference number, the duration of the game in the period determining means. The game according to any one of features H1 to H3, characterized in that the determination mode of the above is changed to a predetermined determination mode (a function of executing the processing of steps S3401 to S3405 of the main MPU 82 in the seventh embodiment). Machine.

According to the feature H6, every time the number of game times executed after the measurement reference trigger occurs becomes any one of a plurality of types of specific reference times, the mode of determining the duration of the game times is changed to the predetermined determination mode. Therefore, it is possible to regularly and repeatedly generate a situation in which the player pays attention to the content of the game. In this case, even if the configuration of the above feature H1 is provided and the predetermined grant trigger occurs and the predetermined privilege is granted, the measurement reference trigger does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the granting of the predetermined privilege due to the occurrence of the predetermined grant opportunity from affecting the game content as described above.

Feature H7. In the mode changing means, the situation when the number of executions of the game times measured by the specific measurement means after the occurrence of the measurement reference trigger becomes the specific reference number is a specific situation (second high frequency support). Mode), the gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, wherein the period determining means does not change the mode of determining the duration of the gaming times.

According to the feature H7, in a specific situation, even if the number of game times executed after the measurement reference trigger occurs becomes the specific reference number, the mode of determining the duration of the game times is not changed. In a situation where it is not preferable to change the mode for determining the duration of the game, it is possible to prevent the mode for determining the duration of the game from being changed.

Feature H8. The mode changing means is based on the fact that the number of executions of the game times measured by the specific measurement means has reached the specific reference number since the measurement reference trigger was generated, and the game times in the period determination means. When changing the mode of determining the duration of the game, the average duration of the duration of the game is made longer than before.
The specific situation is a situation in which the mode of determining the duration of the game times in the period determination means is a mode in which the average period of the duration of the game times is shorter than in the case of the normal gaming state. Characteristic The gaming machine according to the feature H7.

According to the feature H8, when the number of game times executed after the measurement reference trigger occurs becomes the specific reference number, the average period of the duration of the game times becomes longer than before, so that the game It is possible to create a situation in which a flashy production occurs as a production of times. In this case, in a situation where the average period of the duration of the game times is shorter than that in the normal game state, when the number of game times executed after the measurement reference trigger occurs becomes the specific reference number. The mode of determining the duration of the game is not changed. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the situation where the digestion efficiency of the game times is high.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features H1 to H8, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, and features M1 to M4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34 in the eighth embodiment) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
With the acquisition means for acquiring special information (second hold information) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (the function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment). ,
Grant determination means (function for executing the validity determination process of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information (win / fail determination process), and
A privilege to give a privilege (open / close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (big hit result) assuming that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Granting means (a function of executing the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, the special electric closing processing, and the special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment),
The game rotation operation is started, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, so that the game rotation operation is performed in each game rotation. Game rotation control means (processing for starting special figure change and processing during special figure change of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) for controlling the game executing means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) And the function to execute the process during the confirmation of the special figure),
A period determining means for determining the duration of the game (a function of executing the process of specifying the variable display period of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) and
A predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal power control process of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state, and
A predetermined transition means for shifting the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (second high frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).
A specific measuring means (variable selection state counter 132 in the eighth embodiment) for measuring the number of times the game is executed, and
The period determination means is based on the fact that the number of times the game has been executed, which has been measured by the specific measurement means since the end of the predetermined game state, has reached the specific reference number (50 times in the eighth embodiment). A mode changing means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1705 and step S3512 of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) for changing the mode of determining the duration of the game round in
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature I1, when the special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which the player is given a privilege, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state when the player is in the predetermined game state than when the player is in the separate game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, since the mode of determining the duration of the game times is changed based on the number of game times executed after the predetermined game state ends becomes the specific reference number, the predetermined game state ends. After that, it is possible to change the mode of determining the duration of the game times at the timing when the specific reference number of game times is digested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination mode of the duration of the game times from being standardized, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

Feature I2. The predetermined transfer means does not grant the privilege based on the result of the grant determination being a predetermined response result (time saving result) that the special information corresponds to the predetermined response information. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the gaming state is shifted to the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature I2, based on the result of the grant determination, it is possible to generate a situation in which the gaming state shifts to the predetermined gaming state without the privilege being granted. Then, since the configuration of the above feature I1 is provided, the mode of determining the duration of the game times is changed based on the number of game times executed after the predetermined game state is completed becomes the specific reference number of times. , It is possible to change the mode of determining the duration of the game times at the timing when the game times of a specific reference number of times are digested after the predetermined game state is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination mode of the duration of the game times from being standardized, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

Feature I3. The mode changing means is based on the fact that the number of times the game has been executed, which has been measured by the specific measuring means since the end of the predetermined gaming state, has reached the specific reference number, and the game times in the period determining means. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein when the mode for determining the duration of the game is changed, the average period of the duration of the game is made longer than before.

According to the feature I3, when the number of game times executed after the predetermined game state ends becomes the specific reference number, the average period of the duration of the game times becomes longer than before, so that the predetermined game When a condition occurs, it is possible to reduce the digestion efficiency of the game after that, and it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given in a short period of time.

Feature I4. In the mode changing means, the situation when the number of executions of the game times measured by the specific measurement means after the end of the predetermined game state becomes the specific reference number is a specific situation (second high frequency support). Mode), the gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the period determining means does not change the mode of determining the duration of the gaming times.

According to the feature I4, in the case of a specific situation, even if the number of game times executed after the predetermined game state ends becomes the specific reference number, the mode of determining the duration of the game time is not changed. In a situation where it is not preferable to change the mode for determining the duration of the game, it is possible to prevent the mode for determining the duration of the game from being changed.

Feature I5. The mode changing means is based on the fact that the number of times the game has been executed, which has been measured by the specific measuring means since the end of the predetermined gaming state, has reached the specified reference number, and the game times in the period determining means. When changing the mode of determining the duration of the game, the average duration of the duration of the game is made longer than before.
The specific situation is a situation in which the mode of determining the duration of the game times in the period determination means is a mode in which the average period of the duration of the game times is shorter than in the case of the normal gaming state. Characteristic The gaming machine according to the feature I4.

According to the feature I5, when the number of game times executed after the predetermined game state ends reaches the specific reference number, the average period of the duration of the game times becomes longer than before, so that the game is played. It is possible to create a situation in which a flashy production occurs as a production of times. In this case, in a situation where the average period of the duration of the game times is shorter than that in the normal game state, when the number of game times executed after the predetermined game state ends becomes the specific reference number of times. The mode of determining the duration of the game is not changed. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the situation where the digestion efficiency of the game times is high.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features I1 to I5, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, and features M1 to M4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34 in the ninth embodiment) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
With the acquisition means for acquiring special information (second hold information) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (the function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment). ,
Grant determination means (function for executing the validity determination process of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information (win / fail determination process), and
A privilege to give a privilege (open / close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (big hit result) assuming that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Granting means (a function of executing the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, the special electric closing processing, and the special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment),
The game rotation operation is started, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, so that the game rotation operation is performed in each game rotation. Game rotation control means (processing for starting special figure change and processing during special figure change of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) for controlling the game executing means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) And the function to execute the process during the confirmation of the special figure),
A predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing a normal electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state.
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined transition opportunity (time reduction result, ceiling time reduction), the predetermined game state in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in the separate game state (normal game state) without granting the privilege. (Second high-frequency support mode), a predetermined state setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3604 and S3705 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) and
With
A gaming machine characterized in that the subsequent execution mode of the predetermined gaming state may differ depending on the gaming situation in which the predetermined transition trigger occurs.

According to the feature J1, when the special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means which is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which the player is given a privilege, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state when the player is in the predetermined game state than when the player is in the separate game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, when the predetermined game state is reached based on the occurrence of the predetermined transition opportunity, the predetermined game state is reached without the privilege being given. This makes it possible to give the player unexpectedness. In this case, the execution mode of the subsequent predetermined gaming state may differ depending on the gaming situation in which the predetermined transition trigger has occurred. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the predetermined game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J2. A feature is that the subsequent execution mode of the predetermined gaming state may differ between the case where the predetermined transition trigger occurs in the predetermined gaming state and the case where the predetermined transition trigger occurs in a situation other than the predetermined gaming state. Features The gaming machine described in J1.

According to the feature J2, since the subsequent transition mode of the predetermined gaming state may differ depending on whether or not the predetermined transition trigger occurs in the predetermined gaming state, not only whether or not the predetermined transition trigger occurs, but also whether or not the predetermined transition trigger occurs. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not a predetermined transition opportunity occurs in the predetermined gaming state.

Features J3. As the predetermined gaming state, the first predetermined gaming state (first high frequency support mode) and the second predetermined gaming state in which the frequency at which the predetermined ball entering means is opened is different from the first predetermined gaming state (the first predetermined gaming state). Second high frequency support mode) and exists,
The predetermined state setting means
When the predetermined transition trigger occurs in the first predetermined gaming state, the first predetermined state setting means for continuing the first predetermined gaming state (in step S3603 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment). Function to make affirmative judgment) and
When the predetermined transition trigger occurs in a gaming state that is not the first predetermined gaming state, a second predetermined state setting means (main in the ninth embodiment) that causes the subsequent gaming state to be the second predetermined gaming state. (Function to execute the process of step S3604 of the side MPU 82) and
The gaming machine according to the feature J1 or J2, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.

According to the feature J3, there are a first predetermined gaming state as a predetermined gaming state and a second predetermined gaming state in which the frequency at which the predetermined ball entry means is opened differs from the first predetermined gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the predetermined gaming state. Further, when the predetermined transition trigger occurs in the first predetermined gaming state, the first predetermined gaming state is continued, and when the predetermined transition trigger occurs in the gaming state other than the second predetermined gaming state, the subsequent gaming state is changed. It is the second predetermined gaming state. As a result, it is possible to draw the player attention to whether or not a predetermined transition trigger occurs in the first predetermined gaming state.

Features J4. The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the predetermined ball-entry means is more frequently in the open state in the first predetermined gaming state than in the second predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature J4, in a configuration in which the predetermined ball entry means is opened more frequently in the first predetermined game state than in the second predetermined game state, when a predetermined transition trigger occurs in the first predetermined game state. By continuing the first predetermined gaming state, it becomes possible to prioritize the continuation of the first predetermined gaming state, which is an advantageous side for the player.

Feature J5. A means for terminating the predetermined game state (9th A function of executing the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 of the main MPU 82 in the embodiment) is provided.
When the predetermined state setting means shifts to the predetermined gaming state based on the occurrence of the predetermined transition trigger, the end reference number of times of the predetermined gaming state is a predetermined number of times (first time reduction continuation number, second time reduction). The number of continuations)
When the predetermined transition trigger occurs in the predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine has a larger number of the remaining number of times required to reach the end reference number of times of the predetermined gaming state at that time, and the predetermined number of times. A function for executing the processes of steps S3605 to S3610 and steps S3706 to S3708 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment so that the number of times on the side becomes the end reference number of times in the predetermined gaming state thereafter. ), The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4.

According to the feature J5, when a predetermined transition trigger occurs in the predetermined gaming state, it is possible to set the reference number of times of termination of the predetermined gaming state thereafter to be an advantageous number for the player.

Features J6. The predetermined transition trigger is generated based on the result of the grant determination being a predetermined correspondence result (time saving result) that the special information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information. The gaming machine according to any one of J5.

According to the feature J6, based on the result of the grant determination, it is possible to generate a situation in which the gaming state shifts to the predetermined gaming state without the privilege being granted. In this case, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described above.

Feature J7. A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed, and
When the game times are executed, the number of times updating means for updating the number of times the game times are executed measured by the predetermined measuring means (a function of executing the process of step S3703 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment). )When,
With
The predetermined transition trigger is any one of the features J1 to J6, which is generated when the number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means, becomes the predetermined number of triggers (fixed ceiling number). The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature J7, when the number of executions of the game times measured by the predetermined measuring means reaches the predetermined number of triggers, the predetermined game state is set. Therefore, the game state is determined for the repeated execution of the game times. It is possible to shift to the gaming state. In this case, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features J1 to J7, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, and features M1 to M4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature H group, the feature I group, and the feature J group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area and a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery to shift to a special game state, or a predetermined entry ball It is known that a game ball enters the club to shift to a special game state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. Acquisition means for acquiring special information (first hold information, second hold information) based on the occurrence of an acquisition opportunity (in the first to fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments, step S704 in the main MPU 82 and The function of executing the process of step S709, the function of executing the process of step S2803 and step S2806 in the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment, and the function of step S3801 and step S3901 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments. Function to execute processing) and
With a predetermined determination means (function for executing the correctness determination process of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) for performing a predetermined determination (validity determination process) as to whether or not the special information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information. ,
Based on the result of the predetermined determination being the predetermined response result (time saving result) that the special information corresponds to the predetermined response information, the player is given a predetermined privilege (second high frequency support mode). (A function to execute the setting process for the time saving result of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) and
The variation display of the predetermined pattern is started, and the variation display of the predetermined pattern is terminated as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the predetermined determination. Predetermined display control means (special figure variation of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) for displaying and controlling the predetermined display means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so as to be performed. Function to execute start processing, processing during special figure change, and processing during special figure confirmation),
The specific display control means (sound light side MPU 93, display side MPU 103) that displays and controls the specific display means (symbol display device 41) so that the variable display of the specific symbols (designs of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3) is executed in the game round. )When,
With
The predetermined display means has a configuration in which the display range is narrower than that of the specific display means.
The predetermined privilege granting means is not in a restricted situation (high probability state or time saving state in the first to eighth embodiments, high probability state in the ninth to twelfth embodiments) and can be granted (first to eighth). In the normal gaming state in the embodiment, and in the normal gaming state or the time saving state in the ninth to twelfth embodiments), the predetermined privilege is given based on the result of the predetermined determination being the predetermined response result. In the restricted situation, if the result of the predetermined determination becomes the predetermined response result, the predetermined privilege is not given.
The predetermined display control means stops the variable display of the predetermined pattern in the predetermined display means when the result of the predetermined determination becomes the predetermined correspondence result in either the grantable situation or the restricted situation. As a result, the predetermined stop result ("4" or "5") is displayed.
The specific display control means
When the result of the predetermined determination becomes the predetermined correspondence result in the grantable situation, the specific stop result ("1.23" or "3.4." 1 ”) can be displayed (a function of executing the process of step S1408 of the sound light side MPU 93 in the first to twelfth embodiments) and
When the result of the predetermined determination becomes the predetermined correspondence result in the limited situation, it may be displayed when the result of the predetermined determination is a deviation result as a stop result of the variation display of the specific pattern in the specific display means. Restriction-corresponding means for displaying a predetermined deviation result (combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols) (a function of executing the process of step S1410 of the sound light side MPU 93 in the first to twelfth embodiments), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature K1, since the predetermined privilege is given based on the result of the predetermined determination becoming the predetermined correspondence result, the player expects that the result of the predetermined determination becomes the predetermined correspondence result. Further, while the predetermined privilege is given based on the result of the predetermined determination being the predetermined response result in the grantable situation, the predetermined privilege is not granted even if the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined response result in the restricted situation. .. This makes it possible to limit the situations in which the predetermined benefits are granted.

In this case, in the specific display means having a wider display range than the predetermined display means, when the result of the predetermined determination becomes the predetermined correspondence result in the grantable situation, the specific stop result is obtained as the stop result of the variable display of the specific pattern. On the other hand, when the result of the predetermined judgment becomes the predetermined correspondence result in the restricted situation, it can be displayed when the result of the predetermined judgment is a deviation result as the stop result of the variation display of the specific pattern. The result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it stand out that the predetermined privilege is given when the predetermined privilege is given, and when the predetermined privilege is not given even though the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined response result. It is possible to make it inconspicuous.

On the other hand, in the predetermined display means, the predetermined stop result is displayed as the stop result of the variation display of the predetermined pattern when the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined response result regardless of the grantable status or the restriction status. Will be done. As a result, the manager of the game hall can easily visually confirm that the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined response result. Further, since the predetermined display means has a narrower display range than the specific display means, even if the predetermined stop result is displayed by the predetermined display means in the restricted situation, the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined response result in the restricted situation. It becomes difficult for the player to notice.

Feature K2. The specific display control means has a special display area in the specific display means depending on whether the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined correspondence result or the result of the predetermined determination is the deviation result in the limited situation. It is characterized in that it is provided with display difference means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1412 and S1413 of the sound light side MPU 93 in the first to twelfth embodiments) for different display contents of (state suggestion area 43). Features The gaming machine described in K1.

According to the feature K2, when the result of the predetermined determination becomes the predetermined correspondence result in the restricted situation, even if the predetermined deviation result is displayed as the stop result of the variation display of the specific pattern in the specific display means, the special display means is special. Since the display content in the display area is different from the display content when the result of the predetermined determination is out of order, the manager of the game hall is restricted when the out-of-predetermined result is displayed in the specific display means. It is also possible to grasp from the display contents of the specific display means whether or not it is triggered by the predetermined response result in.

Feature K3. As the predetermined response result, at least the first predetermined response result (first time reduction result) and the second predetermined response result (second time reduction result) exist.
The predetermined privilege granting means differs in the content of the predetermined privilege to be given depending on whether the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined correspondence result or the result of the predetermined determination is the second predetermined correspondence result. To make you
The predetermined display control means makes the content of the predetermined stop result different between the case where the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined correspondence result and the case where the result of the predetermined determination is the second predetermined correspondence result. And
The grantable response means makes the content of the specific stop result different depending on whether the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined response result or the second predetermined response result in the grantable situation. It is a thing
The restriction response means is the said in the specific display means regardless of whether the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined response result or the second predetermined response result in the restriction situation. As a result of stopping the variable display of a specific pattern, the above-mentioned non-predetermined result is displayed.
The display difference means makes the display content of the special display area different depending on whether the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined correspondence result or the second predetermined correspondence result in the limited situation. The gaming machine according to the feature K2, which is characterized by being a thing.

According to the feature K3, in the case where the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined correspondence result and the second predetermined correspondence result in the grantable situation, it is the stop result of the variation display of the specific pattern in the specific display means. Since the content of the specific stop result is different, it is possible to suggest the content of the predetermined privilege to be given after that to the player by the content of the specific stop result. On the other hand, regardless of whether the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined response result or the second predetermined response result in the restricted situation, as a result of stopping the variable display of the specific pattern in the specific display means. Since the non-predetermined result is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined response result is obtained, including the type of the predetermined response result. Further, even in this case, the display content of the special display area in the specific display means differs depending on whether the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined correspondence result or the second predetermined correspondence result. The hall manager can grasp from the display contents of the specific display means which predetermined response result in the restricted situation is triggered when the out-of-predetermined result is displayed in the specific display means. It becomes.

Features K4. The gaming machine according to feature K2 or K3, wherein the display range of the special display area in the specific display means is narrower than the display range of the display area in which the specific pattern is displayed in the specific display means.

According to the feature K4, when the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined correspondence result in the restricted situation, the display content of the special display area in the specific display means is different from the case where the result of the predetermined determination is out of order. Even in the configuration of the contents, the display range of the special display area in the specific display means is narrower than the display range of the display area in which the specific pattern is displayed in the specific display means, so that the special display area is not conspicuous for the player. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature K5. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34 in the eighth embodiment) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
A predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal power control process of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state, and
With
The acquisition trigger is a configuration that occurs based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means.
As the granting of the predetermined privilege, the predetermined privilege granting means puts the gaming state into the predetermined gaming state (second high frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in the separate gaming state (normal gaming state). The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, which is characterized by being transferred.

According to the feature K5, when the special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information. It is possible to shift to a predetermined gaming state. Then, in the case of the predetermined game state, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in the case of another game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

Feature K6. Specific privilege (opening / closing execution mode) is given to the player based on the result of the predetermined determination being the grant response result (big hit result) that the special information corresponds to the grant response information. It is provided with privilege granting means (a function of executing the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, the special electric closing processing, and the special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment).
The feature K5 is characterized in that the predetermined privilege granting means shifts the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state without granting the specific privilege based on the result of the predetermined determination being the predetermined response result. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature K6, when the result of the predetermined determination becomes the predetermined correspondence result, the gaming state shifts to the predetermined gaming state without the specific privilege being given. This makes it possible to give the player unexpectedness.

Feature K7. Specific privilege (opening / closing execution mode) is given to the player based on the result of the predetermined determination being the grant response result (big hit result) that the special information corresponds to the grant response information. It is provided with privilege granting means (a function of executing the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, the special electric closing processing, and the special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment).
The restriction situation is any of the features K1 to K6, which is a specific gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability that the result of the predetermined determination is the result of the grant correspondence is higher than that of the separate gaming state. The gaming machine described in 1 or 1.

According to the feature K7, in the specific game state where the probability that the result of the predetermined determination becomes the grant correspondence result is higher than that in the separate game state, even if the result of the predetermined determination becomes the predetermined correspondence result, the predetermined privilege is not given. It becomes possible to do. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features K1 to K7, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, and features M1 to M4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature K group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area and a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery to shift to a special game state, or a predetermined entry ball It is known that a game ball enters the club to shift to a special game state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary that the gaming is preferably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. First acquisition means (10th to 12th implementations) to acquire first special information (first hold information) based on the occurrence of the first acquisition opportunity (entry of a game ball into the first operation port 33). (Function to execute the process of step S3801 of the main MPU 82 in the form) and
First grant determination of whether or not the first special information corresponds to the grant of a specific privilege (open / close execution mode) (first special electric power control process of the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) In the special figure variation start process in the first special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments, the first grant determination means (step S4005 of the special figure variation start process in step S4005) is executed. Function to execute processing) and
Taking the first special information as an opportunity, with the start of the first game round operation and the end of the first game round operation as a state corresponding to the result of the first grant determination as one game round. In each of the game rounds, the first game control means (in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) so that the first game round operation is executed by the first game execution means (first special figure display unit 37a). Function to execute special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation processing, and special figure determination processing in the first special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82)
A second acquisition means (10th to 12th embodiments) for acquiring the second special information (second holding information) based on the occurrence of the second acquisition opportunity (the entry of the game ball into the special winning device 151). (Function to execute the process of step S3901 of the main MPU 82 in
Second grant determination of whether or not the second special information corresponds to the grant of the specific privilege (special figure variation in the second special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) The process of step S4005 is executed in the special figure variation start process in the second special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the second grant determination means (the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) for executing the start process step S4005). Function) and
The second special information is used as an opportunity to start the second game round operation and end the second game round operation as a state corresponding to the result of the second grant determination as one game round. The second game control means (in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) so that the second game execution operation is executed by the second game execution means (second special figure display unit 37b) in each of the game times. Function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change process, and special figure determination process in the second special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82)
Predetermined transition means for shifting the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (time saving state) (a function of executing the setting processing for the time saving result of the main MPU 82 and the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments), and
The total number of game times triggered by the first special information and game times triggered by the second special information executed in the predetermined game state is the number of end triggers (first time reduction continuation number, second time reduction continuation number). Based on the number of times), the predetermined end means for ending the predetermined game state (the function of executing the end determination process of the time saving state of the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) and
With
A configuration in which at least a part of the period during which the game round triggered by the first special information is executed and at least a part of the period during which the game round triggered by the second special information is executed can overlap. And
In the predetermined end means, when one of the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information is completed, the total number of times becomes the end trigger number of times. Even if it is, if it is in the middle of the other game round that was started before the one game round is started, the predetermined gaming state is terminated after the other game round is finished. A game machine to play.

According to the feature L1, since the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information can be executed in duplicate, it is possible to increase the overall execution frequency of the game times. It becomes. In this case, even if the total number of times is the end trigger number when one of the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information is completed, that one If the other game is in the middle of the other game that was started before the other game is started, the predetermined game state ends after the other game is finished. As a result, the duration of the game round started in a situation where the total number of times in the predetermined game state is one less than the number of end triggers, and the special information on the side different from the special information that triggered the game round are used as a trigger. The number of game times executed before the end of the predetermined game state varies depending on the start timing of the game time and the duration of the game time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature L2. A period determining means for making the average period of the duration of the game triggered by the second special information shorter than the average period of the duration of the game triggered by the first special information in the predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature L1, characterized in that (a function of executing a function of executing a process of specifying a variable display period of the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments).

According to the feature L2, the digestion efficiency of the game times is improved by repeating the game times triggered by the second special information in which the average period of the duration of the game times is relatively short in the predetermined game state. It becomes possible to increase. On the other hand, in a situation where the total number of times in the predetermined gaming state is one less than the number of ending triggers, the gaming rounds are started triggered by the first special information in which the average period of the duration of the gaming rounds is relatively long. By setting this, the predetermined gaming state continues until the gaming round triggered by the first special information is completed. Then, the game times executed in the predetermined game state are executed by executing the game times triggered by the second special information while the game times triggered by the first special information are being executed. It is possible to make the total number of times larger than the number of end triggers.

Feature L3. The period determination means is a means for determining the duration of the game times triggered by the first special information, which is started in a situation where the total number of times is one less than the end trigger number in the predetermined game state ( The gaming machine according to feature L2, which comprises a function of executing the processes of steps S4809 to S4811 of the main MPU 82 in the twelfth embodiment).

According to the feature L3, when the game round triggered by the first special information is started in a situation where the total number of times in the predetermined game state is one less than the number of times of the end trigger, the duration of the game round is determined by lottery. Therefore, a player who wants to increase the number of game times executed in a predetermined game state as much as possible is expected to select a long period as the duration of the game times triggered by the first special information.

Feature L4. When the game ball flows down the first area (left side area PA2), the first ball entry means (first operating port 33) that allows the game ball to enter the ball,
A second ball entry means (special winning device 151) that enables the game ball to enter when the game ball flows down the second region (right area PA3).
With
The first acquisition trigger occurs when a game ball enters the first ball entry means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the second acquisition trigger occurs when a gaming ball enters the second ball entering means.

According to the feature L4, the player can select whether to execute the game times triggered by the first special information or the game times triggered by the second special information in the predetermined game state. In particular, in the configuration provided with the above features L2 or L3, the game times triggered by the second special information are repeated until the total number of times in the predetermined game state is one less than the number of times of the end trigger. When the total number of times in the predetermined game state becomes one less than the number of times of the end opportunity, the game times triggered by the first special information are executed, and the game times triggered by the first special information. By making it possible to execute the game times triggered by the second special information after the start of, it is possible to execute as many game times as possible by the end of the predetermined game state. Become.

Feature L5. Predetermined ball-entry means (special winning device 151 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
The predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal power control process of the main MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between the closed state and the open state, and
With
The second acquisition trigger occurs when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball-entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to the feature L5, the second special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the second special information is used to grant the specific privilege. In the configuration in which it is determined whether or not the information is the corresponding information, in the case of the predetermined gaming state, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in the case of another gaming state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features L1 to L5, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, and features M1 to M4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to the above-mentioned feature L group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area and a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery to shift to a special game state, or a predetermined entry ball It is known that a game ball enters the club to shift to a special game state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic M group>
Features M1. Implementation of the first acquisition means (11th and 12th implementations) for acquiring the first special information (first hold information) based on the occurrence of the first acquisition opportunity (entry of the game ball into the first operation port 33). (Function to execute the process of step S3801 of the main MPU 82 in the form) and
First grant determination of whether or not the first special information corresponds to the grant of the specific privilege (open / close execution mode) (first special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) In the special figure variation start process in the first special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the first grant determination means (step S4005) for executing the special figure variation start process in step S4005. Function to execute processing) and
Taking the first special information as an opportunity, with the start of the first game round operation and the end of the first game round operation as a state corresponding to the result of the first grant determination as one game round. In each of the game rounds, the first game control means (in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) so that the first game round operation is executed by the first game execution means (first special figure display unit 37a). Function to execute special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation processing, and special figure determination processing in the first special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82)
The second acquisition means (11th and 12th embodiments) for acquiring the second special information (second holding information) based on the occurrence of the second acquisition opportunity (entry of the game ball into the special winning device 151). (Function to execute the process of step S3901 of the main MPU 82 in
Second grant determination of whether or not the second special information corresponds to the grant of the specific privilege (special figure variation in the second special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) The process of step S4005 is executed in the special figure variation start process in the second special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the second grant determination means (11th and 12th embodiments) for executing the start process step S4005). Function) and
The second special information is used as an opportunity to start the second game round operation and end the second game round operation as a state corresponding to the result of the second grant determination as one game round. In each of the game rounds, the second game control means (in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) so that the second game round operation is executed by the second game execution means (second special figure display unit 37b). Function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change process, and special figure determination process in the second special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82)
Predetermined transition means for shifting the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state (time saving state) (a function of executing the setting processing for the time saving result of the main MPU 82 and the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments), and
The total number of game times triggered by the first special information and game times triggered by the second special information executed in the predetermined game state is the number of end triggers (first time reduction continuation number, second time reduction continuation number). Based on the number of times), the predetermined end means (the function of executing the end determination process of the time saving state of the main MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) and the predetermined end means for ending the predetermined game state.
A period determining means for making the average period of the duration of the game triggered by the second special information shorter than the average period of the duration of the game triggered by the first special information in the predetermined gaming state. (In the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S471 to S4713 of the main MPU 82, and in the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4812 to S4815 of the main MPU 82).
With
A configuration in which at least a part of the period during which the game round triggered by the first special information is executed and at least a part of the period during which the game round triggered by the second special information is executed can overlap. And
In the predetermined end means, when one of the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information is completed, the total number of times becomes the end trigger number of times. Even if it is, if it is in the middle of the other game round that was started before the one game round is started, the predetermined game state is terminated after the other game round is finished.
The period determining means sets the duration of the game times triggered by the first special information, which is started in the situation where the total number of times is one less than the number of times of the end trigger in the predetermined game state, in the predetermined game state. A short-term selection means (in the eleventh embodiment, the main MPU 82) that makes the period shorter than the duration of the game round triggered by the first special information started in another situation or makes it easier to make the period shorter. A gaming machine comprising a function of executing the process of step S4709 of the above, and a function of executing the process of steps S4809 to S4811 of the main MPU 82 in the twelfth embodiment).

According to the feature M1, since the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information can be executed in duplicate, it is possible to increase the overall execution frequency of the game times. It becomes. In addition, it is possible to improve the digestion efficiency of the game times by repeating the game times triggered by the second special information in which the average period of the duration of the game times is relatively short in the predetermined game state. It becomes.

In this case, even if the total number of times is the end trigger number when one of the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information is completed, that one If the other game is in the middle of the other game that was started before the other game is started, the predetermined game state ends after the other game is finished. As a result, the predetermined game state can be continued until the game times that triggered the end of the predetermined game state are completed.

However, in the configuration, when the game round triggered by the first special information is started in a situation where the total number of times in the predetermined gaming state is one less than the number of times of the end trigger, the first special information is triggered. Until the end of the game times, the game times triggered by the second special information are repeatedly executed, and the actual total number of game times executed in the predetermined game state is extremely larger than the number of times of the end trigger. There is a risk that it will increase. On the other hand, the duration of the game times triggered by the first special information, which was started in the situation where the total number of times is one less than the number of times of the end opportunity in the predetermined game state, is started in another situation in the predetermined game state. The period will be shorter or shorter than the duration of the game round triggered by the first special information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the substantially total number of game times executed in the predetermined game state from becoming extremely larger than the number of end triggers.

Feature M2. The short-term selection means sets the duration of the game times triggered by the first special information, which is started in the situation where the total number of times is one less than the number of times of the end trigger in the predetermined game state, in the predetermined game state. The gaming machine according to feature M1, wherein the period is equal to or less than the duration selected in the gaming times triggered by the second special information in the above.

According to the feature M2, the duration of the game round triggered by the first special information started in the situation where the total number of times is one less than the end trigger number in the predetermined game state is the second special information in the predetermined game state. Since the period is less than or equal to the duration selected in the triggered game times, it is possible to prevent the actual total number of game times executed in the predetermined game state from becoming larger than the end triggered times. It becomes.

Feature M3. When the game ball flows down the first area (left side area PA2), the first ball entry means (first operating port 33) that allows the game ball to enter the ball,
A second ball entry means (special winning device 151) that enables the game ball to enter when the game ball flows down the second region (right area PA3).
With
The first acquisition trigger occurs when a game ball enters the first ball entry means.
The gaming machine according to feature M1 or M2, wherein the second acquisition trigger occurs when a gaming ball enters the second ball entering means.

According to the feature M3, the player can select whether to execute the game times triggered by the first special information or the game times triggered by the second special information in the predetermined game state.

Features M4. Predetermined ball-entry means (special winning device 151 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
The predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal power control process of the main MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between the closed state and the open state, and
With
The second acquisition trigger occurs when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M3, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to the feature M4, the second special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the second special information is used to grant the specific privilege. In the configuration in which it is determined whether or not the information is the corresponding information, in the case of the predetermined gaming state, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in the case of another gaming state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features M1 to M4, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L5, and features M1 to M4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to the above-mentioned feature M group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area and a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery to shift to a special game state, or a predetermined entry ball It is known that a game ball enters the club to shift to a special game state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary that the gaming is preferably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 27 ... Game ball launching mechanism, 32 ... Special electric winning device, 33 ... 1st operating port, 34 ... 2nd operating port, 37a ... 1st special figure display unit, 37b ... 2nd special figure display unit, 41 ... symbol display device, 43 ... state suggestion area, 82 ... main side MPU, 83 ... main side ROM, 84 ... main side RAM, 93 ... sound light side MPU, 103 ... display side MPU, 131 ... ceiling counter 133 ... High probability state counter, 134 ... time saving state counter, 151 ... special winning device, PA2 ... left side area, PA3 ... right side area.

Claims (9)

A game time control means that controls the game time execution means so that the game time operation is executed in the game time, and
A predetermined measuring means for measuring the number of times the game is executed, and
When the game times are executed, the number of times updating means for updating the number of times the game times are executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means, and
A predetermined privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege when the number of executions of the game times measured by the predetermined measuring means reaches a predetermined trigger number.
When it is identified that an information error has occurred in the predetermined storage means when the supply of operating power is started, the abnormality response means for executing the abnormality response process and the error response means for executing the error response process.
A predetermined setting means for executing a predetermined setting process for making the information of the predetermined measurement means a predetermined initial value based on the occurrence of the information abnormality, and a predetermined setting means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with. A means for executing the profit-giving process in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the target of use from the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, and
Situation generating means for making it possible to change the set value to be used based on the predetermined related operation when the supply of operating power is started, and the situation generating means for making it possible to change the set value to be used.
With
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process in the settable situation. The abnormality response means stores the abnormality response information in the abnormality response storage area in the abnormality response process.
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the gaming machine includes means for initializing the abnormality-corresponding storage area when the settable situation occurs. The abnormality response means stores the abnormality response information in the abnormality response storage area in the abnormality response process.
This gaming machine is
A means for executing the profit-giving process in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the target of use from the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, and
Situation generating means for making it possible to change the set value to be used based on the predetermined related operation when the supply of operating power is started, and the situation generating means for making it possible to change the set value to be used.
A means for initializing the anomaly-corresponding storage area when the configurable situation occurs, and
With
The predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process when the settable situation occurs in a situation where the abnormality response information is not stored, and the predetermined setting means is described in a situation where the abnormality response information is stored. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined setting process is executed when a settable state occurs. A means for executing a predetermined information initialization process for the predetermined storage means based on the specific related operation being performed when the supply of operating power is started is provided.
Even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not initialized, and the information is not initialized.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process even if the initialization process is executed. A means of shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
A means for making the information of the predetermined measuring means become the predetermined initial value, triggered by the transition to the special gaming state.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the gaming machine is provided with. Equipped with a means to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
The predetermined privilege granting means specifies based on the information measured by the predetermined measuring means that the number of times the game is executed after the special game state ends is the predetermined number of triggers. If so, the above-mentioned prescribed benefits will be granted.
After the predetermined setting process is executed, the number of times the game is executed until it is specified that the number of times the game is executed has reached the predetermined number of triggers, and the number of times the game is executed, and after the special game state is completed, the number of times the game is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the number of executions is different from the number of executions of the game required until it is specified that the number of executions has reached the predetermined number of triggers. The number of times the game is executed, which is required until the number of times the game is executed becomes the number of times the predetermined trigger is specified after the predetermined setting process is executed, is the number of times the game is executed after the special game state is completed. The gaming machine according to claim 7, wherein the number of executions is larger than the number of executions of the gaming times required until it is specified that the predetermined number of triggers has been reached. Predetermined ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
An acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means,
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to grant correspondence information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination being the grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A predetermined ball entry control means capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state, and
With
In each game time, the game time control means starts the game time operation and ends the game time operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, as one game time. It is intended to enable the game rounding operation to be performed.
The predetermined privilege granting means according to claim 1 to 8, wherein the predetermined privilege granting means shifts the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in another gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one.

Images